Home

Phoenix RSM

1. Selection Options Type of Objects Files and Directories Host Name Content Time Stored within the last 7 days File Size 0 bytes v Minmum v Miscellaneous Options Watermark High 90 Low 90 Files to Indude Exdude Directories to Indude Exdude v pdf X gif v mov Hw DENE Data Service Policy Criteria Tab Elements Element Description Type of Objects Select the types of objects for processing Files and Directories Both files and directories are processed and rights for both are preserved Files Only Only files and their rights are preserved while directories are ignored Directories Only Directories and their rights are processed while files are ignored Host Name Use this parameter to migrate all files from a particular host The policy processes only files that originally came from the host computer named 2015 ss Phoenix RSM Element Content Time File Size Description Type the name of the computer on the network to define as the host Use to limit files processed to those containing a particular word or phrase Be certain to enclose the phrase in quotation marks otherwise all files containing any word typed is processed in the query For more information see Wildcards content searching Type a word or phrase to use for criteria for processing Select files based on time and date that they w
2. 2015 Data Management 325 Source Criteria Destination Scheduling Advanced When should the job run On specific dates amp times Y On which date and at what time Friday May 09 2014 at 06 00 AM Should the job be stopped before it is completed No Y 1 Click the Add button to add a scheduled runtime for the job The Date window appears for you to select a date and then the Time window appears for you to select a time 2 To delete scheduled run dates and times from the On which date and at what time box select a date and time entry and then click the Delete button to remove the setting 3 To edit a date and time entry delete the entry you want to change and then add a new run date and time 4 Determine if the job should be stopped before it completes This option is useful if there is or could be a conflict with another process If Yes is selected the Duration window appears for you to specify the job duration time 2015 326 Phoenix RSM Data Service Policies Advanced Tab Use the Data Service Policy Advanced tab after you have defined a schedule for your policy The Advanced tab offers more options to define how your jobs operate and process Source Criteria Destination Scheduling Advanced Pre and Post Processing Options Pre Process Command Post Process Command Log and Report Options Error Log Filename R Logs P err Browse R
3. In order to have the low resolution companion video and thumbnail files available be sure to enable them when setting up your recording policies See Camera Policies Processing tab The Surveillance Video Manager window features two main tabs at the top of the application to switch between the search or export functionality e Search Comprised of a Search Criteria pane to find video files a Search Results pane to select specific files from searched video and play in a Media Viewer and an Export Queue pane to view a list of video to export e Export Includes an Export Job Configuration pane and a Job Status pane to use when you are ready to export files found Workflow Surveillance Video Manager In order to use the Surveillance Video Manager video must be stored in a Vault and the Vault needs to be running It is necessary to have set up a recording policy in Camera Policies to move video from a camera into a Vault An administrator can find more information regarding these requirements at Add Vaults and Camera Policies The following describes working through the Surveillance Video Manager 1 From your suite of product applications open the Surveillance Video Manager application SurveillanceVideoManager exe For further explanation of how to launch applications using different operating systems see Getting Started 2 The application default opens to the Search tab Enter search criteria and click the Search button when do
4. file grouping plugin lt character string gt file spec lt pathname gt follow_links host_Id lt character string gt include_ offline job_type lt alpha gt list_pn lt pathname gt Default no directories excluded Omit files Accept multiple instances Default no files excluded Extended metadata in a token value pairs Token values can be found in the MetadataExtensions cfg section Format token lt command gt token lt command gt Default Enable the collection of extended metadata Default EmdProcessNone Enable file grouping Default FgProcessNone Files to be ingested This token value pair can be specified multiple times to include multiple file filters Default any Internal use only Where the Target and Process Service runs 2 Default blank Internal use only Specify the job type Valid values e backup e move Default backup The filename where all report information is written Supports token substitution Default path for the configuration file is R Logs P log 2015 Camera Management 169 Specify that the ingested file is to reside on the local computer local_only lt boolean gt pate ene ee Valid values true false Default true All subsequent files in the same job are sent to the same unit of media until it is full localize lt boolean gt Valid values true false Def
5. Unsecured Media cannot be added or removed from Vault This may also lock the front panel of libraries 4 Click OK to complete the process 2015 s Phoenix RSM Vault Shutdown or Restart Use the Shut Down Vault dialog box to shut down or restart a selected Vault Shutting down a Vault must be performed before you can modify the Vault s host computer To shut down or restart a Vault 1 From the Vault Admin left pane select a Vault name 2 From the toolbar click the Shut Down Vault button Shutdown Method Normal Y Current dient transfers are stopped Media may remain in drives New dients are notified of the vault s impending shutdown x cae Hep 3 From the Shut Down Vault dialog box use the Shutdown Method drop down list to select between three ways to shut down a Vault and one way to restart a Vault Normal Normal shutdown is the standard way to shut down a Vault A Normal shutdown stops current client activity after the running transaction completes all database transactions and performs any cleanup activity required but it does not remove media from the drive A Vault restarted after a normal shutdown should not report errors Extended Extended shutdown is the best way to shut down a Vault if it is going to be taken offline for an extended period of time Phoenix RSM waits until running client processes are finished before closing connections to clients and then completes all datab
6. Veracity Coldstore Summary e Review the displayed summary and ensure all the values are correct If information is incorrect click the Back button to navigate through previous wizard windows to edit 2015 Phoenix RSM Ready to Add Ready to Add Vault Review the summary below before dicking Next Vault name Coldstore1 Vault type Coldstore IP address of Coldstore 192 168 1 55 Number of data streams 10 Amount of memory per data stream cache 10 00 MB Temporary files storage location C Program Files x86 Phoenix WorkingC Amount of disk space used for temporary files 100 00 GB Database location C Program Files x86 Phoenix Database 1 Database optimized at 12 00 AM Maximum memory used for database 1 00 GB Maximum number of open database files 100 Activity logging enabled false Enable email notification false Error log pathname C Program Files x86 Phoenix Logs VaultSvc1 log Console pathname con 4 m b Ges 9 When ready to add the new Vault click Next e Mac users will be prompted for an Administrator Name and Password The Name field may already be populated with the name of the user running the Vault Wizard 2015 Vault Management 77 Add or Remove Vault Wizard wants to make changes Type your password to allow this co i bnieantnnenenenesmsmttenennne tee Password Cancel fiii e After entering a Name and Password click OK The
7. Camera Pool lt none gt X Target Camera Server Address Password Camera lt no camera selected gt Use VMS to generate low resolution proxy and preview image Enable Record on motion detection Motion threshold 5 l seconds Recording Computer A Peai Rights Name Type Ba O recorded and Live Video and PTZ Everyone Everyone 2015 Getting Started 47 Camera Information Camera Type exacg managed camera z Name Description Camera Pool lt none gt v Target Camera Server Address User Name Password Camera lt no camera selected gt Storage Location Recording Computer Access Permissions Rights Name Type SCO Recorded and Live Video and PTZ Everyone Everyone Done V Active oox o canei o Hele f Type the name and a description of the camera g To associate the camera with a Camera Pool select it from the drop down list For more information see Camera Policies h In the Target Camera group click Change to populate boxes The Modify Target dialog box appears 2015 s Phoenix RSM Server Information Address User Name Password Server Information Address User Name Password Selected Camera lt no camera selected gt Refresh Storage Location Browse ox Cancel Help i Type the Address User Name and Password j
8. Description When enabled receive an e mail when an event occurs for managing a Vault These events include Vault start Vault stop media requests etc and are the same as those recorded for notifications Type the e mail address of the user receiving e mail notifications about Phoenix RSM events The address of your mail server Use either IP address or computer name e Click the Send Test E mail button to test the path a If an invalid IP address or computer name is typed e mail notifications do not work Define where events are logged Computer Console causes events to be logged in a console that appears on the computer monitor It remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the console disappears If the Vault is restarted the console disappears and then reappears Window causes events to be logged in a window that appears on the computer monitor This window remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the window disappears If the Vault is restarted the window disappears and then reappears File causes events to be logged to a file Type the path where you want events logged If a window or console is open when changing the mode of output to File the console or window closes but the Vault continues to run To configure the Vault Service to open a window for diagnostic messages see Windows Diagnostics 2015 Vault Management 107 Vault Properties
9. Open online help to the Vault Admin webpage Open online help with focus on Vault Admin 2015 Vault Management 85 Menu Items Description Help gt Contents Open the local version of online help Help gt Online Help Open the web based version of online help Help gt Online Support Open the support webpage Help gt About Vault Admin Open the About Vault Admin window Vault Secure or Unsecure Use the Vault Security dialog box to protect your Vaults in your Information Repository Vaults should normally be run in a secured mode where a Vault s media cannot be manipulated Media cannot be imported or exported copied reformatted or even relabeled In Vaults equipped with storage devices that can be locked via software the front panel and all access panels are locked when the Vault is operating in secure mode at ae A py Before any media operation can be performed such as preparing media a Vault must be unsecured To secure or unsecure a Vault 1 From the Vault Admin left pane select a Vault name 2 From the toolbar click the Secure Unsecure Vault button Vault s Security State Secured z Media cannot be added to or removed from vault This may also lock the front panel of libraries Co hep 3 From the Vault Security dialog box use the drop down list to select either Secured or Unsecured Secured Media may be added to and removed from a Vault based on access rights to the media
10. Random Access Indicates if random access of the media is permitted Size The capacity of the media unit selected Speed A performance rating where different types of media are rated by access and read write performance Hard disk is considered the highest performance media and DDS 2 data tape is a lower performing media Status The overall health and usability of the media Storage Pool The name of the storage pool if the media belongs to one Total Errors The number of errors the selected media has generated Total Volume advanced mode only The number of volume the media holds Total Loads data tape media only The number of times the selected media has been loaded into a drive Type The storage device used by the media hard disk data tape etc Volume advanced mode only Lists each volume associated with the media Volumes From the Vault Admin left pane selecting Volumes displays volume information on the media if the media has more than one volume associated with it for the selected Vault A data tape might store data on both sides of the tape presenting two volumes of media storage Select a specific volume from the left pane and the details about that volume display in the Vault Admin right pane 2015 Vault Management 135 us oe py Only displays if in advanced mode From the Vault Admin main menu click View gt Enable Advanced Drives From the Vault Admin left pane selecting Drives di
11. Specify the maximum percent of media that will be used If the used is greater than the entered value the file is processed Valid values 1 100 Default 0 Specify the minimum percent of media used after the high watermark has been reached If the of media used is greater than this value and the high watermark has been reached the file is processed Valid values 1 100 Default 0 Specify the source media name Default any Specify the source media speed Valid values e SO S10 e Unspecified Default Unspecified Specify the source media type from the file e Hdisk Hard disk e 8mm Eight millimeter tape 2015 Command Line Arguments 421 Token Value Description e Dds Digital data storage Dit Digital linear tape e Ait Advanced intelligent tape SuperAit Super advanced intelligent tape e Lto Linear tape open e Vxa Exabyte Vxa tape e Travan Travan tape MagOptical Read write optical NullDevice e Unspecified Default Unspecified src_storage_pool lt character Specify the source storage pool sanga Default any src_Vault_name lt character Specify the source Vault pues Default any src_volume_ format Currently not supported src_volume_name Currently not supported Used only in the policy file Specify the days the job is to run Use to indicate days that job does not run tart lt mtwtfss gt AEA S Fo
12. Start Export Element Description Export destination Define where files are exported to Custom Arguments 8 gt These fields are defined in ExportExtensions cfg by your Phoenix RSM administrator Consult your Phoenix RSM administrator for details 2015 288 Phoenix RSM Element Description The image above displays the arguments from a sample ExportExtentions cfg file e Blank fields are ignored e If typing a number into a spin control manually press TAB or ENTER for the new number to take effect After setting the parameters click Start Export to export videos A job status box appears in the Job Status pane during the job and the Stop button is active If you click Stop while it is exporting files not all of the files in the Export Queue are exported Any files that have completed export remain on the target computer Click Dismiss to close the job status box Click View to open a log file for job details or to diagnose export issues Problems with exporting videos Existing files on networked computers are not overwritten by default If an export job is unsuccessful there may already be a copy of the files on the target computer Avoid errors by setting additional export parameters For example to overwrite files on a networked computer from the When to overwrite existing files field select Always or Only if newer e Ensure that the files to overwrite are not write protected by the operating system on
13. User Name Organization e aeee InstallShield w En E 5 Type your User Name and Organization 6 Select Next for the setup type Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type Typical All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space Minimal B Minimum required Features will be installed D Custom Choose which program features you want installed and where they will be installed Recommended for advanced users InstallShield lt Back Cancel 8 Select the type of Server installation you prefer Typical is recommended Typical A complete installation See Server Bundle contents Minimal Includes everything in Typical except Help and Documentation Custom By default includes everything in Typical If you select Custom click Next for the Custom Setup window to appear To select which components are to be installed click the Help drop down icon for a list of feature options The Custom Setup window also includes the following option e Space launches the Disk Space Available window displaying the amount of disk space required to install selected features The window also highlights any volumes that do not have enough disk space to support the selected features 2015 Installation 9 After you have made your selection select Next to review Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to beg
14. string gt dst_volume_ format dst_volume_name dst_volume_pack dt_access lt alpha gt lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt Description e Dds Digital data storage Dit Digital linear tape e Ait Advanced intelligent tape SuperAit Super advanced intelligent tape e Vxa Exabyte VXA tape e Travan Travan tape e Lto Linear tape open e MagOptical Read write optical e Unspecified Default Unspecified Specify the name of the destination storage pool to be used Use for no storage pool name Default any Specify the destination vault to be used Default any Internal use only Internal use only Internal use only Process files based on the accessed date and time Valid values e AO Absolute Old Select files with a dtu date_time_use equal to or before the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number e AN Absolute New Select files with a dtu equal to or after the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number e RO Relative Old Select files with a dtu equal to or before the relative specified date 2015 Data Management 305 Token Value Description e RN Relative New Select files with a dtu equal to or after the relative specified date e Inactive Do not use date Default Process files based on the date and time stored on the Vault Valid values e AO Absolut
15. Default The height of the video frame Works in conjunction with frame_width Default 0 The width of the video frame Works in conjunction with frame_height Default 0 2015 Camera Management 205 2015 Token Value host_Id lt uuid gt hostname lt character string gt live_view_enable lt boolean gt live_view_url lt pathname gt manufacturer lt character string gt mgmt_enable lt boolean gt mgmt_url lt URL gt model lt character string gt name lt character string gt owner lt character string gt password lt character string gt Description The host Id of the recording computer Default 0 The host name of the recording computer Default Enable SVM to receive and display live feeds from the camera Valid values true false Default true The RTSP URL used to live view video from the camera Default path The manufacturer of the camera Default Generic Enable camera management from a web browser when this type of functionality is supported by the camera Valid values true false Default true The URL used to manage the camera Default URL A user defined value this is the camera s model number Default Generic Must match the policy_name The name of the camera Default Internal use only The password for the camera when a password is required to access the camer
16. Default Data Services Error Log To see if a job had any errors look at the Phoenix RSM error log Unless you change the settings and path Phoenix RSM employs the following R Logs P err This value can be changed when running DataSvcsCl or in the Data Services configuration file Pathname Variables for Logs 2015 aa Phoenix RSM Pathname variables are expressions to define what information is included in your logs Variable P or Pn H or Hn D Dy Dm Dd T Th Tm Ts R or Rn Command Line Options Description Policy Name Host Name Date yyyy mm dd Year Month Day Time hh mm Hour Minute Second Root Pathname Valid only at the beginning of a string When you run DataSvcsCl the command line can contain a command line option or token value pairs As needed append tokens as listed below under Job Token Value Pairs to the execution path The command line is formed as follows DataSvesCl lt option gt To retrieve usage and version information use the appropriate option below e usage List all valid parameters e version Display the current version information Job Token Value Pairs Use the following token value pairs to specify policy information for the job that is going to be run 2015 Command Line Arguments 415 Token Value Description Used only in the policy file The exact start time and date that the job is to run Multiple absolute
17. Determine if the file or directory at that pathname is a match to the applied filter If Yes use the Include Exclude value of the filter to determine the final process value If No the directory can still be walked to look for further matches Walk Determine if the tree will be walked further down in search of a match Files are never walked 2015 34 Phoenix RSM Filter Pathname Process Walk IH1 No Yes HHA H1 D1 Yes Yes H1 D1 F 1 Yes No H1 No Yes HH1 H1 D1 Yes Yes H1 D1 F 1 Yes No H1 D1 No Yes H1 D1 D2 No Yes H1 D1 D2 D3 Yes Yes H1 D1 D2 H1 D1 D2 F 1 Yes No 1H1 D1 D2 D3 F 1 Yes No H2 D1 No No H1 D1 Yes Yes H1 D1 F 1 Yes No H1 D1 H1 D1 D2 Yes No H1 D1 D2 F 1 No No H1 D1 Yes Yes H1 IIH1 F1 Yes No H1 D1 D2 D3 No No H1 D1 D2 D3 Yes Yes 1H1 D1 D2 D3 D4 No No H1 D1 D2 1H1 D1 D2 D3 F 1 No No H1 D1 D2 F 1 Yes No H1 No Yes H1 D1 Yes Yes 2015 H Host D Directory F File Understanding File Filters Customization 347 The following table demonstrates how file filters work and includes some uses of wildcards If Process is Yes use the Include Exclude value of the filter to determine the final process value Filter The filter applied in the Criteria tab This can be either an Include or Exclude filter Pathname The current file or directory being looked at to determine the next step of processing Process Determine if the file o
18. Events are logged in computer monitor window It remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the window disappears If the Vault is restarted the window disappears and then reappears a i f py By selecting Computer Console or Window in a Windows environment configure Vault service on Windows to open a window on the desktop for diagnostic messages Once configured Vault activity displays a If you close a window or console the Vault stops Phoenix RSM does not operate without running Vaults File Events are logged to a file With this option type the file name to store the events or select a location from the Event Log Pathname dialog box by clicking the Browse button 2015 Phoenix RSM Q Notification Email Notification Enable email notifications Who should receive email notifications What is the name or IP address of your mail server Event Logging Where should events be logged Computer Console v Computer Console Hep Cancel het 8 Click Next for the Ready to Add window The Ready to Add window displays a summary of the Vault values See the corresponding header for your storage device type Hard Disk Summary e Review the displayed summary and ensure all the values are correct If information is incorrect click the Back button to navigate through previous wizard windows to edit 2015 2015 Ready to Add Ready to Add Vault Review the summary b
19. Hard disk is considered a high performance media and is assigned a high rating of S8 Slower data tape technologies are lower performance and are assigned a lower rating of S0 From the drop down list select a performance rating Only media speeds for the parameters selected in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool drop down lists are displayed If none were selected then only the media speeds from media available within the Information Repository are displayed Set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both New Entry window If you select lt new entry gt a window appears to type a new entry for either the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool source In these new entry windows you can use wildcards to better manage and specify where files are coming from Wildcards for file filters operate on file names directory filters operate on directory name For more information see Wildcards Data Service Policies Criteria Tab Use the Data Service Policy Criteria tab after the Source tab In the Criteria tab you can further refine which files are moved copied or deleted by configuring the criteria parameters If all the fields are left empty on this tab then all of the files that live at the source are migrated replicated or purged To select files from specific locations or of specific types use file and directory filters 2015 Data Management 317 Source Criteria Destination Scheduling Advanced
20. Key Type String value Value lt picture extension list gt lt picture extension gt SEMI COLON lt picture extension gt lt picture extension gt lt string of characters gt Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in picture Value 2015 ssa Phoenix RSM Key lt picture extension list gt lt picture extension gt SEMI COLON lt picture extension gt lt picture extension gt lt string of characters gt Sample Usage PictureExtList Char 11 bmp gif jpg Name PrimaryNicName Description Defines the NIC Network Interface Card which is used as the primary interface Default In Linux the primary network interface card NIC is chosen by looking for the first non zero IP address Up device eth0 eth1 eth2 If none found then first device as shown in ifconfig a Apple is same as Linux except uses device names en0O en1 en2 Windows is chosen using the first non zero Enabled NIC in the list shown in the Advanced Settings dialog box in the Network Connections window Open Network Connections and Advanced Settings option in the Advanced menu In all cases above the Local Loopback device is only chosen if no other device is available Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Network Interface Description Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in value Value Network Interface
21. Phoenix RSM i J f A The migration replication and purging of data is key to Phoenix RSM because those functions allow for a very scalable solution Many types of storage devices may be used with Phoenix RSM and can be added as you need them This proves to be cost effective and even more scalable for long term retention with this multi tiered architecture Since the Data Services Service manages the data between Vaults within the Information Repository it is the Locator Service that tracks which Vaults on the network are active The product architecture proves advantageous with the following Load Balancing You can mark a specific storage pool as part of the destination criteria for jobs The clients locate the Vault s that contain the designated storage pool and stores the defined files to it If there are multiple Vaults with media belonging to the storage pool defined for the initial job clients pick the one with the most available free space on it This keeps the entire Information Repository load balanced Complete and Accurate Stored Files As a job is running the completeness and accuracy of the stored files are constantly being verified Most other products that perform data verification read data from the media piece and compare it to the original data on the client computer This method is resource intensive and time consuming Phoenix RSM uses a cyclic redundancy check CRC as the files are written to storage media
22. Spin Valid Token Values Blank ValueOk lt boolean gt Description lt character string gt Choice lt character string gt Name lt character string gt Type Pathname Label lt character string gt DefaultValue lt character string gt BlankValueOk lt boolean gt Description lt character string gt Name lt character string gt Description Indicate if the value is left blank Valid for String Pathname and Choice only Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Default A choice statement that can be selected Must have at least one choice Can be reused as many times as needed The export item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value to load into the control by default Valid value a string Default Indicate if the value is left blank Valid for String Pathname and Choice only Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Default The export item s name 2015 Customization 355 Query block Tipe Valid Token Values Description Required Default Type Spin The Query type The label for the control as it will Label lt character string gt appear in the application Default The value to load into the control by default Valid values
23. Storage Pool m Media Type Media Speed lt any gt lt any gt Only the default names of lt any gt lt unnamed gt lt new entry gt or implemented names of Vaults storage pools media media types and media speeds already in the Information Repository appear in the Destination tab drop down lists New names with associated parameters appear also once added You can enter names of new Vaults media or storage pools to the Information Repository before actually adding them and the names will appear beneath lt any gt in the given field However it is recommended to select only media that appears in the drop down list otherwise you may increase chances of error There are several options for populating the Destination tab fields e Leave the default values lt any gt Phoenix RSM determines the most accessible Vault and the media with the most free space e Select a parameter and let Phoenix RSM take care of the rest For example if the Media Speed of S8 is selected then only media running at the speed associated with S8 writes Or if Storage Pool or Media Name is selected then files are only sent to the storage pool or media selected With a selected Vault Phoenix RSM uses the most available Vault or media with the most free space e Select a parameter and select available parameters from remaining fields If a Vault Media Name or Storage Pool parameter is selected then remaining fields
24. The query afe matches a f or e The query a m matches any single character in the range of a to m 1 Substitutes any one character that is not specified in a set Or an ASCII sequential run of characters can be indicated Characters notin set by using a hyphen to separate the first character in the sequence from the last character in the sequence lt beginning character gt lt end character gt Examples The query afe searches for any single character other than a f or e The query a m searches for any single character that is not in the range of a m When is the first character of a pattern the entire pattern is omitted Entire pattern not in set Example The query primary returns everything except primary 2015 33 Phoenix RSM Wildcard Description pe When using this wildcard in extended metadata searches it is best to use is equal to To obtain predictable results avoid contains does not contain and is not equal to Causes the character following the backslash to be treated as a literal character Normally this is used with one of the Escape next character wildcard characters to denote that character itself not its wildcard expression meaning Example To process Accounting 2007 type Accounting 2007 since is normally interpreted by the Information Repository as a wildcard Multiple wildcards Along with using wildcards individually combine them
25. The value to load into the control by default Valid values a number between the LowerLimit and UpperLimit Default the lower limit a If the DefaultValue for a Spin block is not between the LowerLimit and UpperLimit the entire MetadataExtensions block is ignored The tooltip for the control Default The lower limit for the spin control Default 0 The upper limit for the spin control Valid only for Spin Default lower limit 100 The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type 2015 Customization 365 Query block Valid Token Values Description Type The label for the control as it will Label lt character string gt appear in the application Default The value to load into the control default DefaultValue lt character string gt Valid values a string Defaults Indicate if the value is left blank Valid for String Pathname Date and Choice only A red asterisk will be BlankValueOk lt boolean gt displayed if this value is set to false Valid values true false Default true Description lt character The tooltip for the control aa gt string Default This value is the number of lines displayed for the textbox when using the string query Use for multi line metadata values NumLines lt number gt Default 1 A This token is only for use with the IngestMdExt and ModMdExt sections Sample of Generic
26. a number between the LowerLimit and UpperLimit Default the lower limit Default Value lt number gt A If the DefaultValue for a Spin block is not between the LowerLimit and UpperLimit the entire ExportExtension block is ignored Description lt character The tooltip for the control k s n string Default The lower limit for the spin control LowerLimit lt number gt Default 0 The upper limit for the spin control UpperLimit lt number gt Valid only for Spin Default lower limit 100 The export item s name Name lt character string gt Required Default ming Type String The Query type The label for the control as it will Label lt character string gt appear in the application 2015 356 Phoenix RSM SCTE STE Valid Token Values Type Default Value lt character string gt Blank ValueOk lt boolean gt Description lt character string gt ANote About Wildcards Description Default The value to load into the control default Valid values a string Defaults Indicate if the value is left blank Valid for String Pathname and Choice only Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Default Pay attention to brackets there needs to be an opening bracket after ExportExtensions and a closing bracket after the last Query block a It is best to get familiar with Phoenix RSM
27. py When migrating from data tape media files are marked as deleted but are not actually deleted until the media is reused and files are overwritten This enables migration jobs to finish in a timely manner Replicate Set the policy up to copy files from one location to another one Vault to another Vault Retains the original stored copy Purge Set policy to permanently delete files from a Vault within the Information Repository 2015 so Phoenix RSM Elements Description Data Tape When you select Purge for files on data tape media a flag is logged in the database log index indicating deleted files However the files are not actually removed from the data tape until you run Erase Selected Media where media is reused and files are overwritten Hard Disk Files on hard disk media are purged immediately Active Select to make the policy active and de select to make the policy not active If not active a triangular caution symbol appears over the policy in the Data Service Policies window Policy Name pane alerting you to this condition Delete a Policy You can delete a policy that no longer meets your needs or you can de activate a policy and then re activate it at a later time if needed To delete a policy 1 From the Data Service Policies window Policy Name pane click the policy to delete 2 Click the Delete button x 3 After deletion of a policy the Data Services Service has been modified Cli
28. 10 best Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value 1 worst 10 best Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPictQualMed Int32 4 3 Name VideoComponentsGenPictWidthHigh Description Specifies the picture thumbnail target width in pixels for the high quality setting Default Original picture width Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Minimum of 1 Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Minimum of 1 2015 396 Phoenix RSM Key Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPictWidthHigh Int32 4 600 Name VideoComponentsGenPictHeightHigh Description Specifies the picture thumbnail target height in pixels for the high quality setting Default Original picture height Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Minimum of 1 Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Minimum of 1 Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPictHeightHigh Int32 4 600 Name VideoComponentsGenPictQualHigh Description Specifies the picture thumbnail image quality for the high quality setting Default 7 Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value 1 worst 10 best Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value 1 worst 10 best Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPictQualHigh Int32 4 3 Name VideoComponentsGenPriority Description Set process priority of VideoCo
29. 4 Click the Add button When the Add window appears select Activate product key drop down menu Begin typing the product key into the appropriate boxes or copy and paste the product key into the first box It will propagate the appropriate boxes automatically a When using Mac the copy and paste action is not carried out properly To ensure the product key is entered correctly manually type in the product key to the appropriate box Activate productkey v Product Key For Activation Add license and activate product key Not connected to Internet If you have received a product key and are not connected to the internet follow these steps 1 Find a computer with internet access 2 Go to SoleraTec s website and locate the product key activation page 3 Type your Host Id e mail and product key The Host Id is located in Phoenix RSM from the lt Vault Name gt Properties gt License tab as shown in the image below The product will run for up to two hours regardless of license status so you still have access to the Vault Admin You may need to reboot your computer to initiate the product 2015 Vault Management Camera Capacity 0 cameras Product Type Any Platform Type Any Expiration 2014 12 31 00 00 00 Host Id 25900ee713 Installed Licenses Serial Type Capacity Expiration 203491 HardDisk Unlimited 2014 12 31 00 00 00 4 m 4 A license file will be sent
30. Click the Refresh button to update the list of cameras associated with the server and then select the camera with video to capture k For Exacq in the Storage Location section type the path to the video storage area or click Browse and navigate to the video storage area I Click OK to close the Modify Target dialog box m For Milestone and OnSSI only In Video Type select the format the extracted video should be stored either MJPEG or H 264 2015 Getting Started n Leave the Active checkbox selected so the camera can be used in the policy to create in the next step o Click OK to close the Add New Camera window p Click the Save button to save the new camera configuration and add it to the Information Repository q Repeat the steps above to add the configurations for each camera with video to capture For more information see Add VMS Camera 5 Recording setup IP Camera users Add camera configuration and schedule video recording Setup for a RTSP enabled IP camera is very simple The Phoenix RSM Camera Wizard not only guides you through how to add a RTSP enabled IP camera but it also automatically creates a camera or recording policy to accompany the camera The Recording policy designates how to store the recorded video from your camera into the Information Repository e See the topic Add Camera Wizard and complete the steps VMS users Create a recording policy a From the Camera Policies application
31. Default R0000 00 00 00 00 00 retry files immediately after the job finishes The days the job runs Use to indicate days the job should not run For example if the job is to run on Thursday you would enter t 1 2 Default mtwtfss The time the job should start for each defined start day in start_days Default 00 00 00 midnight The date and time the job is to stop The date and time entered is relative to the start of the job R relative to the start of the job Default RO000 00 00 00 00 00 no stop time Print the start and finish times of the job and the final statistics to the file indicated by the list_pn option Valid values true false Default true Ingest system info and other system states Valid values true false Default false 171 172 Phoenix RSM throttle lt setting gt timestamp lt alpha gt type lt alpha gt update_run_record lt boolean gt ves lt alpha gt lt max num files gt version lt number gt vid_extract_closed_caption lt boolean gt The throttle controls the amount of bandwidth used by jobs and the speed files are sent to Vaults Throttle values are relative to Information Repository capacity and range from 1 to 100 A lower setting reduces the amount of available bandwidth that is used Default 100 Specify the timestamp of the file that is to be examined when determining if the file meets the dtu_typ
32. Examples The query carbon fib searches for carbon fiber carbon fibre carbon fibers carbon fibres and carbonfib123 The query actua searches for filenames containing actua lt four or more additional characters gt actuarial actuaries actualization actua12345 xls but not actual Substitutes for zero or more characters in a path name valid for use only within a path Use to denote the forward slash Example The query document Q42007 searches for document lt any character including slashes or no character gt Q42007 documentQ42007 documentsQ42007 document1Q42007 and document Q42007 2015 Customization 335 Wildcard Description Substitutes for a minimum number or more characters in a path name valid for use only within a path The minimum One or more number of characters matched is equal to the number of characters in a that follow the pathname including slashes Matches the forward slash Example The query document Q42007 searches for document lt any character including slashes gt Q42007 documentsQ42007 document Q42007 and documents 123Q42007 Substitutes a set and includes any one of the characters in the set Or an ASCII sequential run of characters can be Set of characters indicated by using a hyphen to separate the first character in the sequence from the last character in the sequence lt beginning character gt lt end character gt Examples
33. Full Control Everyone Everyone DANE Media Location When to Prepare errre Enter Pathname E Phoenix Media HD_002 JC eme re 2015 Vault Management 119 General Information Media Name Description Storage Pool lt unnamed gt v Size GB Content Searching Digital Fingerprinting V Enable Enable Security Owner Domain Users ESC Rights Name Type amp Full Control Everyone Everyone Hee Media Location When to Prepare Store media in default location Prepare media at next use r E Phoenix Media HD_002 ok J carei i Hep 5 Enter values into the Prepare Existing Media window fields Only Media Name and Size only hard disk are required The information entered for Media Name and Storage Pool appear in the Data Service Policy Source tab and in the Destination tabs of Camera Policies and Data Service Policies if multiple tapes are selected B should be included in the name to avoid duplicate naming issues 6 In the Additional Permissions box optionally assign rights to a user group domain or everyone For more information see Vault Properties Security tab Add Entry 7 The Media Location section is not available when preparing existing media 8 From the When to Prepare drop down list assign a preparation time for the media 2015 120 Phoenix RSM 9 Click OK to save your options Media On The Fly Increase automatic fail ove
34. Help gt About Camera Policies Camera Allocation Description Open an Import from window to select a camera configuration file that contains values for the configuration Open an Export to window to select where a camera configuration file saves to Close the application If changes have been made a Confirmation dialog box appears for saving changes click Yes No or Cancel Open the Add New Camera window Depending on whether you are working in Camera Policies Standard mode or Advanced mode this window displays a shortened or expanded view of options respectively Manually enter camera information for the new configuration See Manually Add IP Camera Open the Modify Camera window to change existing values entered for camera information Remove the selected camera from the Camera Configurations list Remove all cameras listed in the Camera Configurations window Open the Camera Allocation window Use to glance at the basic configuration of your cameras such as cameras licensed cameras in use and recording computer camera availability Open online help to the Camera Configurations webpage Open the About Camera Policies window In the Camera Configurations window from the Tools menu select Camera Allocation This is an informational window to show how many cameras are licensed how many cameras are being used and how many cameras are available for each recording computer Use this information to manage and
35. If the camera is not listed and you are unsure of your camera s RTSP URL check with the camera s manufacturer Thumbnail URL Advanced mode only Check the checkbox to enable the Thumbnail URL From the drop down list choose either http or https The HTTP or HTTPS URL allows for producing images e In the first text box type the IP address or host name for the selected camera The second text box populates automatically when a camera manufacturer and model are selected You can also enter the entire URL manually 2015 24 Phoenix RSM Element Description Bs numina URL capabilities are not available with all camera manufacturers and models e Click the Test button to test the HTTP or HTTPS URL If the test is successful a Live View window appears A successful connection should take no more than 10 seconds If the test fails see the Video Capture URL element above for troubleshooting ideas If the camera is not listed and you are unsure of your camera s RTSP URL check with the camera s manufacturer Live View URL Advanced mode only By default the Live View URL is enabled and there will be a check in the checkbox From the drop down list choose rtsp The RTSP URL allows a live view from your camera e In the first text box type the IP address or host name for the selected camera The second text box populates automatically when a camera manufacturer and model are selected You can also enter the entir
36. Key Default 224 0 23 160 Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value IP address Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value IP address Sample Usage MulticastAddress Char 12 226 0 19 156 Name MulticastlfcAddress Description Indicates which interface on host machine will be used to send out multicast packets e Ifa complete address is given the network interface corresponding to that address will be used for sending multicast packets e If an address and mask are specified the first network interface that matches the non masked portion of the specified address will be used x pE a py Using a mask enables a network interface to be specified by network address Using a mask avoids errors when the network interface changes address through the use of DHCP Default Interface chosen by host machine Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value lt xx Xx XX XX gt OF lt XX XX XX XX gt lt mask gt Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value lt XxX XX XX XX gt Or lt XX XX XX Xx gt lt mask gt 2015 382 Phoenix RSM Key Sample Usage MulticastlfcAddress Char 20 192 168 1 0 ffffff00 Name MulticastTtl Description Specifies the multicast TTL Time To Live value Default 255 Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key
37. Track media after unloading The Vault s memory updates with this information Should data on this unit of media be required for retrieval a media request alert including the Location where media will be stored is displayed by the Information Repository prompting an administrator to load the required media Do not track media any longer The Location where media will be stored text box is disabled When the media leaves the Information Repository its entries are removed from the Vault s memory 6 If you select Track media after unloading type a descriptive note about where media is to be stored in the Location where media will be stored text box 7 From the Media Updating drop down list select an option Update media if needed The Vault updates the media memory on the media being unloaded if it is out of date Do not update media The Vault does not update the media memory for the media being unloaded 8 Click OK to complete the process The media appears with a gold background in the Vault Admin main window oe Sa pe Hard disk media is brought back online automatically when available and after 10 minutes has elapsed since it was taken offline The 10 minutes is to give a user time to unload the media and remove it if that is what was intended In cases where the media was automatically taken offline due to technical difficulty i e network outage of SAN or RAID failure it will come back online automatically within
38. c From the toolbar click the Cameras button g to open the Camera Configurations window d From the Camera Configurations window click the Add button to add a new camera configuration e From the Camera Type drop drown list select a VMS either Milestone managed camera OnSSI managed camera or exacq managed camera 2015 a Phoenix RSM Camera Information Camera Type Name Milestone managed camera OnSSI managed camera Description exacq managed camera Camera Pool lt none gt m rfc ode redcanas Video Capture URL rtsp Video Capture LRP URL rtsp C Test Thumbnail URL respilf _ Test Live View URL rtsp Management URL http Rights Type EB O Recorded and Live Video andPTZ Everyone Everyone V Active 2015 Getting Started 45 Camera Information Camera Type Name Description Camera Pool lt none gt X Target Camera Server Address Password Camera lt no camera selected gt Use VMS to generate low resolution proxy and preview image Enable Record on motion detection Motion threshold 5 l seconds Recording Computer A Peai Rights Name Type Ba O recorded and Live Video and PTZ Everyone Everyone 2015 46 Phoenix RSM Camera Information Camera Type Name Description
39. determine who has access to cameras and the access level Add New Entry Name type Entry name Rights Recorded and Live Video and PTZ gt ox came J Hep Name type Determine who the new security setting for a camera is applied to or the type of rights select between User Group Domain and Everyone 2015 zs Phoenix RSM Entry name Type a name to appear under the Access Permissions group box Rights Select the rights granted for the new user group domain or everyone The rights are as follows Recorded and Live Video and PTZ Can view recorded and live video from selected camera and have PTZ control Live Video and PTZ Can view live video and have PTZ control Live Video Can view live video Recorded and Live Video Can view recorded and live video from selected camera Recorded Video Only view recorded video from the selected camera None No access to the camera vite pe If recorded is not included in user rights you can still record using Live Viewer but you will not be able to search for recorded video when using SVM Add VMS Camera To capture video into your Information Repository from your video management system VMS you need to create recording policies for cameras managed by those systems Phoenix RSM tracks them and they are listed on the Camera Policies Camera tab for all computers on the network in the Information Repository ws e pe Video captu
40. increase in performance If the Information Repository is slow run a few timed tests to determine a setting that works best for your Information Repository Vault connection sharing determines how many files are sent from the source Vault to the destination Vault in a single connection The higher the number of files or bytes transferred the longer the connection between the source and destination Vault are maintained Access to a particular Vault resource such as one drive of a multi drive storage device used by a process on one client is restricted and inaccessible to other clients in the network for the duration of the connection To illustrate this imagine an environment where a single Vault with a single tape drive is used to service several desktop clients When a client is configured with a connection sharing set to 250 files and other clients are configured to start jobs at the same time no client can connect until the first client is finished Each connection to the server locks out other connections and other clients must wait before processing files 1 Type a value into the Maintain Client Vault Connection for text box 2015 Data Management 329 Element Description 2 Select the Files radio button or Bytes radio button By selecting Files a connection sharing proceeds based on the number of files transmitted and if Bytes based on the number of bytes Throttle The throttle controls the speed that files
41. lt none gt X Manufacturer Generic v Model Generic M Find Cameras Video Capture URL a 4 v Video Capture LRP URL g gt 4 V Thumbnail URL V Live View URL g gt 4 j V Management URL y gt 4 User Name Password gt 4 gt x lt o 4 gt Alternative Frame Size 0 Enable stream over TCP Recording Computer Access Permissions Rights Name Type Oecorded and Live Video and PTZ Everyone Everyone 3 Populate the Add New Camera boxes appropriately for your camera Some of the more advanced parameters allow you to specify a camera pool an alternative frame size or access permissions Use the table below to help fill in the boxes Element Description Camera Type Advanced mode only The camera types can be an IP camera or a VMS managed type of either Milestone managed camera OnSSI managed camera or exacq managed camera 2015 212 Phoenix RSM Element Name Description Camera Pool Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL Description If your camera is managed by a Milestone OnSSIl or exacqvVision video management system see Add VMS Camera Type a name used for menus and the configuration file this is the name of the camera The name entered is for identification purposes only It is best to use a naming convention an
42. lt unnamed gt and lt new entry gt are not placeholders they are actual names used in your Information Repository unless changed to alternate names Unless you have added new names only lt any gt lt unnamed gt lt new entry gt and names of Vaults media storage pools media types and media speeds already implemented in the Information Repository appear in the drop down lists If you plan to add new Vaults media or storage pools to the Information Repository and already know names to assign you can add them manually However it is best to select only media that appears in the drop down list There are several options for doing this e Leave defaults lt any gt or lt unnamed gt and use the Criteria tab to define data to be processed Phoenix RSM selects the most accessible Vault and media with the most free space Select a value from a Source tab group that contains data to process Phoenix RSM processes data only from the drop down list where a value has been selected For example if Media Speed S8 is selected only media with an S8 speed rating is processed If only a Vault is selected then data is processed only from the selected Vault including all of the media and storage pools within the Vault Select values from every Source tab group for a more focused process If values for Vault Media Name and Storage Pool have been selected the options available in the remaining fields are limited according to values alr
43. path doc path doc etc path path1 docs sample path doc etc path path doc path1 docs etc path path doc path docs path4 doc path5 doc patha doc pathq doc etc path1 doc path2 doc 337 33 Phoenix RSM Wildcard Sample Phrase Matches Does not match path5 doc path3 doc patha doc path pathq doc path doc etc path docs etc path doc all other files in path doc repository Entire pattern not in set Regular Expressions Content Searching Use regular expressions to search for specific content or text manipulation The following are things to keep in mind when using the standard wildcards e With or without quotation marks search is not case sensitive e These wildcard operators do not work for file or directory search and filtering you must use the POSIX standard wildcards Regular Expressions Table for Content Searching This functionality allows you to put limitations on files that are processed to those containing a particular word or phrase Quotation marks To process only files that contain a specific phrase be sure to enclose the phrase in quotation marks Otherwise all files containing any word typed is processed in the query For example if searching Information Repository only files that contain the complete phrase Information Repository are processed In contrast without quotation marks in place any file containing Information Repository Repository Information Information
44. the media but also slows down performance The following details the number of files that correlates with each value Value Number of Files 50 125 billion 100 250 billion 150 375 billion 200 500 billion 300 750 billion 400 1 trillion 500 125 trillion In the Where will media be stored by default box type a default location to store and manage media or select a default location from the Browse for Folder window by clicking the Browse button From the Do you want storage media to be created automatically drop down list choose Yes or No e If you choose Yes from the How much storage do you want to use drop down list choose a value between 0 Bytes and 10 00 TB Media will automatically be created for your Vault e f you choose No media will need to be created manually at a later time See Prepare Media From the Where can temporary files be stored box type a location for the working cache or select a location from the Browse for Folder window by clicking the Browse button The default location is lt install dir gt WorkingCache When Phoenix RSM processes files it may create temporary files for efficient performance especially when clipping video files From the How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files drop down list select how much working cache space is used for temporary files 2015 Vault Management 61 Ry i 38 Device X How many data streams are allowed at a time w H
45. with one exception On data tape media you can either leave the media inside the storage library or remove it from the Information Repository entirely Standalone data tape drive based Vaults work the same as data tape library based Vaults Unloading Media Types The following subsections instruct you on how to unload a hard disk media and a data tape media Unload Hard Disk Media 1 From the Vault Admin left pane click the expand indicator plus sign in front of the Vault to remove media from 2 Click on the expand indicator for Media to have a tree of the media names displayed and also to have a list of the media names displayed in the right pane 3 Select desired media individual or multiple then click on the Unload Media button in the toolbar Or right click on the selected media and choose Unload Media from the shortcut menu The Unload Media window opens vite You can unload multiple hard disk media by holding the Shift key or Control key and clicking on the desired hard disk media in the right pane 4 From the toolbar click the Unload Media button Or right click on the selected Media Name or the multiple selected names and choose Unload Media from the shortcut menu Media Tracking Track media after unloading z Location where media will be stored Media Updating Update media if needed 2015 126 Phoenix RSM 5 From the Media Tracking drop down list select an option
46. 192 168 5 105 stream1 X 4 LA p Change Active Setting To capture video and view live feeds this checkbox must be selected If it is not selected then any policy that uses this camera will not run a When multiple configurations are selected with different current active settings the checkbox will be shaded to indicate the selected configurations have different Active Settings Camera Information E Active Set Recording Computer Use the drop down menu to select a computer which will capture the video feed for the selected configurations You can also choose for no Recording Computer to be used by selecting the option lt not selected gt a When multiple configurations are with different Recording Computers currently selected lt various gt will be shown to indicate that different Recording Computers are currently being used for the selected configurations Camera Information Recording Computer lt various gt A ox came Hee Camera Configurations Menu Items Description Menu Items File gt Save All Save settings for camera configurations created or modified 2015 22 Phoenix RSM Menu Items File gt Import from File gt Export to File gt Exit Edit gt Add a Camera Edit gt Modify Selected Camera Edit gt Delete Selected Camera Edit gt Delete All Cameras Tools gt Camera Allocation Help gt Current Page
47. Access Permissions Rights Name Type Ba O recorded and Live Video and PTZ Everyone Everyone exacq managed camera image 2015 Camera Management 221 Camera Information Camera Type exacq managed camera v Name Description Camera Pool lt none gt m Target Camera Server Address User Name Password Camera lt no camera selected gt Storage Location pectin Computer A Pemai Rights Name Type seo Recorded and Live Video and PTZ Everyone Everyone V Active Element Description Camera Type Advanced mode only The camera types can be an IP camera or a VMS managed type of either Milestone managed camera OnSSI managed camera or exacq managed camera If your camera is not managed by a Milestone OnSSIl or exacqVision video management system see Manually Add IP Camera Name Type a name used for menus and the configuration file this is the name of the camera 2015 222 Phoenix RSM Element Description Camera Pool Server Address User Name Password Selected Camera Storage Location Description The name entered is for identification purposes only It is best to use a naming convention and a descriptive name Text used for defining the camera in menus and the configuration file This is a description of the camera Advanced mode only For the camera pool define a virtual grouping of cameras to search video fro
48. Add Camera Wizard As part of the Camera Policies application use the Add Camera Wizard to easily add a camera and a camera or recording policy All you need to do is follow the wizard steps to begin recording video Camera Policies Use the Camera Policies application to configure RTSP enabled IP cameras or VMS managed cameras and create recording policies to capture video into your Vaults Once inside the Information Repository take advantage of your product s full management capabilities such as migrating replicating searching and archiving video assets Record Record live video feeds from any RTSP enabled IP camera directly into the Information Repository Remember that RTSP stands for Real Time Streaming Protocol to control streaming media servers For a list of RTSP URLs for IP cameras go to http www SoleraTec com support rtsp Capture Capture video from cameras controlled by a VMS Video Management System such as Milestone OnSSI or exacqVision into the Information Repository 2015 Camera Management 149 Camera Configurations Use Camera Configurations to manually add cameras to your Information Repository and to configure them If you plan to capture video from a VMS you must use the Camera Configurations window not the Add Camera Wizard in order to set up a policy to grab video from the VMS Motion Detection If motion detection information is provided by your RTSP enabled IP camera and if Phoenix RSM
49. Camera Policies has been modified Click the Save button to save the updated Camera Policy settings whe if you delete a policy while a job is running the job stops as soon as it is finished processing the current file To make an active policy inactive 1 From the Camera Policies window left pane Recording Policy Name column double click the policy 2 In the Modify Selected Policy window de select the Active checkbox Import Export Recording Policies Policy import and export functionality offered by SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM allows you to save policies restore policies and copy sets of policies from one computer to another After creating a set of policies you can export them to a policy file Then at a later time if you want to re implement the set of policies or implement them for the first time on another computer they are there for import Use the import and export functionality to take a snapshot of the working policy configuration bring new computers online test different policy configurations or restore user corrupted policy configurations By default recording policies are exported to CameraPolicies cfg Data service policies are exported to DataSvcsSve cfg Although each policy editor uses only one policy set at a time multiple policy sets exported to policy files can be used Create name and use any file naming convention for policy files Be sure to keep track of where policies are exported to if it
50. Close 9 In the Search Results pane double click the thumbnail image for the file you want to view or click a point of interest in the histogram This opens the Media Viewer with the original video file ready for playback and review e Right click on a thumbnail to choose an action to perform Axis 210 Rear View 2 2012 10 29 09 57 48 3 aZ CameraDescription 211 ey re i a i The Search Results pane includes the following information when in Detail view mode e A thumbnail image depicting the beginning of the captured video Surveillance video displays in the Search Results pane from one camera continuously recording From Camera Policies Standard mode the video recording clips are five minutes long each by default 2015 262 Phoenix RSM e Name of the camera that captured the video the date the video was captured and the time when the capture began in bold green text e Additional information such as Camera Description Host Frame Size Begin Date and Run Time e A histogram appearing as a sunken horizontal bar If a supported motion detection enabled camera has captured motion detection information the histogram displays where motion detection thresholds were reached When no motion has reached the detection threshold or no motion detection data has been gathered then the histogram is filled black and empty Line height and color indicate the magnitude of the motion detected based on how
51. Filters If a file filter does not have a path delimiter the product matches the pattern against the last leaf of the path which is the file name itself If the file filter does have a path delimiter the product matches the pattern against the entire path including the file name File filters are read from the top down For example if you have an exclude file filter that excludes all jpg files followed by a filter that includes all jpg files the jpg files are excluded Directory Filters If a directory filter does not have a path delimiter the product tries to match the pattern against the last leaf of the path separately and looks for the first match If a directory filter does have a path delimiter the product matches the pattern against the entire path Directory filters are read from the top down For example if you have an exclude directory filter that excludes all folders named Pictures followed by a filter that includes Pictures 2003Convention the first filter takes precedence and Pictures 2003Convention is not included A When typing paths or path searching patterns use the forward slash Create File Filters and Directory Filters File filters enable you to include or exclude particular files by file name or file type Directory filters enable you to include or exclude directories and their contents It is possible to use file and directory filters at the same time 1 In the Files to Include Exclude or Directories to
52. Key Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value lt address list gt lt address gt COMMA lt address gt lt address gt lt xx xx xx xx gt lt mask gt Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value lt address list gt lt address gt COMMA lt address gt lt address gt lt Xxx xx xx xx gt lt mask gt Sample Usage IpAddressList Char 40 192 168 1 0 ffffff00 127 0 0 1 ffffff00 Name LfrMaxFileSizeBytes Description Specifies the maximum file size in bytes for log file rotation A Setting a value that is less than the default value could result in slower system operation Default 10485760 10MB Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Limit in bytes greater than zero Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Limit in bytes greater than zero Sample Usage LfrMaxFileSizeBytes Int32 4 10485760 2015 2015 Key Name LfrMaxNumFiles Customization Description Specifies the maximum number of files to keep during log file rotation a Setting a value that is less than the default value could result in slower system operation Default 2 Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Limit in number of files greater than 1 Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Limit in number of files gr
53. Log Filename text box can include literal file names or a combination of file name field variables to generate file names for logs e Leave the default variables in place or type in a file name and extension to use or type in a variable name using file name field variables see File Name Field Variables section below e Use the Browse button to define a new location and type in the file name that you want to use including an extension Report Options When a job runs one of the following report files is created Summary A header and summary report 2015 327 32 Phoenix RSM Element Enable Transmission Optimization Maintain Client Vault Connection Description Complete Same as summary and lists all files Diagnostic Complete but adds relevant diagnostic information e From the drop down list select a report option Use the Summary or Complete options on a normal basis and switch to Diagnostics if problems occur In the Report Options text box leave the default variables in place or type in the file name and extension to use or type a variable name using file name field variables see File Name Field Variables section below e Use the Browse button to locate a file to overwrite an already existing log file Select for the client to constantly monitor its processes and to determine the best network transmission protocol for files being processed Leave this option selected to get up to a 20
54. Maximum Minimum The policy only processes files that are larger than the size specified Maximum The policy only processes files that are smaller than the size specified Watermark Watermarks determine when data is processed as a policy runs in relation to the percentage of available space on source media Select a High watermark percentage the processing begins when a policy runs and the amount of data on the source media exceeds the high watermark Data processing continues until the source media reaches the level indicated by the Low watermark Select a Low watermark percentage the processing stops when the amount of data on the source media reaches the low watermark Files and Directories After making general selections of files and directories to to Include Exclude process from the options above you can apply filters to refine which files or directories to process Include filters Include only specific files or directories in a job Exclude filters Rule out specific files or directories from a job For more information see Filters Data Service Policies Destination Tab Use the Data Service Policy Destination tab after defining the policy criteria In the Destination tab you can determine the Vaults media and storage pools to store your data 2015 320 Phoenix RSM Source Criteria Destination Scheduling Advanced Vault Office_Tape Y Media Name lt any gt Y
55. MetadataExtensions cfg This name is significant and identifies this as an Metadata Extension block IngestMdExt Query Name CaseName TYDS String Label Case Name 2015 366 Phoenix RSM Customization 367 se Phoenix RSM Dasiciijocson Vrbe ID muinoee OF rne agent Y LowerLimit 1000 UpperLimit 5000 Qusi i Name CaseType Type Choice Label Case Type Description What is the case type Choice Arson Chomce Theft CRONE Narcotics Query Name A Pathname Type Pathname Label Pathname DySeewvillie Welle vu BlankValueOk false DSisiere joni alyoiay Se PU Query Name TnclueMd Type Checkbox Label Wile liviclS croidieSinic wie evckeiiee 2 DefaultValue false Deserijicwem Witinellioicls all customer naceacarte T Site cfg Use a Site cfg file to work remotely on a network subnet that does not have multicast capabilities Not having multicast will prevent the Phoenix RSM Locator Service on your local client machine from seeing vaults in Vault Admin viewing cameras in the Live Viewer and from viewing search results in Surveillance Video Manager This capability is intended only for advanced users e Create a Site cfg using any text editor and save as a plain text document Once created it needs to be added to the following path lt install dir gt Config 2015 Customization 369 e Site cfg is a block struct
56. See Network Activity Symbols Vault Communication Media Information panes 2015 Vault Management 143 Located in the Vault Stats mid section of the window the media information panes include a list of media available in the Vault and then the media detail Media Information Slot Name Pool Media Detail i 0 StarGazer Test e From the media information pane select a unit of media The corresponding set of information about the media unit displays in the media detail pane Vault Statistics and Vault Space dials Located in the Vault Stats lower left part of the window the Vault statistics and Vault space panes provide details about media in Vaults i ji Media Name Media Loads 100 1117 Z 100 S Ny From Pool Media Writes Da x LifeCycle Media Errors Available Space Used Space f ji Purgable Space 0 The left pane displays the Vault media statistics and the right pane displays Vault space dials each meaning the following e Left dial Displays the percentage of the media population capacity used It compares the amount of media loaded in the Information Repository to the amount of media that can be loaded into the Vault For example if a data tape library based Vault can hold ten data tapes and has only eight loaded the dial would indicate an 80 media population If using hard disk Vaults the dial would be a 100 all
57. Select an option of Never Only if newer or Always outlining when to overwrite files 279 280 Phoenix RSM Element Description vits pe If the files exported already reside in some form on the target computer that is a conflict and the export job does not work How to export the With several clips captured from the same camera select selected video export them as a single video or multiple video clips for each selection a An error message will show if you choose to export renamed video clips as multiple video clips To avoid this error reset the video clip names to the original names or choose to export the video clips as a single video Rimage Populate the options when Rimage is selected alt ae P pe Export to Rimage only works if your Rimage system and Phoenix RSM export are configured properly a When exporting to the Rimage do not stop Phoenix RSM until all jobs have finished If you do temporary files are not removed and those files will have to be removed manually To manually remove temporary files go to the Rimage Export Folder and remove lt user name gt _ lt uuid gt For more information see Rimage Configuration window 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 281 Export Job Configuration Export destination Rimage Job name Generate checksum for video Watermark video Generate metadata output file How to name fi Include full original pathnames Email address for job com
58. Stop the Vault that you want to modify Right click SoleraTec Storage Vault and then click Stop The Service Control dialog box appears briefly to display progress 3 Right click the SoleraTec Storage Vault again and then select Properties The SoleraTec Storage Vault x Properties window x is the Vault ID number appears 4 Click the Log On tab 5 Select the Allow services to interact with desktop checkbox 6 Click OK 7 Start the Vault Right click SoleraTec Storage Vault and then click Start Job 8 Close the Windows Services window Data Services Command Line Run DataSvcsCl to execute single interactive migrate replicate and purge jobs in the Information Repository To run single migrate replicate and purge jobs ensure that the folder where Phoenix RSM is installed is in your command path open a command prompt and run DataSvcsCl at the command line Depending on what you want to do append tokens as listed below under Token Value Pairs to the execution path For more information see Data Services Policies and Command Line Arguments e Access DataSvecsCl from your suite of application products Default Data Services List Log To see a job s run results and diagnostic information look at the Phoenix RSM list log for any given job Unless you change the settings and path Phoenix RSM employs the following R Logs P log You can change this value when running DataSvcsCl or in the Data Services configuration file
59. VaultSvc1 log Console pathname con 4 m r 7 Review the displayed summary for the correct Vault information 8 When ready to remove the Vault click Next e Mac users will be prompted for an Administrator Name and Password The Name field may Vault Management already be populated with the name of the user running the Vault Wizard 147 1 Phoenix RSM j Add or Remove Vault Wizard wants to make amp ss changes Type your password to allow this Password Cancel OKs e After entering a Name and Password click OK The Vault will stop immediately wi py A restart is not required on a Mac 9 In the Completed window click Finish to exit the Add or Remove Vault Wizard 10 Restart your computer or to remove another Vault or add a Vault open the Add or Remove Vault Wizard again See Adding a Vault Camera Management The camera component is the most important for any video surillance solution Not only does SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM effortlessly connect to any RTSP enabled IP camera or VMS managed cameras but it also fully manages any number of storage devices for all of your accumulated video assets While recording and capturing your video you can monitor live video feeds using the Live Viewer application featuring an unlimited live video matrix with the ability to view 16 channels at a time This camera management chapter encompasses the tools used for recording and capturing video feeds
60. With Phoenix RSM s balanced extended client server architecture clients often play roles normally supported by servers This enables increased Information Repository flexibility security robustness and capacity Clip Name Most video editing systems and digital cameras have a machine assigned file name such as 123abc_ffx2 for a piece of video Clip Name is a metadata value of a human assigned name such as jon_talking for that video clip Clip Name is also used by the video editing systems to identify a video Both the machine assigned filename and the human assigned clip name are searchable in Phoenix RSM and therefore are separate search criteria Collapsing Data When data is removed from the primary hard disk storage tier and replaced with a pointer file A copy of the file exists in the Information Repository and a pointer to the file exists in the computer s file system Data that is collapsed appears to the networked computer s file system as if it resides locally Communications Timeout If the product is unable to connect with a computer on the network or communications are interrupted during a job it waits a predefined period of time before completely dropping the connection This period of time is called the communications timeout Component A component is a single application or utility that could interact with or have dependencies on other applications Phoenix RSM software consists of several separate components that work
61. a r E Aaa a r a aaa aaa aaaea aar naraenia 242 Camera Control PTZ and FOCUS sania ara a a aaa aa a aaa a aa a aaa aa aaa a aaa aa aaa inada 244 Live Viewer User Preference S i dorrii iaaa ia a scdavees ceiddeunccvaccecebudieestivineiedevcdath 247 Surveillance Video Manager 251 SVM Search and Exports aee araa aaa a ae a a a Eaa aa aa a aa rE AN Eaa 253 Search Surveillance Vide Occ a feces cee ra a a a a a aada aaa aaa lace dovizsevcualddeesai taieri anadai 257 SVM Save and Load Export QUeUC ceceeee cece eee eee teen ee enna ee eee nena eeaa eee nnne ee seaeeeseeeesaaeeseaeeenees 264 SVM Media Viewer and LOGGING ceceeeeeeeee ee eeee teen eeeeeeeeee ee eeee eens sees aa eeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeees 265 SVM Media Viewer SVM Logging Export Surveillance Video SVM User PreferenGe S 553 52a iis set cecey cd ge ees he ca Seca coca ees Ses we be ode v na sea bested ae ae ia Data Management Data Service PolicieS ci aA n aa secceethaeai Fe a Meas eckiews pede aa aa a S aara iaaea l 297 Import Export Data Service Policies ccccccsseesesceeeeneeeeeeeeeneeesaeeeeaeeeesneeesaeeesaneeesaeeesaeeesaneeesaeesaeeseaeeeseaeeseaeeeseneeeeaeeneaees 300 Data Service Policies WINdOW c lt ccccccecesecceevendenensosenceceecseusecorenecdesbieeeecosencouernevuewendaacuysendverteasnbeneeeds 311 Data Service Policies Source Tabanini a a aaa a eaaa Ea a aa narape Aa Ea aA Eara Tadaa Eaa eaaet aaao 313 20
62. as Delete a camera configuration You can always edit an existing camera configuration From the Camera Configurations window select an individual configuration right click and select Edit from the shortcut menu This shortcut menu also features View Live where you can review a live video feed in a viewer Manage where you can view the video feed in a Web browser URL from the camera manufacturer Change Active Setting where you can choose for the camera to be active or inactive Set Recording Computer where you can select the computer that captures the camera video feed and Delete to remove the camera from the list of configurations ae f py When changing the Active Setting or Recording Computer you can also select multiple configurations by holding theShift key or the Control key and clicking on the desired configurations ae a pe To view and record live video feeds ensure the RTSP is enabled on your IP camera See your camera s documentation for details on enabling RTSP 2015 Camera Management 201 Save Gia Add Delete Camera Name Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL za AxisVC_100 Generic Generic rtsp 192 168 2 14 40100 mpeg4 Basler Side Lot 2 Basler BIP 1300c dn rtsp 192 168 3 15 mpeg4 Basler_1300DN Basler BIP 1300c dn rtsp 192 168 5 100 mpeg4 Canon_M40 Canon VB M40 rtsp 192 168 5 112 profilel u Canon_M700F Canon VB M700F rtsp 192 168 1 227 profilel r Cohu_3930 1 Cohu 3930HD rtsp
63. available for the Information Repository This depends on the total amount of storage capacity of the device and the number of cameras to record video from e For example let s say you hawe a 1 terabyte TB hard drive available for surveillance video storage and that you are recording from 10 IP cameras 1 TB 1 000 GB 1 000 GB 10 cameras 100 GB for each piece of media You would enter 100 2015 Getting Started s g Set the When to Prepare drop down list to Prepare media now h Click OK The new media appears in the right pane of the Vault Admin window i Click the newly named unit of media listed beneath the Vault name in the left pane Its details appear in the right pane j Repeat the steps above for each unit of media needed vita gt It is recommended to prepare a separate piece of media for each recording camera 4 Camera setup IP Camera users Connect camera and determine its IP address a Refer to the camera s user manual to install configure and initially access the camera The camera needs to be set up with a static IP address or you need to disable DHCP b Use the camera s discovery software or other mechanism to determine its IP address and write it down You need it for the next step VMS users Add camera configuration information a From your suite of Phoenix RSM applications open Camera Policies b From Camera Policies gt View menu select Enable Advanced Mode
64. button on the terminal shell to close the terminal and application If you press CTRL C it aborts and the application closes If you have not saved your policy any new parameters are not saved To avoid closing an application inadvertently start the application using the nohup command Type nohup VaultAdmin gt dev null 2 gt amp 1 lt dev null amp at the prompt This completely isolates the command from the parent terminal shell Command Line with Windows If using a command line type the path including the name of the executable for the client you want to launch For example type C Program Files Phoenix Bin DataSvcPolicies exe to launch Data Services Policies Navigate to the directory that contains your Phoenix executables for available applications e Any executable that has Svc or Cl as part of its name is not an application 2015 4 Phoenix RSM The following are applications to launch from a command line Executable Application DataSvcPolicies Data Services Policies SurveillanceV ideoManager Surveillance Video Manager VaultAdmin Vault Admin NetActivity Network Activity Quick Start Now that you have SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM let s get you up and running with it so you can begin to record store and manage surveillance video These instructional procedures cover a quick and easy setup for both RTSP enabled IP camera users and VMS users They provide a basis for subsequent workflows that you may encount
65. change where cameras are allocated using functions in the Camera Configurations window 2015 Camera Management 203 Recording Computer Licensed InUse Available Felix 0 0 0 iceman 50 4 46 MICRONVR 100 0 100 rex 50 1 49 E sentinel 20 0 20 tron 15 1 14 TS 2RZ298 0 0 0 Cose Import Export Camera Configurations You can import or export camera configuration files This section details the format of the file that is created whenever you export camera configurations from Camera Policies While it is best to use Camera Policies to change your camera configurations you can also do so by creating and importing a special file The procedures for exporting and importing a camera configurations file are below they are geared towards advanced users Export Current Camera Configurations to a File 1 From the Camera Policies main menu select Tools gt Cameras The Camera Configurations window appears 2 From the Camera Configurations main menu select File gt Export to The Export to window appears The default file name is Cameras cfg 3 Navigate to the location to export the file and then click Save The file is saved to the location you selected Import a Configuration From a File 1 From the Camera Policies main menu select Tools gt Cameras The Camera Configurations window appears 2 From the Camera Configurations main menu select File gt Import from The Import from window appears 3 Na
66. conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Minimum of 0 Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenMaxThreads Int32 4 0 Name VideoComponentsGenPathname Description Pathname of executable to create a thumbnail or low res proxy Default lt install dir gt Bin VideoComponentsGen exe Used by Target and Process TgtProcSvc Video Content Manager Surveillance Video Manager Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname to executable Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname to executable Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPathname Char 17 C MyVideoGen exe Name VideoComponentsGenPictWidthLow Description Specifies the picture thumbnail target width in pixels for the low quality setting 2015 Customization 303 Key Default 100 Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Minimum of 1 Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Minimum of 1 Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPictWidthLow Int32 4 200 Name VideoComponentsGenPictHeightLow Description Specifies the picture thumbnail target height in pixels for the low quality setting Default 100 Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Minimum of 1 Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Minimum of 1 Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPictHeightLow Int32 4 200 Name VideoComponentsGenPictQualLo
67. correctly if selected files have identical names When working with identical names use Include full original pathnames or Include pathnames starting at selected items E mail address for job Type a valid e mail address to define where Rimage sends completion notice an e mail when the Rimage job is finished Disc type Define the type of media for Rimage to make Number of copies Define how many copies of the data for Rimage to make Press TAB or ENTER for the new number typed to take effect Disc labeling Define the information on media labels for the media that Rimage is producing The number and titles of the fields available depend on what is entered in the Rimage Configuration window If a field is not present add it using the Rimage Configuration window FTP Site Populate the options when FTP Site is selected 2015 284 Phoenix RSM Export Job Configuration Export destination FTP site Job name Generate checksum for video Watermark video Generate metadata output file FTP site addr FTP site user name FTP site password Destination folder at FTP site Start Export Element Description Export destination Define where files are exported to FTP site a This option is only available when it is enabled in your Job name Type a job name to associate a text name with the job This name appears in job logs 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 285 Element Des
68. create and run a Data Service policy to migrate or move any data to a safe place if you want to preserve existing information on the media e The Prepare Media gt Media Location option is not available when preparing existing media Follow these steps to prepare existing media 1 From the Vault Admin left pane click the expand indicator plus sign in front of the Vault to add media to 2 Click on the expand indicator for Media to have a tree of the Media Names displayed and also to have a list of the media names displayed in the right pane 3 Select desired media individual media or multiple tape then click on the Prepare Media button in the toolbar Or right click on the selected media and choose Prepare Media from the shortcut menu e You can prepare multiple Media at one time by holding the Shift key or Control key and clicking on the desired media a Currently you can only prepare multiple tape media If you try to prepare multiple media that is not tape you will receive an error message 4 The options in the Prepare Media window are based on the media type of the Vault selected In the screenshots below the first displays disk media options for media being prepared for hard disk The second image displays tape media options for media being prepared for data tape 2015 ns Phoenix RSM Storage Pool lt unnamed gt v Size GB Content Searching Digital Fingerprinting 7 Enable J Enable
69. date Default Specify the path for the error log file If you specify dewtty error messages display on the default output device Supports token substitution Default path for the configuration file R Logs P err Default path for the command line dev tty Omit directories Accept multiple instances Default no directories excluded Omit files Accept multiple instances Default no files excluded Set the criteria for files that are to be processed This token value pair can be specified multiple times to include multiple file filters Default any Select the files that are to be processed based on the original host name for the file Default Process files from offline media Valid values true false Default false Specify the job type Valid values e replicate e migrate 2015 Command Line Arguments 419 Token Value Description e purge Default migrate Keep a copy of the source files after they have been processed Valid values true false wile keep lt boolean gt You would use false to create a move policy use true to create a replicate policy Default false Specify the file where all report information is written Supports token substitution list_pn lt pathname gt 7 A i Default path for the policy file R Logs P log Default path for the command line dewtty Specify the maximu
70. e From a Linux desktop double click Filesystem gt usr gt local gt Phoenix gt Bin b Open the Add or Remove Vault Wizard and complete the wizard steps to create a Phoenix RSM Vault c Reboot your machine after adding a vault A All devices running an instance of the product must be time synchronized If they are not unexpected results may occur 3 Prepare media a From your suite of Phoenix RSM applications open the Vault Admin application b From the Vault Admin left frame beneath Entire Network select and expand the items under the Vault you added in the previous step c Select Media 7 d For the Prepare Media window click i The Prepare Media window shown below is for hard disk media this window is slightly different for other media types 2015 e Phoenix RSM General Information Media Name Description Storage Pool lt unnamed gt Size GB Content Searching Digital Fingerprinting V Enable Enable Security Owner Domain Users ESC Rights Name Type amp Full Control Everyone Everyone oan Media Location When to Prepare Store media in default location v Prepare media at next use z Enter Pathname lt Storing in default location gt ce Hp e In the Prepare Media window enter a name and description For example the name might be Camera 1 Front Lobby or Camera 2 Rear Entrance f In the Size GB box type the amount of storage space to make
71. entire original full resolution file is exported Some video includes an embedded time display or time code that assigns a number to each video frame of video This is indicated by a golden triangle in the timeline Click the triangle to select an embedded time display option Embedded Time Display None v Wall Clock Wall Clock with Frame Count Scissors we wv 02 16 14 Use the scissor buttons to select clips from the video Numbers indicate beginning and ending times Click the left button to denote the beginning of the clip and the right button to denote the end of the clip You can repeat this process to export as many clips from a video as you need this creates multiple clips from a single file However before selecting and exporting a second clip you need to add the currently selected clip to the export queue by clicking the Export button on the main Media Viewer window Playback Speed Use the playback speed to run the video faster or slower Drag the orange control to the left to play more slowly or to the right to play more quickly Storyboard 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 271 The Storyboard strip at the bottom of the Media Viewer displays still images taken from the video file It provides a visual representation of the video file contents and an easy way to quickly see and navigate to a point of interest in the video Use the horizontal scrollbar to scroll through the frames As you move your mouse
72. files and thus scanned for content Default doc txt cfg cpp c cc cxx h dsw exc hpp rtfhtm html hxx log mk ppt rc sIn vovbs bat xls xml sh cshrc shre Used by Vault Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value lt text extension list gt lt text extension gt SEMI COLON lt text extension gt lt text extension gt lt string of characters gt Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value lt text extension list gt lt text extension gt SEMI COLON lt text extension gt lt text extension gt lt string of characters gt Sample Usage CntTextExtList Char 11 doc bat cpp Name CntTermsLimit Description Specifies the amount of a file scanned for content keyword generation 2015 373 374 Phoenix RSM Key Default 10485760 Used by Vault Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Limit in bytes Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Limit in bytes Sample Usage CntTermsLimit Int32 4 1024 Name DataServicesSvcPriority Description Set process priority of DataServicesSvw Default standard Used by DataServicesSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type String Value Value low standard high Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value low standard high Sample Usage DataServicesSvwcPriority Char 4 high Name DbSyncintOps Description Number of operations between syncing database to disk A value of
73. free from any column or order formatting The tokens listed below specify job criteria By default policy files are exported to and imported from lt install dir gt Config DataSvcsSvc cfg 2015 302 Phoenix RSM Files that contain policies are formatted as follows Each policy is a single block The beginning of each block is indicated by policy_name lt policy name gt policy name lt policy name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt POlicy meme lt polwey memes lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Token Value Pairs A token is a job attribute that is given a value that determines how the job runs Token Value absolute_start lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt active lt boolean gt complete lt boolean gt content_ filter lt character string gt data_paths lt number gt deleted_files lt boolean gt Description The exact start time and date that the job is to run Multiple absolute start tokens may be entered 1 2 Define if the policy is active or inactive Valid values true false Default true Print all summary information plus the path names of the files migrated to the file indicated by the list_pn option Valid values true false Default false A word or phrase in the file to be processed Default The maximum number of concurrent files permitted to be sen
74. from the RTSP and VMS managed camera using Camera Policies Scheduling tab 4 Optional Set Camera Policies from Standard mode to Advanced mode select from the View menu gt Enable Advanced mode This provides more options for direct connect IP cameras video processing Vault storage and performance and log file options See Advanced Mode 5 Optional Save restore or copy Camera Policies using the import and export camera configuration options From the Camera Configurations main menu select File gt Import from or Export to Once your camera is set up and recording see Live Viewer and learn how to view the video streams Add Camera Wizard Adding a camera to your video surveillance solution is essential You can do this a couple of different ways with SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM but the fastest and simplest way is by using the Add Camera Wizard 2015 a50 Phoenix RSM The camera wizard not only guides you through how to add an RTSP enabled IP camera but it also automatically creates a camera or recording policy to accompany the camera The Recording policy designates how to store recorded video from your camera into the Information Repository A Do not use the Add Camera Wizard if e You are capturing video from VMS managed cameras Video Management System such as Milestone OnSSI or exacqVision Instead manually add your cameras using Camera Configurations e The extended metadata file MetadataExtensions cfg i
75. functionality the Rimage Network Publisher must be installed and running on the network and the Rimage Orders folder must be visible from the computer where Phoenix RSM is running Check the following e There is a Rimage export folder on the Phoenix RSM client desktop computer e Phoenix RSM users have write access to the export folder and Rimage has at least read permissions e Security is set for domain users to have full control For more information see Export Surveillance Video Data Management SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM is the ultimate data management tool providing automated digital asset management for Windows Mac and Linux environments The Data Services Service is the engine that manages all the data within your Information Repository From data and video ingest or capture all the way to storage Phoenix RSM stands out among other data management systems because your data assets are under complete control and quality is preserved The Data Services Service delivers the peace of mind that data and video from yesterday or five years ago that is stored in the Information Repository can be searched played back and exported to any desktop on the network at any time Through creating a Data Service Policy the Data Services Service performs duties such as migrating replicating and purging data between Vaults and the overall management of data video and supports file movement to other Vaults on the network 2015 2
76. have limited options available which correspond to the parameter To reset the Destination tab with all parameters from any field select lt any gt in the Vault group x ae a py Several units of media can be assigned to a single storage pool See Prepare Media Storage Pool 2015 Data Management 321 e Create a new entry for a Vault Media Name or Storage Pool From the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool drop down list select lt new entry gt The Enter New Name window appears for you to type a new name Click OK and the new entry appears in the field s drop down list a This method is recommended only for special circumstances If a job is run with a Vault or media that is not actually running in the Information Repository the job fails The lt any gt item in the drop down list also acts as a divider between Vault media and storage pools implemented and those not implemented Names above lt any gt are the ones running in your Information Repository and the names below lt any gt are entered but do not yet have hardware implemented in the Information Repository These are not saved if not selected when saving the policy The limitations to adding a new name for a Vault Media Name or Storage Pool are e Typing a new name for the Vault Media Name and Storage Pool options are limited to lt any gt and lt new entry gt e New entries in Media Name or Storage Pool do not limit options in the remaining fields e Wi
77. in mind when using the standard wildcards e Wildcards can be used in combination with other wildcard characters e Searches are not case sensitive e These wildcard operators do not work for content searching you must use the regular expressions e For predictable results when using wildcards for metadata it is best to avoid using and 2015 Customization 333 POSIX Standard Wildcard Table The table below lists all the wildcard operators for conducting file metadata and window text box searches Two basic and common operators they are the first two in the table are highlighted for quick query reference a single character wildcard to represent a single variable k a string wildcard to represent a variable string of zero or more characters Wildcard Description Substitutes a single character or can be combined to represent multiple characters Use the for specific Any single character alternative spellings substitutes a single character substitutes two characters substitutes three characters and so on If used in a path it cannot replace a forward slash Use within or at the end of a phrase Examples The query cell searches names containing cell lt one additional character gt cells and cello but not cell The query xI searches names containing xl lt a third character gt xls or xlr The query wom n searches names containing wom lt a fourth character g
78. includes all the video dialog and dialog time codes associated in the video The stx file is necessary for searching content in videos and the name of it matches the video file name Surveillance Video Manager Application to search review and export video and metadata managed in the Information Repository to any computer on the network T Thumbnail A thumbnail is a picture or snap shot in time of a video Thumbnails are used to help the user get a glimpse of activity in video at specified intervals U URL Stands for Uniform Resource Locator A URL is a resource identifier that specifies where an identified resource is available URLs of RTSP enabled IP cameras are used to connect them to Phoenix RSM V Vault A Vault is comprised of a central processing unit CPU Phoenix RSM software and storage Each Vault requires its own capacity license because of its scalable possibilities The Vaults on the network make up the Information Repository to manage all your data storage needs The Vaults have attributes associated to them like licensing media and files and are easy to upgrade They are decentralized making the Information Repository a distributed solution across your network Vault Admin Optional desktop client application used to prepare media and manage media in the Information Repository Vaults Vault Service The Vault service manages the video and storage devices 2015 tes Video Lifecycle Managemen
79. it is the review of the topics of this User guide in addition to the Quick Start workflow that will help you become a master of your Phoenix RSM See Quick Start Launch an Application To launch an application see the instructions under the operating system where you are running Phoenix RSM Windows e From the Windows desktop select Start gt All Programs gt Phoenix and then select the application to run Mac 2015 Getting Started 39 e From the Mac desktop browse to Applications gt Phoenix gt Bin and then select the application to run Linux 1 To launch a Phoenix application on Linux using a GNOME desktop double click Computer on the desktop 2 Double click File System gt usr gt local gt Phoenix gt Bin and then double click the executable to launch For other Linux desktops this process is similar e Any executable that has Svc or Cl as part of its name is not an application The following are the applications in Bin to open Depending on your product you may not see all the applications Executable Application AddRemvVitWzrd Add or Remove Vault Wizard CameraPolicies Camera Policies DataSvcP olicies Data Service Policies HostInfo Host Information NetActivity Network Activity SurveillanceVideoManager Surveillance Video Manager VaultAdmin Vault Admin Open with UNIX When starting an application on Linux through a terminal shell using cd usr local Phoenix Bin click the X
80. less than 1 for example 0 2 Example To query corporate compliance and you want the term compliance to appear more relevant boost it using along with the boost factor next to the term Type corporate compliance 4 Boost phrase terms by enclosing a phrase in quotation marks corporate compliance 4 OR Boolean operators allow terms to be combined through logic operators AND OR and NOT are supported as boolean AND amp amp operators DEU NOT f Boolean operators must be in capital lettering boolean operators OR OR links two terms and finds a matching document when either of the terms exist in a document can be used in place of OR OR is the default conjunction operator meaning that if there is no boolean operator between two terms OR is assumed Example To query documents that contain corporate compliance or compliance you would use corporate compliance OR compliance The quotes indicate a single phrase AND 2015 32 Phoenix RSM Wildcard Description AND matches documents where both terms exist anywhere in the text of a single document amp amp can be used in place of AND Example To query documents that contain corporate compliance and Second Quarter 2007 use corporate compliance AND Second Quarter 2007 The quotes indicate a single phrase The plus symbol requires that the term after exists somewhere in a single file Example To quer
81. memory per data stream cache 10 00 MB Temporary files storage location C Program Files x86 Phoenix WorkingC Amount of disk space used for temporary files 100 00 GB Database location C Program Files x86 Phoenix Database3 Database optimized at 12 00 4M Maximum memory used for database 1 00 GB Maximum number of open database files 100 Activity logging enabled false Enable email notification false Error log pathname C Program Files x86 Phoenix Logs aultS c3 log Console pathname con Standalone Tape Drive Vault Summary e Review the displayed summary and ensure all the values are correct If information is incorrect click the Back button to navigate through previous wizard windows to edit 2015 Vault Management 75 Ready to Add Ready to Add Vault Review the summary below before clicking Next vault name SingleTape3 a Vault type SingleTape Changer Id IBMULTRIUM HH61011004C84 Amount of memory per data stream cache 10 00 MB Temporary files storage location C Program Files x86 Phoenix WorkingC Amount of disk space used for temporary files 100 00 GB Database location C Program Files x86 Phoenix Database3 Database optimized at 12 00 4M Maximum memory used for database 1 00 GB Maximum number of open database files 100 Activity logging enabled false Enable email notification False Error log pathname C Program Files x86 Phoenix Logs aultSvc3 log Console pathname con
82. metadata that you want associated with videos Later when you need to find and retrieve videos you can search using the extended metadata that was ingested when the video was processed The ingested metadata using Camera Policies is searchable using the Surveillance Video Manager The metadata extensions for both applications are covered in MetadataExtensions cfg aLe py The Metadata tab and metadata search options appear in the Camera Policies application and the Surveillance Video Manager only if there is a MetadataExtensions cfg file in lt install dir gt Config The MetadataExtensions cfg file must be on every computer where a recording policy could be modified otherwise the metadata values could be lost Camera Metadata Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced Case Name Agent Name John Napoli a AgentID 1001 Case Type Arson 7 Pathname Browse Indude content metadata Y ae wih The red asterisk next to Case Type and Pathname mean that those are required fields 2015 Camera Management 187 When you create configure and implement a MetadataExtensions cfg file the Metadata tab appears in Camera Policies It contains the Query blocks listed in the IngestMdExt block Camera Policies Processing Tab Use the Camera Policies Processing tab to define file processing options for your recording policy The contents on the Processing tab are the exact same
83. min file size lt number gt out_of band lt boolean gt Description Files to be processed This token value pair can be specified multiple times to include multiple file filters Default any Select the files that are to be processed based on the original host name for the file Default Process files from offline media Valid values true false Default false Specify the job type Valid values e replicate e migrate e purge Default migrate The filename where all report information is written Supports token substitution Default path for the policy file R Logs P log The maximum size in bytes of a source file The min_file_size and max_file_size options are mutually exclusive Default 18446744073709551615 The minimum size in bytes of a source file The max_file_size and min_file_size options are mutually exclusive Default 0 none Enable the application to constantly monitor its processes and select the network transmission protocol that best suits the files being processed Valid values true false 2015 2015 Token Value post_proc_cmd lt command gt pre_proc_cmd lt command gt process directories lt boolean gt process _files lt boolean gt repeat_interval lt hh ss mm gt src_high water_mark lt number gt stc_low_water_mark lt number gt src_media_ name lt character string gt src_media_ speed lt charact
84. module extensions Milestone OnSSI exacqVision The following is a breakdown of the two types of licensing e Capacity licensing This license is used to increase Vault storage capacity for storing video such as terabyte for hard disk storage or slot count for data tape storage device e Camera licensing This license is used to allocate the number of cameras used to capture video per recording computer These licenses can be bundled together to achieve your needed storage capacity or camera count Run as many Phoenix RSM software clients as you need on the network at no additional charge Evaluation License 2015 16 Phoenix RSM Phoenix RSM comes with a fully functional seven day evaluation license At the end of the trial period you can either request an extended license or purchase a regular license through the same channels a If you run the software longer than seven days with an evaluation license your Vaults will shut down or your cameras will no longer be activated Until a license is purchased and added the Vaults run in increments of only two hours Your licenses are managed through Vault Admin To activate or add a license see Vault Properties License tab Architectural Overview SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM specializes in data storage and the management of your digital data assets The data can be anything from document files to video files Phoenix RSM answers the call to your needs of e want to s
85. necessary to setup It is recommended to create policies as soon as Phoenix RSM is configured and installed You do not have to allow a certain amount of time to pass in order to implement policies to optimize storage capacity To maximize Phoenix RSM s data asset management capabilities be sure to implement a Data Service Policy to migrate replicate or purge data on network Vaults or to near line or offline storage devices When creating these policies on the Scheduling tab use the following job scheduling windows to support the policy implementation process 2015 426 Phoenix RSM Date window Use to set a date for when your job is to run Select Date 4 May 2014 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 27 28 29 30 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 1 8 11 12 FHo14 15 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 29 z 25 26 27 28 1 i 1 Using the arrow buttons by the month and year at the top set your month and year preference 2 Click a particular day from the calendar 3 Click OK Click Cancel to close the dialog box without saving new or changed parameters Time window Use to set a time for when your job is to run Select Time G fo an Lox cancel 1 From the drop down lists select the hour and minutes for your time preference and then select either AM or PM 2 Click OK Click Cancel to close the dialog box without saving new or changed parameters Days window Use to define on which days of the week a job
86. on your selection the wizard follows the path for you to add a Vault or to remove one If removing a Vault see Remove Vaults e Select Run this wizard in advanced mode to bypass default values and customize Vault parameters These instructions cover all of the advanced mode options but it is recommended to run in standard mode leaving this option de selected vits pe If there are four Vaults installed on the computer where the wizard is run from then Add new Vault to this computer is disabled In that case delete a Vault before adding a new one 2015 s Phoenix RSM Q S Add or Remove There are no vaults configured to run on this computer What task do you want to complete Add a new vault to this computer Remove an existing vault from this computer V Run this wizard in advanced user mode a ss eae 3 Click Next for the Description window e From the What type of device will be used to store the data drop down list select either Hard Disk Tape Library Stand Alone Tape Drive or Veracity Coldstore Depending on your selection subsequent content on wizard windows change accordingly e Inthe What is the name of this Vault type a Vault name or use the default if it is already populated with a name you want to use 2015 Vault Management 59 f gs lt gt Description What type of device will be used to store the data Hard Disk z What is the name of this vault HardDis
87. over an image the time associated with the image is displayed Click an image to jump to that point in the video and note that the pointer jumps to the corresponding point on the timeline Keyboard Navigation The Media Viewer also supports the following case sensitive keyboard navigation Action Key Combination Frame by frame forward ALT RIGHT ARROW Frame by frame backward ALT LEFT ARROW Move one second forward RIGHT ARROW Move one second backward LEFT ARROW Skip forward 30 seconds SHIFT RIGHT ARROW Skip backwards 30 seconds SHIFT LEFT ARROW Toggle play pause SPACE BAR Skip to in point SHIFT Skip to out point SHIFT O Set in point Set out point O Increase playback speed J Decrease playback speed L Stop playback K For more information see Search Surveillance Video and Surveillance Video Manager 2015 272 Phoenix RSM SVM Logging The right side of the Media Viewer window is the Logging panel Creating log entries for specific clips allows a user to add and save notes about the content of the video that is being viewed These notes are turned into logs which are grouped together and associated with the selected video Each log can be saved as a simple text file that can be used and viewed even if the Media Viewer is not available Any user can edit add and delete logs even if they were not the original user to create them This allows for multiple users to work on a project and save all of the wo
88. pathname gt Define the path to the file containing the output results e usage List all valid parameters version Display the current version information Interactive Commands and their Arguments After starting the application type the following arguments to the command line prompt one at a time When entering arguments you can simultaneously enter required variables or enter just a given argument and wait for the system to prompt you for its required variables Argument Description clist List all current clients for the selected Vault close Close the connection to the selected Vault diag Set the diagnostic mode for the selected Vault drives List drives for selected Vault dstat lt drive name gt Display information about a selected drive If the name is not listed on the command line it asks to provide the name errorlog lt path gt a aaa Set the Vault s error log path Valid values 2015 s Phoenix RSM Argument Description e pathname New error log path format lt notation type gt Set the current client address format Valid notations e dot Client computer network address is displayed e host Client computer name is displayed along with domain and subnet names e full Client s host name and port number are displayed help Show valid usages for commands Use only one command at a time license lt pathname gt Set the path for Information Repository license Valid val
89. previous dialog box except on the Welcome window and the Next button accepts current values and advances you to the next window in the wizard The Cancel button closes the wizard without saving values The Finish button appears on the last wizard window to complete the process Server Bundle for Windows 1 Click the application executable from your installation disc or installation folder 2015 Installation 25 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard The InstallShield R Wizard will install the the Server Bundle on your computer WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties 2 Select Next to review the software license agreement License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully LICENSE AGREEMENT The Software Programs Utilities and documentation provided by SoleraTec are licensed only on the condition that you referred to as YOU or Licensee agree with SoleraTec LLC referred to as Company to the terms and conditions set forth below PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION InstallShield 3 Read the license agreement and if you accept the terms select accept the terms in the license agreement 4 Select Next to enter your customer information 2015 z Phoenix RSM Customer Information Please enter your information
90. protected by copyright law and international treaties 1w o 2 Select Next to review the software license agreement 2015 Installation License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully LICENSE AGREEMENT The Software Programs Utilities and documentation provided by SoleraTec are licensed only on the condition that you referred to as YOU or Licensee agree with SoleraTec LLC referred to as Company to the terms and conditions set forth below PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMFNTATION z I accept the terms in the license agreement InstallShield 3 Read the license agreement and if you accept the terms select accept the terms in the license agreement 4 Select Next to enter your customer information Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Organization pe InstallShield 5 Type your User Name and Organization 6 Select Next to select a setup type 2015 30 Phoenix RSM Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Please select a setup type Typical i All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space D Minimal B Minimum required features will be installed _ Custom Choose which program features you want installed and where they will be installe
91. s wildcard characters If you need to use a character that is used by Phoenix RSM as a wildcard the character must be preceded by an escape character For example This is an example using escape characters in a statement with a wildcard The following are Phoenix RSM wildcards and special characters 1 4 amp For more information see Wildcards Create an ExportExtensions cfg Example 1 Open a text editor such as WordPad or Notepad and start a new document If using WordPad be sure to create a Text Document txt and not Rich Text Format rtf 2 Copy and paste the following ExportExtensions cfg sample file into the new document This name is significant and identifies this as an ExportExtension block ExportExtension Description Custom 2015 Customization 357 358 Phoenix RSM Name APathname Type Pathname Label Pathname Dresceubllie Weillivs 0 BlankValueOk false Description a oueny Name TnclueMd IVRE Checkbox Label Hipelvcda Contant mMercolckbrea s DefaultValue false DeScrlptton ine Lude alil customen metadata 3 Save the document to lt install dir gt Config naming it ExportExtensions cfg 4 Launch your Phoenix RSM search application 5 Set the Export Destination The values for your custom export options are the same as those in your ExportExtensions cfg file s s q oe In ExportExtensions cfg backs
92. sent to Type of Messages Description Select from the following options Output messages to window Sends the output information to a controlling window that is opened by the process A With this option a window appears to display Vault activity If you close this window you stop the Vault and Phoenix RSM does not operate without running Vaults pE s 4 SN Working in Windows To configure the Vault Service to open a window for diagnostic messages see Windows Diagnostics Output messages to file Type the path including the file name where you want message files written This option creates a file that contains all the output data Define where Output is sent to The file path including the file name typed here defines where message files are written to This option creates a file that contains all of the output data Select the types of devices to capture diagnostic information from Select the checkbox in front of each option you can make multiple selections The following are message results for each device General Vault Information about client connections and data moving in and out of the Vault Library SCSI activity regarding moving media within a robotic data tape storage device File System Host computer s working environment Tape Devices Information about the storage device itself Optical Devices Information about the storage device itself 2015 Vault Management 109 Ele
93. start tokens may be entered absolute_start lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt Used only in policy file Define whether the policy is active or inactive tive lt boolean gt wee vere Valid values true false Default true Print all summary information plus the path names of the files migrated to the file indicated by the list_pn option complete lt boolean gt Valid values true false Default false content_filter lt character string gt A word or phrase in the file to be processed Default The maximum number of concurrent files permitted data_paths lt number gt to be sent during a job Default 1 Include files tagged for deletion deleted_files lt boolean gt Valid values true false Default false Print diagnostic information to the path indicated in the list_pn option diag lt boolean gt Valid values true false Default false Specify which directories to include Multiple dir_spec options can be specified The dir_spec check is made for every directory found This dir_spec lt pathname gt includes the directories contained in the path name list that the job will traverse Default any 2015 se Phoenix RSM Token Value display_only lt boolean gt dst_media_name lt character string gt dst_media_speed lt character string gt dst_media_type lt character string gt Descri
94. storage device If you are using virtual media then you do not physically handle the media Use the Reload Selected Media window to load tape media such as tapes that are outside of a storage device into a Vault or to re index hard disk media The Reload Selected Media window is almost identical to the Load Media window 1 From the Vault Admin left pane click the expand indicator plus sign in front of the Vault to reload media to 2015 14 Phoenix RSM 2 Click on the expand indicator for Media to have a tree of the media names displayed and also to have a list of the media names displayed in the right pane 3 Select desired media individual or multiple then click on the Load Media button in the toolbar Or right click on the selected media and choose Reload Media from the shortcut menu The Reload Media window appears it looks just like the Load Media window except for the header and the available fields to modify values vite You can reload multiple media by holding the Shift key or Control key and clicking on the desired media in the right pane General Information HD_002 Media Location Media Location Media is located at pathname Named media E Phoenix Media Tape_03631216 Force Re Index Force Re Index Only re ndex ifneeded Only re ndex ifneeded Lok canet Hep ok __ Camel __He 4 Select a re indexing option If the Vault has a good listing of the medi
95. string Camera Policies User Preferences User Preferences define default settings for Camera Policies The information in User Preferences is the exact same as what is displayed on the Processing tab The User Preferences entered become the defaults for the application Changes made on the Processing tab override settings in User Preferences but only for the given job or policy Refer to the Camera Policies Processing Tab Elements section for details about the User Preferences options Preferences are an excellent way to streamline projects providing a convenient way to set commonly used options for your desktop client Each subsequent time you run a job using your desktop client those settings are automatically set 2015 198 Phoenix RSM Access the User Preferences from the Camera Policies Tools menu select User Preferences Video Processing Options Process video components V Generate low resolution proxy Low resolution proxy quality Medium v V Generate preview image Preview image quality Low smallest size v Camera Policies User Preference Elements Video Processing Options Use these options to capture video files for vewing Elect to generate low resolution companion videos also called proxy files or preview images during video capture The Process Video Components checkbox is selected by default and cannot be de selected Elements Description Generate low Select to generate l
96. tape Default 48 Used by VaultSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Block size Keys conf Format Type Int32 2015 388 Phoenix RSM Key Length 4 Value Block size Sample Usage TapeMinBlockSizeKB Int32 4 48 Name TapUseHardLink Description Specifies the use of hard links and applies only to move operations where the camera cache is located on the same file system as the destination storage media Default 0 false Used by TgtProcSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value 0 false or 1 true Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value 0 false or 1 true Sample Usage TapUseHardLink Int32 4 1 Name TapVideoCaptureWriteBufferSizeKB Description Sets the video capture write buffer size in kilobytes If zero then use system buffer setting Default 0 Used by TgtProcSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Minimum of 0 Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Minimum of 0 2015 Customization 389 Key Sample Usage TapVideoCaptureWriteBufferSizeKB Int32 4 0 Name TempDir Description Specifies a location where Phoenix RSM applications may store temporary files Default Windows Documents and Settings lt user gt Local Settings Temp Non Windows tmp Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname of directory Keys conf Format Type Char Len
97. terminal e diag displays the minimum amount of diagnostic information e diag_high displays all diagnostic diag high lt boolean gt pane information Valid values true false Default false Redirect any diagnostic output to any file or diag pn lt pathname gt device at service startup Default dewtty The SCSI tape drive s to be managed within a tape library This option is intended to be used where the SCSI changer library is unable to provide the correct IDs for its internal tape drives This option may be specified multiple times for drive_id_ string lt SCSI device ID libraries with multiple drives The first occurrence string gt must be for the first drive with each successive occurrence for each additional drive The SCSI device ID string is composed as follows lt Manufacturer gt lt Product ID gt lt Serial Number gt Default E mail notification of certain Vault events such as startup shutdown and media load requests il ble lt boolean gt email_enable oorgan Valid values true false Default false The e mail address to where e mail notifications email recipient lt character string gt We sent Default empty email server lt character string gt The name or IP address of the mail server 2015 Token error_log lt pathname gt fast_index lt boolean gt fs _default_media_dir pn lt pathname gt fs_max_dir_ent lt n
98. the Camera tab from the Camera drop down list select the camera configuration that the policy applies to 9 Advanced mode only On the Processing tab define video and file processing options 10 Advanced mode only On the Destination tab define the Vault media storage pool and other options where video is recorded or captured to 11 On the Scheduling tab select when to record video 12 Advanced mode only On the Advanced tab select log and report or performance options 13 Click the hd Save button to save all policy settings and implement the policy 2015 Camera Management 161 aye e py Open Network Activity to monitor processing as policies are created Modify a Policy 1 From the Camera Policies left pane double click an existing policy name Or from the Edit menu select Modify Selected Policy The Modify Selected Policy window opens for the selected policy Policy Name Test Policy Description Front Entrance Source Surveillance Camera v Active OK Cancel _ Hep 2 Type a new policy name or a new description 3 Select the policy as active or de select the Active checkbox if you do not want the policy to run When the Active checkbox is de selected the triangular caution symbol is superimposed over the policy in the Camera Policies window left pane Recording Policy Name column 4 Click OK The window closes and the Recording Policy Name Camera Recording Compu
99. the On what days of the week checkboxes to select the days to record video 14 Use the At what time Start and Stop drop down lists to set the beginning and ending times for the period to record When you make your selections the length of the time period is indicated 15 Click Next for the Recording Computer window 2015 Camera Management 155 Recording Computer What computer will be used for recording video Select Computer za cm 16 From the What computer will be used for recording video drop down list select the computer for recording video 17 Click Next for the Ready to Add window 2015 156 Phoenix RSM A Ready to Add Review the summary below before dicking Next to add the camera Camera name Test Camera Description lt Empty gt Manufacturer CamTron Model CTNB 5361 IP Address 255 196 5 200 User Name lt Empty gt Password lt Empty gt Schedule Always on Recording Computer sentinel 18 Review the information To change anything use the Back button to go to the appropriate wizard screen 19 Click Next for the List of Cameras Added window 2015 Camera Management 157 List of Cameras Added Test Camera at 255 196 5 200 Always on Remove selected Camera Do you want to add an additional camera Yes No Help J m 20 The cameras added during the wizard session are listed To remove any camera select it and then click the Remove Selected C
100. the Search Results window which shows a list of cameras found on the network If your camera is not on the list select the Show all devices checkbox for any additional cameras on the network and other devices to display Cameras in use appear grayed out and available cameras for configuration have an asterisk in the first column Select a camera and click OK or double click the camera item for the camera information to configure 179 180 Phoenix RSM Menu Items Description Tools gt Add Camera Open the Add Camera Wizard to introduce and add a RTSP Wizard enabled IP camera directly to your video surveillance solution When you use the wizard the process is simple and quick A camera policy automatically gets created for the new camera Do not use the wizard if adding a VMS managed camera use Camera Configurations instead Help gt Current Page Open online help to the Camera Policies webpage Help gt Camera Policies Overview Open online help with focus on Camera Policies Help gt Contents Open the local version of online help Help gt Online Help Open the web based version of online help Help gt Online Support Open the support webpage Help gt About Camera ee Open the About Camera Policies window Policies Camera Policies Advanced Mode The default Standard mode setting allows you to create a recording policy by connecting and configuring RTSP enabled IP cameras and scheduling jobs using the
101. the options when Local File System is selected 2015 278 Phoenix RSM Export Job Configuration xport destination Local file system Job name Generate checksum for video Watermark video Generate metadata output file Where to save files C Users Natalies When to overwrite existing files Never How to export the selected video Create a single video for each selection Start Export Element Description Export destination Define where files are exported to Local File System Job name Type a job name to associate a text name with the job This name appears in job logs Generate checksum Select to generate a checksum file for each exported video for video file The checksum or digital fingerprint is calculated using the SHA256 hash algorithm The resulting filename is the original base name with a sha256 extension Watermark video Select to apply a watermark to the exported video file When this item is selected the pane expands to show additional fields 2015 2015 Element Generate metadata output file Where to save files When to overwrite existing files Surveillance Video Manager Description Placement Specify where the watermark should be placed in the video Select from upper left upper right lower left lower right and center Type Specify the type of watermark to be applied If Text then there are fields displayed to input the te
102. the time e Middle dial Displays the overall Vault space used by stored and managed files A dial reading of 100 would mean there is no space available 2015 144 Phoenix RSM e Right dial Displays how much unneeded data is on a Vault waiting to be purged This indicator is typically used with sequential write media formats such as data tape Media with non sequential formats such as hard disk usually purge files immediately when a purge cycle starts The purge files then make room for added space to the Information Repository Data tape media requires files to be copied to other media units while reformatting the original media to complete a purge cycle In this case the dial would indicate how much space could be made available through the purge cycle operation Drive Information Located in the Vault Stats right part of the window each drive information pane is determined in the following way e Data Tape One drive information pane displays for every drive in the data tape library e Hard Disk One drive information pane displays for each data stream connection The data stream limitations are set in Vault Admin Properties in the Device tab Connection Resources group The data stream connections determine how many sessions can be running at any one time in a Vault Setting data stream connections can help limit usage so the network does not get saturated Up to four drive panes can be displayed concurrently but add
103. to create powerful filters and search criteria Example The query abc xls searches any phrase beginning with a b or c lt any character or number of characters gt xls The query abc xls searches any phrase not beginning with a b or c lt any character or number of characters gt xls The query and searches and lt any number of characters gt t any three characters More POSIX Standard Wildcard Examples The examples in the following table illustrate contrast in the way wildcards function differently from one another Wildcard Sample Phrase Matches Does not match path doc path1 doc path Any single character paths doc path doc ina name pathq doc path doc etc path_sample doc etc 2015 Wildcard X path doc Zero or more characters in a name path doc One or more characters in a name path doc Zero or more characters in a pathname including slashes path doc One or more characters in a pathname including slashes path 1 3 doc Set of characters i path 1 2 3 doc Characters not in set Sample Phrase Matches path doc path1 doc path_sample doc etc path1 doc paths doc path_sample doc etc path doc path1 doc path_sample doc path 1 doc etc path1 doc path_sample doc path 1 doc etc path1 doc path2 doc path3 doc pathO doc path4 doc Customization Does not match path path 1 doc path1 docs etc path
104. together to protect your files CRC Cyclic redundancy check is used to ensure data integrity by detecting accidental alterations of data during transmission or storage A unique numeric value is assigned to captured or ingested files and then an algorithm calculates this value based on data stream file size and other characteristics The CRC value is compared on client and server and validated D Data Service Policies These policies are sets of rules which define how the videos or files are duplicated moved or deleted across multiple storage devices Data Services Service Data Services Service enforces or implements the Data Service Policies Default A default value or setting used by a device or program when no other value or setting has been specified DHCP A network configuration protocol used to assign addresses to computers on a network Digital camera A surveillance camera which uses newer network cable to transfer images to a recording computer such as a NVR These cameras connect to your network like your computer Digital fingerprinting A checksum or digital fingerprint that uniquely identifies video with a fingerprint It is a numerical value calculated from the SHA256 hash algorithm DVR A device which records video from an analog source converts it to a digital format and then stores it on a disk or some other similar storage medium 2015 es Dynamic resource allocation The process use
105. topmost Group entry in the list The same pattern holds true for the remaining types Note that Vault rights and media rights are hierarchical with media rights being subordinate to overall Vault permissions 7 Repeat the steps above to add even more entries or click OK to save them 2015 12 Phoenix RSM Change Entry Use the Change Entry dialog box to modify rights for an entry 1 Double click the entry to change and the Change Entry dialog box appears The Name Type and Entry Name boxes are not editable Modify Selected Entry Name type Everyone Entry name Everyone Rights Full Control s 2 From the Rights drop down list select the actual rights granted to the given user group domain or everyone The following are the selections Full Control Allows the user group domain or everyone to have full control over a selected Vault Store Retrieve Allows the user group domain or everyone to store and retrieve data from the Vault Retrieve Allows user group domain or everyone to retrieve but not store data from the Vault None Blocks the user group domain or everyone from doing anything with the Vault 3 Click OK to save changes 4 From the main window click OK to save changes Delete Entry 1 To remove an entry from a list select it 2 Click the Delete button and the entry deletes 3 Click OK to save changes 2015 Vault Management 103 Vault Prop
106. under the Layouts folder in the Control Panel To view a Live Viewer layout 1 Double click the layout s name listed under the Layouts folder to view the selected layout To rename a Live Viewer layout 1 Right click the layout s name listed under the Layouts folder and select Rename Layout 2 Type a new name for the layout To delete a Live Viewer layout 1 Right click the layout s name listed under the Layouts folder and select Delete Layout For more information see View Camera Feeds View Camera Pool Feeds and Live Viewer Patrols Live Viewer Patrols After you create Live View layouts you can enhance your video surveillance ability by creating patrols A patrol is a group of layouts where each layout in a patrol is displayed in the Live Viewer for a set amount of time before the next layout is displayed You can create edit rename or delete patrols from the Live Viewer View menu or by right clicking the Patrols folder under the Entire Network area in the top right portion of the control panel Edit a patrol to change names layout sequence or dwell time To create a patrol 1 Create a few Live Viewer layouts 2 From the View menu select Create Patrol The Create Patrol window appears 2015 Live Viewer 23 Name New Patrol Description Test A Dwell Time 5 seconds Layout Sequence Layout_1 Layout_2 Layout_3 Cancel 3 Type a patrol Name a Description about the patrol and select
107. unreadable by Windows Explorer These files are also unreadable by Phoenix RSM clients 2015 12 Phoenix RSM Note All features and functions discussed in this guide may not be available for your version of Phoenix RSM Hardware and Software Requirements To deliver advanced data management for Windows Mac Linux and mixed environments be sure to have at least the minimum or better of the following system requirements e Processes do not run optimally if hardware does not meet or exceed requirements e The interface appearance varies slightly depending on the platform used For example where a Window s menu displays Exit a Mac menu displays Quit Regardless of your operating system a keyboard monitor and mouse pointer is needed to properly run the software If you are using a single button mouse press CTRL and click where the documentation states right click Windows Server Windows Requirements Windows Server 2003 SP2 Windows XP SP3 Windows Vista SP2 32 bit and 64 bit Windows 7 SP1 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2008 SP1 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Windows 8 32 bit and 64 bit Windows 8 1 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2012 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2012 R2 64 bit Processor Requirements Intel i5 Core 3 00 GHz or better Hard Drive Requirements 20 GB of available space to install and run the product Memory Requirements 8 GB of RAM Third party Requirements N
108. video clips To avoid this error reset the video clip names to the original names or choose to export the video clips as a single video Remove from Export Remove the selected video clip from the Export Queue The Queue removed file is not deleted and will be available for any subsequent searches Select All Select all of the videos and images in the Search Results Unselect all Unselect all of the videos and images in the Search Results 2015 264 Phoenix RSM Element Description Play Open the Media Viewer with the selected video queued up and ready to play 13 When done selecting videos to export and they are in the Export Queue click the Export tab at the top of the main window to activate the export panes Set the options found in the section Export Surveillance Video to complete the export process wile py You can save your Export Queue selections for later use See SVM Save and Load Export Queue SVM Save and Load Export Queue Being able to save the clip selections that are in the Export Queue is a very useful feature of the Surveillance Video Manager After searching for video and sending the clips to the Export Queue you have the option to save the selections to a xdl file Export Decision List Once they have been saved to a file you can then share the file or load the Export Queue at a later time using the file of saved selections This means any work in progress can be saved for later use and it allows mul
109. videos at different speeds search metadata content navigate to a particular point in a file clip parts of the video for export and send clips to the Export Queue It is comprised of the basic controls of any popular video viewer such as volume play stop skip forward skip back beginning and end and the following additional controls timeline scissors jog shuttle playback speed search box and storyboard 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 267 e Logging The logging area of the Media Viewer is used to create logs about specific clips of a video At the top of this area is a list of all the saved log entries for the selected video When a log entry has been selected information on the clip is displayed such as time in and time out and it provides information about the selected log such as the user who created it date and time created bullet color associated with the clip and the title and description of the clip The entire Logging panel can be minimized for maximum media viewer viewing or the panel can be maximized to manage the log entries For more information see SVM Media Viewerand SVM Logging SVM Media Viewer The left side of the Media Viewer window is the actual Media Viewer When the Media Viewer opens the low resolution proxy video is queued up for viewing if the proxy video generation was enabled when the video was captured If no low resolution proxy video is available the original video file is played Use
110. viewing live video streams Select to be able to use multiple threads and multiple cores for decoding to provide faster decoding of the video s H Y py If decoding is not occurring properly disabling this feature may fix the problem 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 291 Group Element Enable storyboard Cache folder Cache size Video Cache Clear cache when exiting Export destinations Export Destinations Save 2015 Description Select to display a storyboard strip in the Media Viewer The storyboard displays still images from the video Click an image to jump to that point in the video Define the folder where Phoenix RSM caches search results Similar to the cache of a web browser the cache stores found thumbnails low resolution proxy companion videos and other associated files and enables you to replay already found videos more quickly Click the Browse button to browse for a folder Define the size of the cache where Phoenix RSM caches thumbnails low resolution companion videos and associated files When full contents overwrite in the order of oldest to newest vite py If unsure about cache size leave it set to the default value If you find that Phoenix RSM often needs to retrieve videos from storage rather than from the cache increase the cache size Select for Phoenix RSM to empty the cache when the application closes Only the export destinations available fo
111. when the machine is restarted Mac 1 Click Go then choose Utilities 2 Double click Terminal 3 Enter a command e To Start a service sudo bin launchctl load Library LaunchDaemons com SoleraTec lt Service name gt plist e To Stop a senice sudo bin launchctl unload Library LaunchDaemons com SoleraTec lt Service name gt plist vite pe lt Service name gt is replaced with one of the following Service Name Series pass ipeon hecsve SoleraTec Locator Service 2015 Manage Services 441 VaultSvcl VaultSvc2 SoleraTec Vault Service VaultSvc3 VaultSvc4 TgtProcSve SoleraTec Target and Process Service Datasvessve SoleraTec Data Services Service A Services will automatically restart when the machine is restarted Glossary A ACL ACL stands for access control list It is a table that tells a computer operating system the access rights that each user has to a system object such as a file directory or an individual file Each object has a security attribute that identifies its access control list The list has an entry for each system user with access privileges The most common privileges include the ability to read files to write files and to execute the files Administrator Administrators have complete and unrestricted access to a computer or domain Analog camera A surveillance camera which uses older technology video cable to transfer images to a recording devic
112. window select the Destination tab to specify where the files are to be migrated or replicated to From the Data Service Policy window select the Scheduling tab to define job occurrences By default Data Service Policies are not scheduled to run 2015 Data Management 297 7 From the Data Service Policy window select the Advanced tab to set options such as pre processing and post processing commands log output location connection sharing and throttling 8 Click the Save icon to start the policy Data Service Policies Use Data Service Policies to create parameters for complete data lifecycle management in the Information Repository The service provides an easy way to move copy and delete data while preserving data quality and making sure it is maintained on media within a storage hierarchy that continually meets performance and storage longevity requirements of each different type of data within an enterprise Once data is in the Information Repository use Data Service Policies to control which files are affected during a job to migrate replicate or purge The policies also control when a job starts where files are stored how often a job runs when it stops and all other aspects of the job Initial and subsequent storage devices do not have to be of the same technology so configurations can be built to include anything for example disk to tape D2T or disk to disk to tape D2D2T Other Phoenix RSM policies run
113. your motion detection enabled camera is configured See motion detection You can easily skip past sections of video where no motion was detected RY ci you can right click on a file and choose from one of the many options in the drop down list Element Show Metadata Select All Unselect all Send to Export Queue Play Media Viewer Description Select to show metadata for the selected video or image i s 1 PE cick the information icon Mill to the right above the preview image when in Details view mode to quickly access and edit metadata Select all of the videos and images in the Search Results Unselect all of the videos and images in the Search Results Send the selected video clip to the Export Queue This will send the entire video without creating any clips or logs Open the Media Viewer with the selected video queued up and ready to play Use the Media Viewer to play back and review videos at variable speeds navigate to a particular point in a file clip particular parts of videos for export and send clips to the Export Queue For details see SVM Media Viewer 10 To select a video clip to export click and drag the timeline pointer to the point where you want the clip for export to begin and then click the left scissor button To end the clip click and drag the timeline pointer to an end point and then click the right scissor button 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 263 wit M pe
114. 1 Phoenix RSM Element Maintain Client Vault Connection Throttle Description Vault connection sharing determines how many files are sent from the source Vault to the destination Vault in a single connection The higher the number of files or bytes transferred the longer the connection between the source and destination Vault is maintained Access to a particular Vault resource such as one drive of a multi drive storage device used by a process on one client is restricted and inaccessible to other clients in the network for the duration of the connection To illustrate this imagine an environment where a single Vault with a single tape drive is used to service several desktop clients When a client is configured with a connection sharing set to 250 files and other clients are configured to start jobs at the same time no client can connect until the first client is finished Each connection to the server locks out other connections and other clients must wait before processing files 1 Type an integer value into the Maintain Client Vault Connection for text box 2 Select the Files radio button or Bytes radio button By selecting Files a connection sharing proceeds based on the number of files transmitted or if Bytes based on the number of bytes The throttle controls the speed that files are sent to the Vault Lower numbers reduce the bandwidth Throttle values range from 10 to 100 of total available bandwidth e
115. 10 minutes after the technical difficulty has been resolved Unload Tape Media 1 From the Vault Admin left pane click the expand indicator plus sign in front of the Vault to remove media from 2 Click on Media to have a tree of the media names displayed and also to have a list of the media names displayed in the right pane 3 Select desired media individual or multiple then click on the Unload Media button in the toolbar Or right click on the selected media and choose Unload Media from the shortcut menu The Unload Media window opens weit pe You can unload multiple tape media by holding the Shift key or Control key and clicking on the desired tape media in the right pane 4 From the toolbar click the Unload Media button Or right click on the selected Media Name or the multiple selected names and choose Unload Media from the shortcut menu 2015 2015 Vault Management 127 Media Tracking Track media after unloading z Location where media will be stored Media Updating Update media if needed m Media Handling Move media to mail slot x ce H 5 From the Media Tracking drop down list select an option Track media after unloading The Vault s memory updates with this information Should data on this unit of media be required for retrieval a media request alert including the Location where media will be stored is displayed by the Information Repository promptin
116. 15 4 Phoenix RSM Data Service Policies Criteria Tab Data Service Policies Destination Tab Data Service Policies Scheduling Tab Data Service Policies Advanced Tab Customization ExportExtensions cfg MetadataExtensions cfg s 0000 Site cfg Key Configurations ccccceseeeeees Command Line Arguments Locator Admin Command Line Locator Service Vault Admin Command Line Vault Service Data Services Command Line Data Services Service Live Viewer Command Line Job Scheduling Troubleshooting Manage Services Glossary Index 2015 Introduction 5 Introduction We welcome you to SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM version 6 5 SoleraTec is in the business of data management and can effectively address storage needs for digital data assets With the SoleraTec solution digital data assets are captured or ingested into the management solution s Information Repository where they are stored under complete control can be searched on and retrieved with the highest original quality Depending on the scope of your working environment the Information Repository is made up of one Vault or many Vaults on your network each Vault contains a central processing unit CPU Phoenix RSM software and storage The Phoenix RSM solution is unique and outstanding compared to any storage management systems because of e Decentralized Vaults Your Information Repository is distributed over your network This offers yo
117. 19 Wildcards 332 Wizard 56 149
118. 36 xls Part 532 xls Ref guide rev21502 doc Ref guide rev21802 doc Install guide 21502 ind Illustration 532 psd Illustration 236 psd Vacation 1 jpg Vacation 2 jpg Vacation 3 jpg Filter X jpg Files that are processed Elevator design 12502 vsd Elevator design rev 20502 vsd Elevator design rev 21502 vsd Part345X xls Part236 xls Part 532 xIs Ref guide rev21502 doc Ref guide rev21802 doc Install guide 21502 ind Illustration 532 psd Illustration 236 psd Filter strings can contain wildcard symbols making the Information Repository very flexible Use several filters together to create almost any include exclude combination Using the same file set as an example the only files processed are the vsd and xls files 2015 Customization 349 Files in specified directory Filter Files that are processed Elevator design 12502 vsd sd Elevator design 12502 vsd Elevator design rev 20502 vsd xis Elevator design rev 20502 vsd Elevator design rev 21502 vsd Elevator design rev 21502 vsd Part345X xls Part345X xls Part236 xls Part236 xls Part 532 xls Part 532 xIs Ref guide rev21502 doc Ref guide rev21802 doc Install guide 21502 ind Illustration 532 psd Illustration 236 psd Vacation 1 jpg Vacation 2 jpg Vacation 3 jpg ExportExtensions cfg Use an ExportExtensions cfg text file to customize your export options for files that have been retrieved This is done by configuring fields seen in export retriev
119. 5 es N NAS Network Attached Storage Networked computer that provides file based data storage Network Activity Application used to monitor all data media and Vault operations within the Information Repository in real time NVR Network Video Recorder records video in a digital format over a network The video is encoded and processed at the camera and then streamed into the NVR for storage or viewing The video is of good quality with high megapixel resolution O On Media Catalog The metadata catalog stored on every media unit that contains metadata for all the files The on media catalog is an Information Repository safeguard Should a Vault catalog become lost or corrupted the on media catalogs are used to rebuild it P Patrols A group of layouts where each layout in a patrol is displayed in the Live Viewer for a set amount of time before the next layout is displayed Physical Media A physical unit of media such as a tape that is independent of its drive An individual unit of physical media can be used in a single stand alone drive or can be one of several units of media within an automated library system In automated libraries storage units use robotics to move units of media With systems based on physical media there can be one or more drives and several units of media per drive POE Power Over Ethernet is a technology used to power network connected devices through the network Policies Phoenix R
120. 9 Export Queue 253 F FAQs 428 File Filters 343 Firewall 22 Focus 244 H Histogram 269 Import 162 203 300 Information Repository 17 Installation 21 Linux 36 Macintosh 32 Windows 24 J Job Scheduling 192 322 425 K Key Configurations 370 E e License Add 95 Product Licensing 15 Live Viewer 235 Camera Control 244 Control Panels 238 Layout 240 Patrols 242 User Preferences 247 View Camera Feeds 239 Locator Service 400 Log Files 103 438 2015 M Media 110 Erase 128 Load 120 Reload 123 Unload 124 Migrate 297 Monitor Jobs 135 Motion Detection 226 Multicast 23 380 Multi tiered 5 Pp Patrols 242 Prepare Media 110 Problems 428 PTZ 244 Purge 297 R Recording 159 Replicate 297 Rimage 292 RTSP Enabled IP Camera 148 209 235 S Scalable 5 SCSI 77 Search 257 Search Criteria 253 Search Results 253 Status 129 135 Storyboard 270 Surveillance Video Manager 251 Export Video 277 Media Viewer 265 Search Video 257 User Preferences 288 SVM 251 System Requirements 12 2015 oe Technical Information 18 Terms 441 Troubleshooting 428 U User Preferences 197 247 288 V Vault 53 Add Vault 54 Checkup 109 Details 129 License 95 Remove Vault 145 Security 85 99 Shutdown 86 Start Manually 129 Stats 138 140 Wizard 56 Vault Admin 80 Vault Properties 86 Vault Service 405 Video Feeds 235 VMS 148 218 W Watermark 278 3
121. A Recording policies are visible to all computers in the Information Repository that are running the Camera Policies application and that have appropriate permissions Create a Policy 2015 160 Phoenix RSM The most convenient way to set up a camera a schedule and then record video is to use the Add Camera Wizard However there are times when using the wizard is not applicable for example if your camera information is not included in the manufacturer or model list If using the wizard is not applicable you must create a recording policy manually 1 Open the Camera Policies application 2 From the Camera Policies application toolbar click the Add button to create a new policy Or from the Edit menu select Create a Policy Policy Name Description Source Surveillance Camera v Active ok canei Help 3 In the Create a Policy window type a Policy Name for the new policy 4 Type a Description for the new policy for quick reference 5 The Source is always Surveillance Camera 6 Select the policy as active or de select the Active checkbox if you do not want the policy to run When the Active checkbox is de selected the triangular caution symbol is superimposed over the policy in the Camera Policies window left pane Recording Policy Name column 7 Click OK The window closes and the Recording Policy Name Camera Recording Computer and Description appear in the Camera Policies 8 On
122. After clipping a video you have the option of creating a log entry that will be associated and exported with that clip See SVM Logging for more details 11 Once you have selected the part of the video you want to export select Export The clip is sent to the Export Queue pane Export Queue vite pe Once a clip is in the Export Queue you can still change which part of the video to export Click the video from the Export Queue The Media Viewer opens again After you have made your changes click Commit to save changes and then close the Media Viewer window 12 You can right click on a video in the Export Queue and choose from one of the many options in the drop down list These options are also available under Actions gt Export Queue Element Description Show Metadata Select to show metadata for the selected video or image SEYI PE cick the information icon B to the right above the preview image when in Details view mode to quickly access and edit metadata Rename Export File Select to rename an export file Type in a new name and click the Ok button to save the new name If no extension is supplied the correct extension will be appended to the new name If an extension is entered which is not correct for the content the correct extension will be appended to the new name To reset the file back to the original name click the Reset button A An error message will show if you choose to export renamed video clips as multiple
123. Bundle somewhere on your network e Install on computers that do not contain Vaults Install See the appropriate section for the platform to install your Phoenix RSM Uninstall instructions are included as well e Windows e Mac e Linux After installation is complete the next step is to add Vaults See Add or Remove Vault Wizard For more information about what s next see Getting Started Important Installation tips e To install you need to have administrative permissions e Phoenix RSM must be installed on a NTFS partition not a FAT32 partition This is especially true for Mac Boot Camp Windows installations as the default partition is FAT32 e Phoenix RSM Vaults and surveillance video ingest servers require running on a computer configured to use static IP address assignment Using DHCP to obtain a dynamic IP address may result in unpredictable system behavior Network Connectivity Requirement Phoenix RSM is designed to run on a network Running it on a computer that is not networked causes unexpected performance If you need to run it on a standalone Windows computer you must use the Microsoft Loopback adapter bundled in Windows to create a virtual network environment Go to http support microsoft com kb 839013 for details Firewall Rights Requirement 2015 Installation 23 Most firewalls are pre configured to block most programs from communicating to maintain a high level of security Your local firewall sof
124. Cache When Phoenix RSM processes files it may create temporary files for efficient performance especially when clipping video files From the How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files drop down list select how much working cache space is used for temporary files n o Device What is the IP address of the Coldstore How many data streams are allowed at a time 10 v How much memory should be used for each data stream cache 10 00MB w Where can temporary files be stored C Program Files WorkingCache3 How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files 100 00 GB v 2015 e Phoenix RSM 5 Click Next for the Database window appears for advanced mode only The database keeps track of Vault contents information and metadata e From the Where will the database be stored box type the location to store the database or select a location from the Browse for Folder window by clicking the Browse button e Using the At what time daily do you want the database optimized drop down lists set the hours minutes and AM PM for how often the database gets optimized to make sure Phoenix RSM and the Information Repository continue to function optimally e From the How many database files can be opened at a time drop down list select between 10 500 to limit how many files can be open at once Having more files open allows for a faster search but more files
125. Camera and Scheduling tabs of the Camera Policies application Change the mode to the advanced setting to capture video from a ideo management system VMS such as Milestone OnSSI or exacqVision Also use the Advanced mode to access additional more refined options for direct connect IP cameras Compared to Standard mode Advanced mode displays more features on the Camera Policies Camera tab and Camera Configuration window Plus additional tabs appear in Camera Policies Processing Destination and Advanced Standard mode just displays Camera and Scheduling tabs To make additional tabs and options available select from the View menu gt Enable Advanced mode for Advanced mode If you turn Advanced mode on it remains that way until you disable it a If you set an advanced option and later want to change it you must be in Advanced mode in order to access the option Keep in mind that some Phoenix RSM users on your network may be using Standard mode and might not see a change in an advanced setting The Advanced mode descriptions are included in the above Camera Policies Menu Items section 2015 Camera Management 181 File Edit View Tools Help H save A Wed p aa x Delete 4 Refresh E cameras Recording Policy Name le AxisvC_098 ile Axisvc_099 ide AxisvC_100 lw Basler 1300DN ae Canon_M40 ite Cohu_3930HD Sle Cricket_8FC6 ide QEye 765N Ee QEye_D31S e TQinvision_M32N je SD_Lobby Saw ISD_Outside m
126. Diagnostics Tab Use the Diagnostics tab to run diagnostic logs for the selected Vault When enabled diagnostic logs are created for all Vault activity Diagnostic logging is optional and since it significantly impacts system performance it is disabled by default Diagnostic logs output to a window or console by default and if you restart the Vault and return to this tab diagnostic logs are set to the default of Disabled A If you use diagnostic logging to assist in the resolution of problem conditions be aware that it seriously impacts Information Repository performance This is a complex feature and should be used with discretion Access this from Vault Properties by clicking the Diagnostics tab General Device Database License Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics Vault s Diagnostic State Where Messages Will Be Sent Output messages to window Z Output is sent to Controlling Window Type of Messages General Vault DVD devices C Library Hard disk devices F File system E Database subsystem F Tape devices F RPC mechanism T Optical devices Lock subsystem CD ROM devices Message Detail 0K cancel Hee 1 From the Vault s Diagnostic State drop down list select Enable 2015 108 Phoenix RSM 2 Select preferred options 3 Click OK to save new settings Diagnostics Tab Elements Element Where Messages will be sent Output is
127. Double click again to return to the original layout or press ESC Live Viewer Menu Items Menu Items Description File gt Exit Close the application View gt Save Layout Save a modified camera layout with the same name View gt Save Layout As Create a new camera layout and save with new name View gt Rename Layout Designate a new name for the layout View gt Delete Layout Remove a layout from the Live Viewer View gt Create Patrol Select to open the Create Patrol window View gt Edit Patrol Use to change the name layout sequence or dwell time of the patrol View gt Rename Patrol Designate a new name for the patrol View gt Delete Patrol Remove a patrol from the Live Viewer View gt Full Screen Toggle full screen mode To get out of full screen mode press the ALT key and then from the View menu deselect the Full Screen option 2015 23 Phoenix RSM Menu Items Description Tools ser Open the Live Viewer User Preferences window Preferences Help gt Current Page Open online help to the Live Viewer webpage Help gt Liye Viewer Open online help with focus on Live Viewer Overview Help gt Contents Open the local version of online help Help gt Online Help Open the web based version of online help Help gt Online Support Open the support webpage Help gt About Live Open the About Live Viewer window Viewer When the main menu bar is hidden click the EI from the Live
128. From the Throttle drop down list select a percentage to operate the client on its host computer for maximum performance Phoenix RSM is designed to operate at maximum performance of its host computer network environment and storage resources available During normal working hours running a job at peak performance could interfere with other network operations 2015 Camera Management 197 File Name Field Variables The file path can include a literal file name or a combination of variables to generate file names for reports Use variables to distinguish between reports and to find specific reports If a path with a literal file name is typed like C Program Files Logs Job_Report log the system generates the report destination folder Logs if it does not already exist and a report named Job_Report log If a path with variables for the file name is typed for example R Logs P_from_ H_on_ D_at_ T the system generates the report destination folder and a report where policy name host name date and time are populated with the actual details from your Information Repository and job The following are the variables to use When using multiple variables separate them from each other with an underscore _ Variable Description P or Pn Policy Name H or Hn Host Name D Date yyyy mm dd Dy Year Dm Month Dd Day T Time hh mm Th Hour Tm Minute Ts Second R or Rn Root Pathname Valid only at the beginning of a
129. If an error occurs while running jobs that prevents files from being processed clients add the files to an internal retry list At the end of the job the client retries to process the files that failed on the first pass If it fails during the retry session the failure is logged to a retry file and report and is included in the Information Repository s error logs When a subsequent job starts the system looks for the retry file and the files slated for retry are added with first priority to the list of files to be captured Workflow Data Service Policy An intricate part of data management is working with Data Service Policies The following steps supply an overview look at the data management workflow 1 From your suite of product applications open the Data Service Policy application DataSvcPolicies exe For further explanation of how to launch applications using different operating systems see Getting Started Ifa policy does not open by default you need to create a policy Before you can set parameters and initialize the process a policy must be created and opened From the Data Service Policy window select the Source tab to identify a Vault media or storage pool to migrate replicate or purge files From the Data Service Policy window select the Criteria tab to designate files to migrate replicate or purge Within this tab you can also add file and directory filters From the Data Service Policy
130. Include Exclude group click the Add button Add new filter Indude x cane 2 Select a filter type Use Include to ensure the inclusion of files directories and file types Use Exclude to exclude files directories and file types This text box supports characters numbers and symbols needed to define filters 2015 Customization 345 3 Type a filter and then click OK For example in the Files to Include Exclude if you type vsd and then xls the text box would appear as follows Include filters are preceded by a v green check mark and exclude filters by a X red x The Files to Include Exclude or Directories to Include Exclude group boxes display the values entered from the Add Filter dialog box Wildcards are supported vits gt A To assign priority to filters move them up and down using the o up arrow button and d own arrow button Files to Indude Exclude v vsd v xls PHHH Delete File Filters and Directory Filters In the Files to Include Exclude or Directories to Include Exclude group select a filter and click the x Delete button Understanding Directory Filters The following table demonstrates how directory filters work and includes some uses of wildcards Filter The filter applied in the Criteria tab This can be either an Include or Exclude filter Pathname The current file or directory being looked at to determine the next step of processing Process
131. Information Repository to contain more files Longer clips larger files mean fewer files In either case the amount of storage space used depends only on the amount of data that is captured not the number of files Cache Folder Advanced mode only A video recording option The cache folder is where incoming video streams are stored when they are first captured but not yet in the Information Repository a Each camera should have its own cache directory e Leave the setting Default Location or select At Pathname and type the path Additional Camera items for cameras managed by Milestone OnSSIl or exacqVision Element Description Server Address The host name or IP address of the image server from extract video location 2015 186 Phoenix RSM Element Description User Name The user name who has rights to access the camera with video to extract This must be a Basic User Password If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the password This box works in conjunction with User Name Camera Policies Metadata Tab The Camera Policies Metadata tab is only displayed if it has been configured as described below Advanced users can create and configure an optional Metadata tab in the Camera Policies application and extended metadata search options in the Surveillance Video Manager This is done by creating a text file called MetadataExtensions cfg With extended metadata you can ingest custom
132. Key Type DWORD value Value Number of 128K blocks initially read Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Number of 128K blocks initially read Sample Usage VitPrefetchQueLen Int32 4 10 Command Line Arguments The command line arguments are intended for advanced users of Phoenix RSM Use the command line interface only if you are familiar with command line environments otherwise use a Phoenix RSM application In Phoenix RSM command line refers to command line interpreter based Phoenix RSM applications or the line in a command line interpreter where you can type commands The command line applications provide an alternative way for executing functionality for Phoenix RSM applications There are distinct ways to use command line utilities e There are several command line executables for desktop client components available with your suite of product applications for example VaultAdminCl exe These executables with the Cl included at the end of the name are completely interactive and offer another way to execute an application s default functionality This is useful if you have scripts to run or diagnostics work to do At the command line prompt if you type help a list of commands appear for you to interact with the application For more information see Locator Admin Command Line Vault Admin Command Line and Data Services Command Line e Some server components are service applications that run behind the scenes and can be
133. Mobotix_MS ile Ms _IQEye_Office Ee MS_M1011_test ite Panasonic_385 ye Panasonic_Front gt Camera AxisVC_098 AxisVC_099 AxisVC_100 Basler_1300DN Canon_M40 Canon_M700 Canon_M700F Cohu_3930HD Cricket_8FC6 e Grandstream 3601LL policy Grandstream 3601LL IQEye765N 1QD31S TQinvision M32N ISD_Lobby ISD_Jaguar Mobotix IQeye_Office Axis_M1011_MS not 4 Panasonic 385 Panasonic306 4_Front pi Camera Metadata Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced Camera Information Camera Canon M700F Active gt IP camera Canon_M700F lt none gt Canon f VB M700F rtsp 192 168 1 227 profle1 r root camera Recording Computer iceman Video Recording Options orate Sl Panasonic_N 202 Panasonic NS202 ile SecureEye 1080 SecureEye 1080 idl n Cache Folder DefaultLocation lt default location gt Camera Policies Camera Tab After you have connected to a camera for your video surveillance solution create a recording policy through either the Add Camera Wizard or manually through Camera Policies Camera Configuration The Camera Policies Camera tab displays camera and recording information If you have used the Add Camera Wizard the information from the wizard is populated into the Camera tab fields If you have built a new recording policy manually then the information is populated from Camera Configurations leaving only a few fields editable Onc
134. NCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT AND ANY STATEMENTS OR REPRESENTATIONS MADE BY ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY ARE VOID COMPANY MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS THAT ANY PROGRAMMABILITY COMPLIES WITH THE APPLICABLE STATUTES LAWS OR REGULATIONS 2015 Introduction 9 5 2 LICENSEE ASSUMES ALL RISK AS TO THE SELECTION USE PERFORMANCE AND QUALITY OF THE SOFTWARE IN NO EVENT WILL COMPANY OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFITS OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF COMPANY OR SUCH OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 5 3 Some states and or countries do not allow limitations on how long an implied w arranty lasts and some states and or countries do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation and exclusion may not apply to Licensee This w arranty gives Licensee specific legal rights and Licensee may also have other rights w hich vary from state to state and or country to country 6 GENERAL 6 1 If any provision or portion of a provision of this Agreement is determined to be invalid or unenforceable it shall be deemed to be revised to the extent necessary to make it enforceable or omitted if necessary and the remainin
135. Name Sample Usage PrimaryNicName Char 4 ethO Name RccMinVideoSizeBytes Description Minimum size that a RTSP recorded video file must have to be considered valid in bytes Default 10240 Used by TgtProcSvc 2015 Customization 385 Key Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD Value Size in bytes Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Size in bytes Sample Usage RccMinVideoSizeBytes Int32 4 8192 Name RestrictedPortsList Description Restricts TCP port usage to a set or range Default Use all ports Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value lt ranges gt lt range gt COMMA lt range gt lt range gt lt port low gt HYPHEN lt port high gt Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value lt ranges gt lt range gt COMMA lt range gt lt range gt lt port low gt HYPHEN lt port high gt Sample Usage RestrictedPortsList Char 20 5000 51 10 5500 5521 Name SarAdvancedFeaturesEnable Description Enables metadata editing file grouping file purging and file protection settings editing via Search and Retrieve Default 0 disabled 2015 386 Phoenix RSM Key Used by Search and Retrieve Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value 0 disabled or 1 enabled Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value 0 disabled or 1 enabled Sample Usage SarAdvanc
136. Only media speeds for the parameters selected in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool drop down lists are displayed If none were selected then only the media speeds from media available within the Information Repository are displayed Set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both 2015 192 Phoenix RSM Element Description Miscellaneous Options Select Keep files grouped together on the same media to have Phoenix RSM write files to the same media If de selected targeted files store across the Information Repository on whatever media has the most space and best availability Select Store on local Vaults only to store files on the host computer where the policy lives Offline Media When videos are being captured offline media are never used as a destination even if offline media is selected it is not used Attempting to use media that is offline may result in a No resources available error Camera Policies Scheduling Tab Use the Camera Policies Scheduling tab to define when to record video from your RTSP enabled IP camera or when to capture from your VMS managed camera You can record or capture video always or on a daily basis As soon as you save the given policy the schedule you created is implemented Scheduling a Job for Recording or Capturing Video The Scheduling tab displays different fields to populate depending on the parameter set for the When do you want to record video option Select an
137. Phoenix RSM User Guide Version 6 5 sous Soveralec 2 Phoenix RSM Table of Contents Introduction 5 Software License AGreement nieeisj rece ceeeecdsecsieececdesvadectys evaecevensiuetsdiecedeverqdlel ss cxgeceveedtcacspexcgcdveradestassxeesss 7 Contact Informatio M se aoan deaa t deen e aaraa aa ae a aaa deuce deed cecenes a ea ra tet anea denedaesaacdaedeaeiece 10 Documentation OVErVie W cusi iroa te a a a aa aa aa aE aaa E a aaa sei vadeneenedenetienies 11 Hardware and Software Requirements 22 c cccceeeeeeeeeeceee cece ee eeee sees eeeaeeseaeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeaeeessaeeeseeees 12 Product LicensiNg s irisa iaaa aaa aiaa A aaa ba aaa Daaa aan araara raa aana ania 15 Architectural Overview sirane aeaa a da a E aE aa a a a E AAA Ea daa aasa 16 Technical Ove Gye Wama ei hc cote a aaa Eaa a a aa aaa iaaa a iaaa ia ear 18 Installation 21 WINGOW S aeaaea ane tan araea aaa a ea a a cand aa aa aea daaa e raa aa aaar ar aaa daraa aaa anaana raina aaa 24 Ma Ceci a E A A E A A A E ET 32 UTX aoe coos EAE T E E AT A E 36 Getting Started 38 QUICK S tart innen i naaa a aaa aa Aaa eeraa a iaaa aeaaea Da 40 Vault Management 53 Add VaUItS icici scictsccecseccscinvescaseeectesavtevesssnieetsdeesetnicdneevdedeviwecsenuesasdenowvetdsveeedaseteneraaetswendesreveraseveetva scien 54 Add or Rem Ove Vault WIZ an oes scsiisciisecccsevcocsozcecenscsnentsuvazaescetvsscersedesssnscrssusexensdenssvatcecuodiedesscisesbsrentasogessaecetseces evsersses
138. Phoenix RSM automatically configures camera settings and preserves motion detection metadata along with captured video when adding a RTSP enabled IP camera This data is then used by the Surveillance Video Manager SVM application to create histograms of detected motion For more information see Motion Detection 2015 Camera Management 217 Search Results window From the Add New Camera window click the Find Cameras button in order for the Search Results window to appear which will show a list of cameras found on the network The camera list is pulled from a pre populated list of manufacturers If your camera is not on the list select the Show all devices checkbox for any additional cameras on the network and other devices to display If your camera still does not display add it manually In the Search Results window cameras in use appear grayed out and available cameras for configuration have an asterisk in the first column Select a camera and click OK or double click the camera item for the camera information to configure IP Address Manufacturer Model WW 192 168 001 144 IQinVision 1Q732N 192 168 001 242 TRENDnet TV IP312 v Total devices 6 Show all devices Refresh ok cancel Help Add New Security Entry From the Add New Camera window click the Add New Security Entry button under the Access Permissions group box Use this window to insert a new access permissions entry These permissions
139. Pool Slot Name Media Loads Media Writes Media Errors Media Name From Pool Lifecycle Available Space Used Space Purgable Space Vault Communication Media Detail Wy Why 100 X 100 AN cf pw 0 Drive Information Media Loads Media Writes Media Errors Drive Life Cycle Media Loads Media Writes Media Errors Media Loads Media Writes Media Errors Type Status Wes MAN My 3 Media Loads Media Writes Media Errors Available Space Zz 7 THN Vault Stats Menu Items Menu Items File gt Exit Help gt Current Page Help gt Vault Stats Overview Close the application Description Open online help to the Vault Stats webpage Open online help with focus on Vault Stats 2015 Vault Management 141 Menu Items Description Help gt Contents Open the local version of online help Help gt Online Help Open the web based version of online help Help gt Online Support Open Technical Support webpage Help gt About Vault Stats Open the About Vault Stats window Vault Stats Anatomy Vault Stats displays elements to monitor such as Vault information performance communication and drive and media information The following describes each pane within the Vault Stats window Vault Configuration bar Located in the Vault Stats upper right part of the window the Configuration bar displays information ab
140. Protecting clients By default policies can be modified only by administrators A When changing rights exercise caution because services that use policy files normally run at an elevated privilege level and have access to data to which the typical user may not have rights 2015 Introduction 21 e Setting rights on media If a user does not have read access to a media then no search retrieve from media is granted If a user does not have write access to media then the user cannot ingest data to media Similar to the setting of rights most of the functionality that is set by default in Phoenix RSM can be modified to meet your unique ILM requirements Extensibility Phoenix RSM is equipped with resources to incorporate pre processing or post processing scripts into storage migration replication and purge policies It is also equipped with internal APIs to link the storage management engine to other front end or back end applications Command Lines From your suite of product applications there are application executable files and dynamic link library files dil Notice that some of the executable files have a Cl at the end of the name for example VaultAdminCl exe The Cl stand for command line If you click the Cl version application executable the application runs via a terminal This functionality is intended for advanced users to do scripting or diagnostic work within the application In addition there are services th
141. Request Request for offline media to be reloaded e Trouble Indicates a serious problem Mini Vault Stats Menu Items Menu Items Description File gt Exit Close the application Help gt Current Page Open online help to the Mini Vault Stats webpage Help gt Mim Vault Stats Open online help with focus on Mini Vault Stats Overview Help gt Contents Open the local version of online help Help gt Online Help Open the web based version of online help Help gt Online Support Open Technical Support webpage Help gt About Mini Vault Stats Open the About Mini Vault Stats window 2015 140 Phoenix RSM Vault Stats Use Vault Stats to gain a detailed perspective of individual Vault activity on the network One or multiple Vault Stats can be open at a time Vault Stats provides perspective for daily management and troubleshooting issues that may arise on the network To access Vault Stats 1 From Network Activity move the mouse pointer over a Vault symbol and right click 2 From the shortcut menu select Vault Stats a Vault Stats requires a minimum screen resolution of 1280 x 1024 Vault Name Manufacturer Device Type No Drives Active System Status Media Unit Capacity Media Units Loaded Media Technology No Drives Installed Vault Security Status Vault Activity Files per Second Mbytes per Second Media Information
142. SM create a backup copy of any data that you do not want to lose 1 Uninstall Phoenix RSM from your Windows computer just as you would any other Windows application bt e pe When uninstalling Phoenix RSM from Windows you might be asked whether to automatically close applications The following applications should be closed before continuing Locator Service Target amp Process Service Automatically close applications and attempt to restart them after setup is complete Do not close applications 4 Reboot will be required OK l Cancel s 2 Select Do not close applications A Reboot will be required 3 Reboot your computer once the Add Remove Windows Programs is finished For more information see Installation Mac Perform the following steps to install on the Apple operating system The appearance of your screens may vary slightly from those shown here depending on your Phoenix RSM version Installation is quick and easy done through an Install Wizard Each wizard dialog box includes Go Back and Continue buttons The Go Back button navigates you back to the previous dialog box except on the Welcome window and the Continue button accepts current values and advances you to the next window in the wizard The Install button appears on the last wizard window to complete the process Server Bundle for Mac 2015 Installation 33 1 Click the application executable from your installation
143. SM employs the use of policies They are the method outlined by parameters and options for managing all your digital assets effectively In Camera policies recording policies control from which cameras videos are being captured and when In Data Service policies policies control when files are moved copied and purged in the Information Repository PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom is a term used to refer to cameras which have the ability to change their view remotely through a viewer Purge The process of deleting video and files from the storage This process is managed by the Data Services Service Q Replicate The process of copying video and files from one storage area to another This process is managed by the Data Services Service Resolution Resolution refers to the horizontal and vertical size of video in pixels The larger the frame size the larger the picture or video in pixels Higher resolution is normally equated to better quality video RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol RTSP is a network control protocol to control streaming media servers for establishing media sessions between end points This product is compatible with over 1 000 camera models from over 170 network camera manufacturers 2015 ss Phoenix RSM S Server Unlike servers that require dedicated computers product servers can run on any of the computers on your network The server is composed of various components that manage several operations regi
144. The first thing to do before working with Data Services is to create a policy A policy has options to set for your data management needs and the policy you create determines how the Data Services Service component of Phoenix RSM manages data across your system 2015 298 Phoenix RSM 1 From your suite of product applications open the Data Service Policies application DataSvcPolicies exe 2 From the Data Service Policies window click the plus symbol to create a new policy Policy Name Description Policy Type Migrate Replicate Purge V Active OK cancel Heb 3 Type a Policy Name for the new policy 4 Type a Description of the new policy for quick reference 5 Select a Policy Type 6 Select the policy as active or de select the Active checkbox if you do not want the policy to run When the Active checkbox is de selected the triangular caution symbol is superimposed over the policy in the Data Service Policy window Policy Name pane 7 Click OK The window closes and the policy name description and host appear in the Policy Name pane 8 Optional Modify the parameters as needed on each Data Service Policy window tab for the policy See the subsequent sections for details 9 From the Data Service Policy window click Save kh to keep all policy settings and implement the policy Modify a Policy Use to change a policy s name description and type of policy as determined when c
145. Type DWORD value Value TTL value Keys conf Format Type Int32 in the range of 0 255 Length 4 Value TTL value Sample Usage MulticastTtl Int32 4 10 Name NotifyClearCmd Description Command to execute when clearing an error condition Used for notification Default none Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname to the batch file Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname to the batch file Sample Usage NotifyClearCmd Char 27 C MyNotificationScript bat Name NotifySetCmd 2015 Customization 383 Key Description Command to execute when clearing an error condition Used for notification Default none Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname to the batch file Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname to the batch file Sample Usage NotifySetCmd Char 27 C MyNotificationScript bat Name PictureExtList Description Specifies which files will be considered picture files and therefore processed as picture files when option is enabled in Target and Process Policies if enabled or manual Target and Process jobs if enabled Default bmp gif jpeg jpg pict pct png raw tif tiff Used by Target and Process Target and Process Policies Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings
146. Type of Purge click Active and then click OK d From the Data Service Policies window Source tab leave all the defaults 2015 Getting Started 51 Te File Size 0 Y e In the Criteria tab under Miscellaneous Options enter 80 in both the High and Low Watermark fields f In the Destination tab none of the boxes are enabled since they are not applicable to a purge type of policy When should the job run E Repeatedly at a defined interval X Every 1hour Should the job be stopped before it is completed m 2015 52 Phoenix RSM g In the Scheduling tab When should the job run box select Repeatedly at a defined interval h Adjacent to the How often should this job run box click the Clock button Type 1 in the Hours box and click OK i Click the Save button to save the policy j In the Advanced tab leave all the defaults 7 Wait for video feed to record and process After creating a camera or recording policy wait about 15 minutes to allow the system time to record a 5 minute clip process and store it and make it available for searching 8 Search for and review recorded video a From your suite of Phoenix RSM applications open Surveillance Video Manager b From the Search tab Search Criteria pane click the Search button The Search Results pane displays the video clip that was just recorded c From the Search Criteria pane you cou
147. Vault will start immediately ATAR I A restart is not required on a Mac 10 In the Completed window click Finish to exit the Add or Remove Vault Wizard Restart the computer for the new Vault activation To add another Vault or remove a Vault launch the Add or Remove Vault Wizard again A If you do not restart your computer the new Vault does not start and is not available for use 11 The next step is to prepare your media using Vault Admin See Prepare Media and Vault Admin Disable SCSI Devices ita if you are using Windows Vista or newer or Windows Server 2008 or newer you do not need to disable the use of SCSI devices Disable the use of SCSI devices in a Windows environment to ensure that Windows does not interfere with Phoenix RSM s management of SCSI tape drives and libraries Medium Changers This is done through the Windows Device Manager e This procedure only disables Windows use of the device and does not affect Phoenix RSM s use of the device e Devices that are active not disabled in Windows are not visible or used by Phoenix RSM To access the Device Manager 1 Click Start on the Windows desktop 2 Right click My Computer and select Manage from the shortcut menu The Computer Management window appears 3 In the left pane of Computer Management click Device Manager 2015 Phoenix RSM Computer Management Local i System Tools E Event Viewer 2 Shared Folders Local Users a
148. Viewer Control panel to toggle between show and hide If this Show menu bar button is not visible try pressing the ALT key Display of this item is managed in User Preferences For more information see Live Viewer Layout View Camera Pool Feeds and Camera Control PTZ and Focus Advanced users can customize how a Live Viewer opens on startup through a command line prompt For more information on arguments to use see Live Viewer Command Line Control Panels Control panels for the Live Viewer appear as a column on the right side of the Live Viewer The entire panel can be minimized for maximum live viewing or the panel can be maximized to manage your layouts cameras patrols volume and PTZ The Title bar of each control within the Control panel can be clicked to maximize or minimize viewing of the panel clicked To minimize the Control panel column move the mouse pointer over the split line and click when the pointer becomes a hand To maximize the Control panel column again do the same action only this time the split line is near the window edge Do the same action also to maximize or minimize Title bar controls within the Control panel column Camera Control Panel This Control panel is only enabled if a view frame containing a camera that supports Wiper or Day Night mode functions is selected 2015 Live Viewer 239 Wiper Options for the camera wiper to clean Duration options are 10 seconds 1 minute 15 minutes a
149. a 206 Phoenix RSM Token Value policy_name lt camera name gt pool lt character string gt ptz_enable lt boolean gt stream _over_tcp lt boolean gt thumbnail_url lt pathname gt thumbnail_enable lt boolean gt type lt character string gt user_name lt character string gt version lt number gt Description Default Must match camera_name Indicating the beginning of a camera block the name for the policy that defines camera parameters Default The name of the camera pool Default PTZ stands for pan tilt Zoom Use to set the pan tilt and zoom functionality for the camera For PTZ to work this option must be selected Valid values true false Default true Cause the RTSP capture to stream data over a TCP connection rather than over a default HTTP connection Default false The HTTP URL for producing images Default Enable the thumbnail URL Valid values true false Default false The policy type of the file Default camcfg The user name of the camera when a user name is required to access the camera Default The version number of the policy The current version is 1 0 2015 Token Value video_capture_Irp_url lt pathname gt video_capture_Irp_enable lt boolean gt video_capture_url lt url gt vms_lrp_create lt boolean gt vms_rec_mot_detect lt boolean gt vms_
150. a Control PTZ and Focus and Live Viewer Surveillance Video Manager The Surveillance Video Manager SVM is SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM search application to find stored video on a Vault It enables you to quickly and easily access search and review video from an entire library of forensic video assets 2015 252 Phoenix RSM To use your video asset management solution effectively capture your video with Camera Policies search for and retrieve stored video using the Surveillance Video Manager and then review video using the Media Viewer Along with that functionality you can view live video feeds with the Live Viewer The Live Viewer supports many camera types as it can connect and configure to any RTSP enabled IP camera and some motion detection cameras The Surveillance Video Manager can highlight the areas of the video with the most motion and action The search provisions in the Surveillance Video Manager are extensive ultra fast and precise As you search for video across your network the Surveillance Video Manager uses a low resolution companion video a fraction of the size of the original as the primary video footage received This low resolution companion file is always teamed with its original source video regardless of where the video is stored online near line or offline After searching for and retrieving video assets you can export the video to other tools and locations For more information see Introduction whe
151. a Dwell Time The dwell time is the amount of time that each layout is displayed in the viewer 4 Select a Layout Sequence by clicking the Add button at the bottom of the Create Patrol window The Select Layout window appears Layouts Available Layout_1 Layout_5 Cancel 2015 za Phoenix RSM 5 Select a layout and click OK or double click the layout The selected layout appears in the Layout Sequence box of the Create Patrol window You can add more layouts or remove a layout from the list move a layout up or down in the list by using the buttons at the bottom of the window 6 From the Patrols folder click the added patrol to activate the Patrol panel The Patrol panel controls when to Play Pause or Stop the continuous loop of the patrol The Current box displays which layout in the patrol is currently being displayed Click the Patrol panel title bar to minimize or maximize the panel Patrol Name New Patrol Current Layout_1 Stop Pause Camera Control PTZ and Focus Phoenix RSM supports all IP configurable cameras and most of the functionality of those cameras Check to ensure that you hawe the correct access Rights to control PTZ These Rights are controlled in Camera Policies If your camera supports mechanical PTZ a white target symbol displays in the Title bar of the camera feed when it is displayed in a camera view frame of the Live Viewer With all other cameras you have the option of usi
152. a a policy uses by specifying a media type For example if Hdisk is selected then only Hdisk media is used Media Type is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives From the drop down list select the media type Only media types for the parameters selected in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool drop down lists are displayed If none were selected then only the media types from media available within the Information Repository are displayed Set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both Source files run based on speed and media performance This is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives Hard disk is considered a high performance media and is assigned a high rating of S8 Slower data tape technologies are lower performance and are assigned a lower rating of S0 From the drop down list select a performance rating Only media speeds for the parameters selected in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool drop down lists are displayed If none were selected then only the media speeds from media available within the Information Repository are displayed Set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both Data Service Policies Scheduling Tab Use the Data Service Policies Scheduling tab to define when jobs are to run Jobs can be scheduled to run on a daily or weekly basis while setting only a few general parameters or jobs can b
153. a in its catalog select Only re index if needed The media unit will not be re indexed if Phoenix RSM determines that re indexing is not called for On the other hand if the catalog entries for the media are suspect or do not exist the Information Repository will attempt to re index the media to update its catalog Select Force a re index of media only if you have a reason to suspect that the catalog on the Vault or the media is incorrect 5 Click Ok The media will be reloaded and no longer have a gold bar beneath it Unload Media The Vault Admin cannot manipulate files only Data Services can but the Vault Admin keeps lists of files and media in each Vault and knows whether or not the media is online near line or offline By using Unload Media you dictate if files and media are tracked or not tracked when unloading media In most cases media is removed when it is full Removing media from a Vault can be done in two ways 2015 Vault Management 125 e Tracked and managed by the Information Repository This is known as unloading to offline status As long as media is tracked video or data files remain in the Vault Although offline files and metadata are searchable e Not tracked by the Information Repository Files are removed from the Vault and are not searchable If you do not track you can always reload files and media at a later time The process of unloading media is identical for hard disk media and data tape media
154. ab Add Entry 6 From the Media Location drop down list assign a place to store new media 7 From the When to Prepare drop down list assign a preparation time for the media 8 Click OK to prepare the media with your selections 2015 ma Phoenix RSM Prepare Media Elements Element Media Name Barcode ID Available for tape media that support barcodes Description Storage Pool Size GB Available for hard disk media Description This is the Information Repository reference name for the media The name displays on all media referencing interfaces and reports It is recommended to use a descriptive name to easily distinguish the unit of media The default name when preparing existing tape media is Tape_ B This default name can be changed wile When B is included in the media name of a tape the B will be replaced by the tape s barcode a When preparing multiple tapes B must be used in the media name to avoid duplicate naming issues This number corresponds to the barcode or a unique ID for the media If used Phoenix RSM tracks the media by its barcode oii I Barcode systems provide a significant performance increase whenever media is being loaded unloaded or indexed by the Information Repository Used on all media referencing interfaces and reports For easy identification it is recommended to incorporate the naming convention used for the Media Name in the descr
155. accessed through command line arguments An advanced user could modify these to allow for additional options to run with the services other than defaults or to perform diagnostics on the program To see a list of available options for a command line utility use lt executable name gt usage at the command line prompt 2015 Command Line Arguments 399 For more information see Vault Service and Data Services Serice Also see the Live Viewer Command Line arguments to open the Live Viewer with customized defaults Locator Admin Command Line The LocAdminCl keeps track of resources such as Vaults in the Information Repository e Access LocAdminCl from your suite of application products Command Line Options As needed append the following options to the application execution path You can enter a single option a single option and usage or version or a combination of several options and usage or version The command line is formed as follows LocAdminCl lt option gt lt option gt input_pathname lt pathname gt Contains the input list of commands e output_pathname lt pathname gt Define the path to the file containing the output results e usage List all valid parameters version Display the current version information Interactive Commands and their Arguments After starting the application you can enter the following arguments at the prompt Argument Description Set or view advanced mode se
156. ace can be used for storing temporary files 100 00 G6 v Veracity Coldstore e In the What is the IP address of the Coldstore text box the IP address of the Veracity Coldstore device The IP address must be in dot notation Click the Test button to test connectivity to the device e From the How many data streams are allowed at a time drop down list select from a range of 1 10 Data streams refers to the number of connections made to a Vault at once Several connections enables clients to communicate with the Vault simultaneously The more streams permitted requires more processing power 2015 Vault Management 67 e From the How much memory should be used for each data stream cache drop down list select between 5 10 15 or 20 MB Here you are defining how much virtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache can improve performance but at the expense of using more virtual memory The total amount of space used equals the number of data streams multiplied by the selected cache size With 10 data streams and 10 MB of cache the Vault sets aside 100 MB of total virtual memory for caching data A selection of 10 MB is usually sufficient From the Where can temporary files be stored box type a location for the working cache or select a location from the Browse for Folder window by clicking the Browse button The default location is lt install dir gt Working
157. al options for the Phoenix RSM search applications This capability is intended only for advanced users e Create an ExportExtensions cfg using any text editor and save as a plain text document Once created it needs to be added to the following path lt install dir gt Config See Create an ExportExtensions cfg example e ExportExtensions cfg is a block structured text file At the end of this section there is a sample ExportExtensions cfg You can implement the file as is at the path noted above or modify the file to meet your own criteria and then implement it ExportExtensions cfg is comprised of at least one or more ExportExtension blocks An ExportExtension block has two main sections e Command e Query Command Section of the Export Extensions Block 2015 30 Phoenix RSM The Command section of the block extends from the words ExportExtension to the command specification in the example below It includes the ExportExtension statement that defines the beginning of an ExportExtension block and includes the execute command and other tokens ExportExtension This identifies the beginning of the ExportExtension block This is the opening brace for the ExportExtension block lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Command lt S S S S 3U 3M gt This is REQUIRED statement The following block name defines the beginning of an ExportExtension block in an ExportExtensions cfg f
158. alue gt lt token gt lt value gt Gusi lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt 2015 360 Phoenix RSM This is the closing brace for the block Blocks The following are the blocks used in MetadataExtensions cfg Block Identifier IngestMdExt ModMdExt SearchMdExt Query Valid Token Values for Query Blocks Description The beginning of the metadata extensions block for Phoenix RSM ingesting and capturing applications May not contain a SearchMdExt block or ModMdExt block Required The beginning of the edit metadata metadata extension block for Phoenix RSM search and retrieve applications May not contain an IngestMdExt block or SearchMdExt block Required The beginning of the metadata extensions block for Phoenix RSM search and retrieve applications It may not contain an IngestMdExt block or ModMdExt block Required The beginning of a Query block contained within a metadata extensions block Required y one s py As illustrated in the examples below Query blocks must be contained within metadata extension blocks SearchMdExt and IngestMdExt The tokens in the table below can be used only in Query blocks Although the IngestMdExt ModMdExt and SearchMdExt blocks use the same types of Query blocks each must have its own individual Query b
159. ame If you change the preference after the camera has been added to the view frame you will have to close it change the setting again and then re add the camera to the view frame If you close the Live Viewer application your video stream delay preferences are saved and ready for your next session ae fe pe If video freezes in low light conditions set the video stream delay value to a larger value at least 700ms or greater especially on slow frame rate high definition cameras Camera Reconnect Specifies the amount of time to try to reconnect to a camera Timeout if the connection is lost Choose an increment of time between 15 seconds and 30 minutes for the timeout If Disabled is selected the Live Viewer will not attempt to reconnect to a camera Enable hardware Enable the hardware overlay capability of the video card overlay This enables the ability to render video directly If Disabled remote desktop or shared desktop viewing may not work correctly for viewing live video streams Enable multiple Enable the use of multiple threads and multiple cores for threads for decode decoding This provides faster decoding of the video If decoding is not occurring properly disabling this feature may fix the problem Manual record cache __ Specify where to store Live Viewer recordings Click the folder Browse button to navigate to the cache location using the Browse for Folder dialog box For more information see Camer
160. amera Description Limit your search to a specific camera by entering the camera s description No results are returned if a camera description is not part of the solution Show video stored Limit your search to a particular storage device Select on the device from the drop down list type the device name or use a wildcard 2015 260 Phoenix RSM Element Show video captured by this computer Show video stored on this media Show video stored in this storage pool Description Limit your search to the computer that captured the video When a computer name is entered only video stored from that computer is listed This box may contain only a portion of the computer name is case sensitive and allows Wildcards Increase the speed of your search by limiting the search to a particular unit of media Select the media from the drop down list type the media name or use a wildcard Limit your search to only a specific storage pool Select the storage pool from the drop down list type the storage pool name or use a wildcard 6 Click Add for additional search criteria Add as many search criteria blocks with as much additional criteria as you need to obtain the level of refinement you want By default only two extended search criteria are available which are the Any Metadata Field and Content option 2 Any Metadata Field contains e Any Metadata Field A global metadata search that will match any metad
161. amera button 21 If you do not want to add another camera select No To add another camera select Yes in order to cycle through the wizard again Click Next 22 If you have no more cameras to add the Ready to Save Camera Configurations and Recording Schedules window appears 2015 as Phoenix RSM i _ Ready to Save Camera Configurations and Recording Schedules Click Finish to save the following cameras Test Camera at 255 196 5 200 Always on 3 Remove selected Camera __Help aaa Ga 23 The list of cameras ready for saving is displayed To remove any camera select it and then click the Remove Selected Camera button 24 Click Finish The Add Camera Wizard closes and the focus is on the main Camera Policies application window whe eS Through configuring a camera and setting a schedule for it to record you created a new recording policy that is listed on the left side under the Recording Policy Name column of the main Camera Policies application Camera Policies Camera Policies is a critical part of your total video surveillance solution It is responsible for getting data into the Information Repository from a camera source The Camera Policies application generates a low resolution companion file that is a fraction of the size of the original This preserves the original and makes it easier for fast searches and video review later in the process Record and capture video feeds via e RTSP enab
162. anes again do the same action only this time the split line is near the window edge Export Export Job Configuration Job Status Export destinatiot Job Name Local File Sys 01 14 2014 13 15 19 Job Progress t destination Destination Local fi or network share Time 00 00 31 Local file system Status Export complete Job name 100 View Dismiss Generate checksum Watermark video Generate metadata output file to save videos pictures and other files C Temp Export When to overwrite existing files Never si How to export the selected video Create a single video for each selection X Start Export Sortby Date and Time The Surveillance Video Manager Export tab consists of two panes for exporting a job e Export Configuration Select specific parameters for video to export You can export video to a local file system a Rimage system or through FTP Each type of export has its own configuration options Select the Start Export button to begin exporting videos e Job Status Displays results as videos are exported Surveillance Video Manager Menu Items Menu Items Description File gt Export Queue Select an option from the drop down list Load from Load the Export Queue selections from a file Save as Save the Export Queue selections to a file File gt Exit Close the application 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 255 Menu Items Description View gt List Select this opti
163. are only sent to the storage pool or media selected With a selected Vault Phoenix RSM uses the most available Vault or media with the most free space 2015 190 Phoenix RSM e Select a parameter and select available parameters from remaining fields If a Vault Media Name or Storage Pool parameter is selected then remaining fields have limited options available which correspond to the parameter To reset the Destination tab with all parameters from any field select lt any gt in the Vault group vita Several units of media can be assigned to a single storage pool See Prepare Media Storage Pool e Create a new entry for a Vault Media Name or Storage Pool From the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool drop down list select lt new entry gt The Enter New Name window appears for you to type a new name Click OK and the new entry appears in the field s drop down list A This method is recommended only for special circumstances If a job is run with a Vault or media that is not actually running in the Information Repository the job fails The lt any gt item in the drop down list also acts as a divider between Vault media and storage pools implemented and those not implemented Names above lt any gt are the ones running in your Information Repository and the names below lt any gt are entered but do not yet have hardware implemented in the Information Repository These are not saved if not selected when saving
164. are sent to the Vault Lower numbers reduce the bandwidth Throttle values range from 10 to 100 of total available bandwidth e From the Throttle drop down list select a percentage to operate the client on its host computer for maximum performance Phoenix RSM is designed to operate at maximum performance of its host computer network environment and storage resources available During normal working hours running a job at peak performance could interfere with other network operations Test Run Output Use to test a job before doing it live This is useful after Results but do not creating a complex set of process parameters that include actually move files filters and other options e Select Test Run Output results but do not actually move files When the process is scheduled to run the files that match the criteria build but files are not moved Results output in a report defined in the Report Options field Include Offline Files Since all of your stored files are logged you can include offline files when processing jobs If the files are located on offline media the job requires more time as the system has to wait whenever offline media is required Include Deleted Files Process files marked as deleted in tape media e Select to set the policy to process files marked as deleted If this option is de selected the policy ignores these files On media types like magnetic tape it is not possible to remove files that ha
165. arran 2015 Vault Management 71 7 Click Next for the Notification window Use to define where e mails about Information Repository events are sent and where Phoenix RSM events should be logged e Select the Enable e mail notifications checkbox to receive an e mail when an event occurs of interest for managing a Vault The events include Vault start Vault stop media requests etc and are the same as those recorded for notifications If de selected no notifications are sent and other fields in the group box are disabled In the Who should receive e mail notifications box type the e mail address of the user receiving the Phoenix RSM event notifications In the What is the name or IP address of your mail server box type the address of your mail server Use either IP address or computer name and then click the Send Test Email to test the path If successful a dialog box displays A message had been sent and should be delivered shortly Click OK to close the dialog box Valid parameters are not tested here If parameters are invalid then the e mail notifications do not work From the Where should events be logged drop down list select one of the following for where events are logged Computer Console Events are logged in a computer monitor console It remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the console disappears If the Vault is restarted the console disappears and then reappears Window
166. arx Manually Add IP Camera For the most streamlined and efficient work flow add your RTSP enabled IP camera using the Add Camera Wizard There are times however to add an IP camera manually such as when your camera manufacturer and model cannot be found on the network Camera Policies hosts two modes Standard mode and Advanced mode When adding a camera configuration the Add New Camera window appears with Standard mode options or with extended Advanced mode options depending on which mode is enabled under the Camera Policies View menu The following are procedures that take into account both modes and any differences are noted To add a RTSP enabled IP camera manually 1 From the Camera Policies toolbar click the Cameras button to open the Camera Configurations window 2 From the Camera Configurations toolbar click the Add button Or from the Camera Configurations main menu select Edit gt Add a Camera The Add New Camera window displays differently depending on whether you are working in Standard mode or Advanced mode Standard mode image 2015 210 Phoenix RSM Camera Information Name Description Manufacturer Generic v Model Generic v Find Cameras Video Capture URL Test User Name Password Reming computer Advanced mode image 2015 Camera Management 211 Camera Information Camera Type IP camera k A Name Description Camera Pool
167. ary video captured directly from cameras Default 2015 372 Phoenix RSM Key lt Product Installation Directory gt VideoCache Used by All Phoenix RSM Extension applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname of directory Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname of directory Sample Usage CameraCacheDir Char 13 C VideoCache Name CCExtractorPathname Description Pathname of the executable used to extract closed caption data from video Default Windows lt Product Installation Directory gt Bin CCExtractor exe Non Windows lt Product Installation Directory gt Bin CCExtractor Used by Target and Process Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname of executable Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname of executable Sample Usage CCExtractorPathname Char 14 C MyExtractor Name CntMaxTermsPerDoc Description Specifies the maximum number of terms that will be scanned for content keyword generation in a single file Default 10485760 2015 Customization Key Used by Vault Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Limit in number of terms Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Limit in number of terms Sample Usage CntMaxTermsPerDoc Int32 4 5000 Name CntTextExtList Description Specifies which files will be considered text
168. as displayed in User Preferences The preferences entered in at the Processing tab override any defaults that may be set in the User Preferences window but only for the current job or policy This tab only displays if you are in Advanced mode Camera Metadata Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced Video Processing Options Process video components J Generate low resolution proxy Low resolution proxy quality Medium z Low resolution proxy frame rate Fi V Generate preview image Preview image quality Low smallest size v For more information see Camera Policy User Preferences Video Processing Options Use these options to capture video files for viewing Elect to generate low resolution companion videos also called proxy files or preview images during video capture The low resolution proxies and preview images have a relatively small file size which make it quick and easy to search for video files and clips without having to wait for the retrieval of large original video files The Process Video Components checkbox is selected by default and cannot be de selected Elements Description Generate low 1 Select to generate low resolution companion files If not resolution proxy selected the proxies are not created but you can always view the original video in the Information Repository The low resolution file is a fraction of the size of the original video size When searching for
169. ase transactions removes media from drives and performs any required cleanup activity An Extended shutdown is more time consuming than a Normal shutdown Restart Restart executes a Normal shutdown and then restarts the selected Vault Client activity stops after the running transaction completes all database transactions and performs any cleanup activity required but does not remove media from the drive Emergency Use only for emergencies The emergency shutdown behaves as if removing power from the host computer A Vault restarted after an emergency shutdown may report connection timeouts incomplete database translations and other items 4 Click OK to complete the process Vault Properties After Vault installation use Vault Properties to change Vault settings Properties to modify includes general settings security logs notifications diagnostics memory allocation for devices database optimization parameters and licensing To access Vault Properties 2015 Vault Management 87 1 Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin main window select a Vault to modify 2 From the Vault Admin toolbar click the Change Vault s Properties button to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click on the selected Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab Vaul
170. at are running all the time in the background The command line arguments that you can work with are application startup arguments for advanced users to perform diagnostics on the program For more information see Command Line Arguments Installation This topic provides information tips and how to s on installing SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM wet py Before installation make sure your computer meets minimum system requirements There are a few differences to understand between the Server Bundle and the Client Bundle The main difference between the Phoenix RSM Server Bundle and Client Bundle is that the Server Bundle includes Phoenix RSM Vaults and administrative tools You should install the Server Bundle on computers you want Vaults to reside Install the Client Bundle on computers you want only clients to run Here is a brief breakdown of each bundle Server Bundle e Does not have to run on a Server e Must be installed first on your network otherwise the Client Bundle will not function 2015 22 Phoenix RSM e Includes all of the components contained in the Client Bundle Because of this do not install the Server and Client Bundle on a single computer e Install on computers that are to have Vaults wet pe For optimal performance install the Server Bundle local to the Vaults they are to manage Client Bundle e Install just the Client Bundle on other computers on the network after you have installed the Server
171. ata field This option is always available e Content Search for a word or phrase that is contained in the file or in log entries This search uses AND boolean logic to get more specific search results whe MetadataExtensions cfg pe The available search criteria can be extended through the use of custom metadata See 7 After setting search criteria click the Search button to search through the Information Repository for files that match the criteria you have defined Results including metadata appear in the Search Results pane vite es If a thumbnail is not available a placeholder image appears as a result Unless you have selected Load images immediately when scrolling in the SVM User Preferences thumbnail images are loaded only when you stop scrolling 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 261 Search Results 8 In the Search Results pane click the information icon to the right above the thumbnail to view asset information for the video In the Asset Information window various types of information is displayed for the specific video including Filename Size Stored date Camera Name and many more Asset Information Filenam ie Axis M1011_2013_04 07_02_27_01 moyv QuickTime Movie 160 54 MB Modified 2013 04 0 7 0 Stored 2 4 07 02 2013_04 07_02 27 01 moyv CameraName Axis M1011 CameraUrl rtsp 192 168 1 166 axis media media amp FrameRate 6 19 FramesSize 640 x RunTimeSeconds 4
172. ation window select Yes The camera is deleted from your Information Repository and from the list in the Camera Configurations window 2015 200 Phoenix RSM 5 From Camera Configurations click the Save button to save the modified camera configurations a ae s pe To easily delete a camera from the Camera Configurations camera list right click a selected camera and select Delete To delete all camera configurations 1 From the Camera Policies main menu select Tools gt Cameras This opens the Camera Configurations window populated with a list of all of the cameras configured for your system 2 From the Camera Configurations main menu select Edit gt Delete All Cameras 3 If you are certain you want to delete all camera configurations from your entire Information Repository in the Confirmation window select Yes 4 From Camera Configurations click the Save button to save changes Camera Configurations Window The Camera Configuration window displays a list of the camera configurations that have been created and are available for use by recording policies The column headings displayed in Camera Configurations are Camera Name Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL Status Camera Pool Recording Computer and Description The Camera Configurations toolbar consists of the following buttons Save all configurations Add a new camera configuration See Manually Add IP Camera or Add VMS Camera
173. ault 2 In Enter Pathname type a path including the drive letter of the location to store media related files and directories For example C Archive SaturdayBackups wile When typing a path the parent folder must already exist and no other media can be loaded at that same path This path is relative to the computer where the Vault Service is running The Vault Service must have rights to add files and folders at the specified location Tape e Select Load unknown media and then from the Choose Media drop down list select the media Or e Select Load from storage slot and then from the drop down list select a storage slot Or e Select Load from mail slot and then from the drop down list select a mail slot Select a preparation time for the media Prepare media at next use Media is prepared when a job is started that requires the selected media Prepare media now Specified media is loaded into a drive and formatted immediately regardless of when a job starts Preparing existing media is exactly like preparing media as described in the above Prepare Media section with only a few differences e You can use the Prepare Media option to reformat existing media This will erase all current information stored on that media e Preparing existing media reformats media on tape and hard disk 2015 Vault Management 117 e Before reformatting media or re preparing media be sure to first
174. ault true lock vault Internal use only The policy source Valid values e native_fs obj_type lt character string gt e mse_pst e mse_msg e surv_camera Default native_fs Enable the application to constantly monitor its processes and select the network transmission protocol that best out_of band lt boolean gt suits the files being processed Valid values true false Default true The path name that is searched for files matching the options Files directories and wildcard expressions are valid This pathname lt pathname gt token value pair can be specified multiple times to include multiple paths No default Generate preview image thumbnails at capture ingest ict iew i lt boolean gt a A veces Valid values true false Default true 2015 170 Phoenix RSM pict_preview_image_ quality lt boolean gt pict_process_components lt boolean gt pict_save_preview_image lt boolean gt t pict_save_preview_image_dir_pn lt pathname gt policy_name lt policy name gt post_proc_cmd lt command gt pre_proc_cmd lt command gt process _directories lt boolean gt ref_id lt character string gt repeat_interval lt hh mm ss gt Determine the quality of the preview image Valid values High Medium Low Default Medium Capture ingest picture files so that they are readable by search applications Valid values true false De
175. be used For storing temporary files 100 00 66 w e Click Next If the tape library was not able to provide the identification for its tape drives a second device window appears From the Drives to identify group drop down lists select the drives If the device was able to identify its tape drive then the next wizard window appears 2015 e Phoenix RSM r a Device ope The chosen tape library does not support automatic detection of its tape drives The Following drives require identification Drives to identify Drive 1 lt not selected gt x Drive 2 lt not selected gt X Reset Help pran Standalone Tape Drive Vault TEK SN you are using Windows Vista or older or Windows Server 2008 or older you must first disable the device in the Windows Device Manager so Windows does not interfere with Phoenix RSM s management of the device See Disable SCSI Devices e From the Which standalone tape drive do you want to use box select a device If no devices are found make sure the tape drive is connected to your computer and powered on If you are adding a Vault to a Windows computer ensure that the device or devices are disabled in the Windows Device Manager Then click Look for Devices to refresh the list 2015 Vault Management 65 e From the How much memory should be used for each data stream cache drop down list select between 5 10 15 or 20 MB De
176. cameras View live video feeds Camera Policies Manage camera configurations and recording policies Search Applications Administrative Applications Vault Central processing unit software and storage device TAP Target and Process THM Thumbnail file LRP Low resolution com panion proxy video Information Repository The Information Repository is where data is stored Since a Vault is a storage device used to store files the Information Repository is made up of all the clients and Vaults on your network The Information Repository can take many different forms depending on your needs and system but it is flexible easy to deploy and is an active multi tiered storage environment 2015 a Phoenix RSM In the Information Repository data storage resources are virtualized as composite storage sets and operate as a federated environment They can be comprised of a mixed set of networked data storage technologies running on Windows Mac Linux and in mixed computing environments If using Network Attached Storage NAS devices then the Information Repository is all the networked units The Word about Policies Phoenix RSM employs the use of policies in most of its applications They are the method outlined by parameters and options for managing all your digital assets effectively As the user you own the benefit of creating customizing and executing these policies to fit your environment and
177. cation other than the default location the user s home directory wht py Before restoring a set of policies to a computer that currently has policies set up be sure to delete all of the current policies before importing other policies otherwise imported policies are added to current policies A Data Service Policies are incompatible with other client policies and vice versa If you try to import a Data Service policy into a non Data Service Policies client or vice versa an error message appears and no policies are added Import Policies When importing policies they are added to the policies that are already in the policy editor 1 From the application s main menu or policy editor click File gt Import from The Import from window appears 2 lf you are not importing policies from your local computer navigate to the networked computer that contains the policies that you need 3 Select the policy file that contains the policies that you want to use 4 Click Open The policies in the configuration file are implemented Export Policies 1 Create policies 2 From the application s main menu or policy editor click File gt Export to The Export to window appears 3 To save your policies with the default policy file name click Save without entering a new file name Or enter a new name In the Export to window and then click Save Import Export Policy File Structure An exported policy file is block structured but
178. cies log file summarizing information which only shows video being sent to the Vault lt policy gt err A Camera Policies log file showing any problems with sending video to a Vault lt policy gt _capture err A Camera Policies log file displaying any problems capturing video from a camera If the err files contain repeating sequences of errors at regular intervals that would indicate an on going error Otherwise the errors most likely corrected themselves Manage Services At times it may be necessary to manually start or stop SoleraTec services The following sections outline the necessary procedures to perform these tasks 2015 Manage Services 439 ae a pe Depending on the components installed on your machine i e server or client not all of these services may be available Service Name Service Description L SoleraTec Locator Service ocSvc VaultSvcl VaultSvc2 SoleraTec Vault Service VaultSvc3 VaultSvc4 TgtProcSve SoleraTec Target and Process Service SoleraTec Data Services Service DataSvcsSvc Windows Use Windows Services to Start and Stop services wet e pe You may need Windows administrator rights for performing certain tasks administrators have complete and unrestricted access to a computer or domain General information is provided by Microsoft 1 Hold the Windows Logo key and the R key to open the Run dialog box 2 Enter services msc and click OK The Services
179. ck the Save button to save the updated Data Service Policies settings vite eS If you delete a policy while a job is running the job stops as soon as it is finished processing the current file To make an active policy inactive 1 From the Data Service Policy window Policy Name pane double click the policy 2 In the Modify Selected Policy window de select the Active checkbox Import Export Data Service Policies Policy import and export functionality offered by SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM allows you to save policies restore policies and copy sets of policies from one computer to another After creating a set of policies you can export them to a policy file Then at a later time if you want to re implement the set of policies or implement them for the first time on another computer they are there for import 2015 Data Management 301 Use the import and export functionality to take a snapshot of the working policy configuration bring new computers online test different policy configurations or restore user corrupted policy configurations By default recording policies are exported to CameraPolicies cfg Data service policies are exported to DataSvcsSve cfg Although each policy editor uses only one policy set at a time multiple policy sets exported to policy files can be used Create name and use any file naming convention for policy files and be sure to keep track of where policies are exported to if it is a lo
180. click an existing security entry to change an entry click the Add button to insert a new entry click the Delete button to remove an entry or click the Up or Down arrow buttons to change the order the entries are listed in the Access Permissions group box See the Add New Security Entry section below 2015 2 4 Phoenix RSM Element Description Active Advanced mode only Determine whether the camera is active or inactive To capture video and view live feeds this checkbox must be selected If it is not selected then any policy that uses this camera will not run 4 Click OK to close the Add New Camera window 5 From the Camera Configuration window click the Save button to save the new camera configuration and add it to your Information Repository In the Camera Configuration window Milestone OnSSI or exacq is evident in the Video Capture URL column rather than RTSP Modify Target Camera window 2015 Camera Management 225 From the Add New Camera window click the Change button in the Target Camera area to open the Modify Target Camera window Use this window to fill out the server information for the Address User Name and Password In the Selected Camera section click the Refresh button to update the list of cameras associated with the server Select the camera whose video you want to capture For Milestone and OnSSI Server Information Address User Name Password Selected Camera lt n
181. cluded on the delivered digital media 2 TERMINATION 2 1 This Agreement may be terminated by Licensee at any time by destroying the Softw are together with all copies thereof This Agreement w ill also terminate automatically and w ithout notice if Licensee fails to comply with any term or condition of this Agreement Termination of this Agreement shall terminate Licensee s license to the Softw are All other terms and conditions of this Agreement shall survive termination in perpetuity 3 LICENSE GRANT 3 1 Company grants to Licensee a nonexclusive nontransferable license to use one 1 copy of the Software in object code form only on one computer and the Documentation w hich use shall be limited to Licensee s internal use The Softw are and Documentation are licensed and not sold to Licensee 3 2 Licensee may make one 1 copy of the Softw are for archival purposes Licensee may use the Documentation only in connection w ith Licensee s use of the Softw are as authorized in Section 3 1 above Licensee shall have no right to reproduce modify transfer disclose or distribute any Documentation 3 3 Licensee shall not and shall not permit any third party to a reverse engineer disassemble create derivative w orks and or modify the Softw are b except as specifically set forth below in section 3 4 assign rent lease sell transfer or sublicense the Softw are c electronically transfer or transmit the Softw are d translate t
182. computer from the client computer The client computer refers to the computer where Phoenix RSM is running e Type a path for a folder or click the Browse button to navigate to a folder Local View Network Publisher Orders folder The Network Publisher Order Files folder is on the Rimage computer This is the Phoenix RSM client computer s view of the export folder on the Rimage computer The client computer refers to the computer where Phoenix RSM is running 2015 204 Phoenix RSM Remote View Export folder Remote View Disc label User Assigned Merge fields Number of fields Save configuration for all users e Type a path for a folder or click the Browse button to navigate to a folder The view of the export folder on the Phoenix RSM client computer from the Rimage computer This is the export folder on the client computer where Phoenix RSM is running e Type a path for a folder or click the Browse button to navigate to a folder The path indicates how this folder is viewed by the Rimage system The client computer s view where Phoenix RSM is running of the path where Rimage gets the label file for the discs to be burned AN For Phoenix RSM to interact with the disc label that Rimage uses when creating discs the disc label must already be created The number of user defined fields 0 30 Use these fields to add label merge text to the label that is used for your media Every field defined here is a
183. cription Generate checksum Select to generate a checksum file for each exported video for video file The checksum or digital fingerprint is calculated using the SHA256 hash algorithm The resulting filename is the original base name with a sha256 extension Watermark video Select to apply a watermark to the exported video file When this item is selected the pane expands to show additional fields Placement Specify where the watermark should be placed in the video Select from upper left upper right lower left lower right and center Type Specify the type of watermark to be applied If Text then there are fields displayed to input the text size text color and the actual text to be used as the watermark If Bitmap then a box displays where the pathname of a watermark file can be entered or click the Browse button to browse for the watermark file vite When using QuickTime as the backend to watermark a video the preferred format for a watermark file is Portable Network Graphics png extension If you use a bitmap bmp file the watermark image will not be transparent and it will be surrounded by a white box covering up part of the video Generate metadata Generate metadata xml files for output along with video If output file selected a drop down list appears for you to select Create multiple files or Create a single file e Create multiple files The metadata file has the same name as its associated v
184. d Currently not supported Process files based on the accessed date and time Valid values e AO Absolute Old Selects files with a dtu date_time_use equal to or before the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number AN Absolute New Selects files with a dtu equal to or after the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number RO Relative Old Selects files with a dtu equal to or before the relative specified date RN Relative New Selects files with a dtu equal to or after the relative specified date e Inactive Do not use date Default Process files based on the date and time stored on the Vault Valid values e AO Absolute Old Selects files with a dtu date_time_use equal to or before the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number e AN Absolute New Selects files with a dtu equal to or after the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number 417 ns Phoenix RSM Token Value error_log lt pathname gt exclude_dir_spec lt pathname gt exclude_file_spec lt pathname gt file spec lt pattern gt hostname lt host name gt include_ offline lt boolean gt job_type lt alpha gt Description e RO Relative Old Selects files with a dtu equal to or before the relative specified date e RN Relative New Selects files with a dtu equal to or after the relative specified date e Inactive Do not use
185. d Recommended for advanced users InstallShield lt Back Cancel 7 Select the type of installation you prefer Typical is recommended Typical A complete installation See Client Bundle contents Minimal Includes everything in Typical except Help and Documentation Custom By default includes everything in Typical If you select Custom click Next for the Custom Setup window to appear To select which components are to be installed click the Help drop down icon for a list of feature options The Custom Setup window also includes the following option e Space launches the Disk Space Available window displaying the amount of disk space required to install selected features The window also highlights any volumes that do not have enough disk space to support the selected features 8 After you have made your selection select Next to review Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation IF you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Current Settings Setup Type Typical Destination Folder C Program Files User Information Name John Doe Company Doe Corp InstallShield lt Back Cancel 2015 Installation 31 9 Review the summary of installation in the Ready to Install the Program window If all the information looks correct click the Install button and the Installing Client Bundle
186. d These data tape automation systems contain robotics that move media between storage slots and the drives They range from single drive systems with a few tape slots to large systems that can accommodate over 100 drives and thousands of data tapes Stackers and changers are sequential automation systems designed to change data tapes ina sequence from 1 through x Auto loaders and libraries move media as tasked by the host system Small Computer System Interface s SCSI are used to connect devices together Single standalone Data Tape Drives This device manages a single data tape at a time without using robotics See also Installation and Product Licensing Product Licensing Get started with Phoenix RSM by purchasing a product license You can purchase a regular licensed product online or download a trial version from SoleraTec s website Product License Product licensing is based on storage capacity and the number of cameras associated to a recording computer The recording computer and server can be on the same or different boxes Each Vault within your Information Repository requires a storage license to store video and every recording computer requires a camera license to record video Licenses for your products are tied to the computer where they were activated You can move licenses between computers by requesting a new product key Optional available licensed uses include Data Service Policies Vault platform devices surveillance or
187. d a descriptive name Text used for defining the camera in menus and the configuration file This is a description of the camera Advanced mode only For the camera pool define a virtual grouping of cameras to search video from specified cameras For example suppose you have a camera pool called Doors It is comprised of all the cameras that watch over the doors of your business When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video captured from this camera pool are included There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Phoenix RSM solution may have Define the manufacturer of the camera The Video Capture URL populates automatically Click the Find Camera button for a listing of cameras found on the network See Search Results window Define the camera s model number Click the Find Camera button for a listing of cameras found on the network See Search Results window The RTSP URL of the camera for capturing video feeds From the drop down list choose rtsp In the first text box type the IP address for the selected camera The second text box populates automatically when a known camera manufacturer and model are selected Click the Test button to test the RTSP URL If the test is successful a Live View window appears A successful connection should take no more than 10 seconds If the test fails try the following 2015 Camera Management 213 Elemen
188. d by Phoenix RSM to find and use storage resources that may be available across multiple storage devices E Encoder A device which takes the video signal created by an analog camera and converts it to a digital format as created by newer digital cameras It is most often seen when using older cameras in newer digital systems F Forensics The process of reviewing recorded surveillance video to determine what happened in the past Phoenix RSM is a forensic video system Frames per second FPS Frames per second is an expression of frame rate Surveillance cameras record anywhere from less than 1 FPS to greater than 30 FPS For the best chance of conviction based on video evidence in a court of law chain of custody procedures require 30 FPS The higher the frame rate the smoother the video looks G H H264 A term used to describe the format of digital video H264 is commonly used by digital surveillance cameras Header In data storage a header is an area on media where the parameters assigned during preparation of the media are stored The information contained in the header includes access control lists ACL storage pool information media size type etc Histogram Statistically a histogram visually shows the distribution of data Host The computer where files originate or where the policy resides I Information Lifecycle Management ILM The policies processes practices and tools used to align the business va
189. d mode features are noted as such Element Description Camera The Camera drop down list displays all configured RTSP and VMS managed cameras e Select a camera to be used for the policy The available camera options following depend on the camera selected To add and configure a camera for use with multiple policies see add IP camera standard 2015 Element Camera Type Name Description Camera Pool Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL User Name Password Alternative Frame Size 184 Phoenix RSM Description Advanced mode only The camera types can be an IP camera a VMS managed type of either Milestone managed camera OnSSI managed camera or exacq managed camera A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file This is the name of the camera The name entered is for identification purposes only It is best to use a naming convention and a descriptive name A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file This is a description of the camera Advanced mode only A camera pool is a user defined virtual grouping of cameras to search video from specified cameras For example suppose you have a camera pool called Doors It is comprised of all the cameras that watch over the doors of your business When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video captured from this camera pool are included Th
190. dd a new media name The system automatically looks for any storage pools comprised of the selected media If it cannot find any then the Storage Pool drop down list displays lt any gt Storage Pool Storage pools are groupings of media on a single policy used for a particular purpose For example if you had a policy called Night backup and it wrote to several units of media you would use a Night backup storage pool and assign to it every unit of media to use for that purpose For more information see Prepare Media Storage Pool From the drop down list select a storage pool or select lt new entry gt to add a new storage pool name Media Type Determine the types of media a policy uses by specifying a media type For example if Hdisk is selected then only Hdisk media is used Media Type is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives 2015 316 Phoenix RSM Element Description From the drop down list select the media type Only media types for the parameters selected in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool drop down lists are displayed If none were selected then only the media types from media available within the Information Repository are displayed Set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both Media Speed Source files run based on speed and media performance This is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives
191. dded to the Export Job Configuration pane where you can define the contents of each field wie gt SN you type a number manually you must press TAB or ENTER for the new number to take effect a Ensure that the fields entered match the fields on the disc label that Rimage uses If the fields do not match disc labels do not print correctly Select to keep the same values for all logged in users who use Phoenix RSM on the current computer When done with the settings click Save The Rimage option is activated in the Export Job Configuration pane under Export Destination To export to Rimage make sure the required Rimage system folders are in place and system permissions are set correctly As illustrated in the diagram below when an Export job is executed Phoenix RSM sends data to the Export folder on the local system and an Order file to the Network Publisher Order Files folder on the Rimage computer Rimage takes care of the rest In the diagram the label file resides on the Rimage computer but it can easily reside on any networked computer that Rimage has access and security permissions to 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 205 Sends Order File to Rimage ww Sends data to local Export Folder Rimage pulls data from Export Folder Network Publisher Order Files Folder Client Computer Export Folder Label File Folder Access and Permissions Settings To enable Rimage Export
192. default location or Media is located at pathname Know that Phoenix RSM always looks for the media at the default location 6 If you select Media is located at pathname type the directory path for the media being loaded in the Enter Pathname text box 7 From the Force Re Index drop down list use the default setting Only re index if needed Phoenix RSM indexes the media if necessary but you can force re indexing to ensure that your media is re indexed by selecting Force a re Index of media 8 Click OK to complete the process and new media appears in the media list Load Tape Media Load media to existing Vaults only If you have not added Vaults yet do so now using the Add or Remove Vault Wizard 1 Ensure that there is a new media in the storage device How to do this varies depending on the hardware being used Refer to the hardware documentation for assistance 2 From the Vault Admin left pane click the expand indicator plus sign in front of the Vault to load media to 3 Click on the expand indicator for Media to have a tree of the media names displayed and also to have a list of the media names displayed in the right pane 4 Select desired media individual or multiple then click on the Load Media button in the toolbar Or right click on the selected media and choose Load Media from the shortcut menu The Load Media window opens 2015 Vault Management 123 wht e pe You can load multiple tape media by holding
193. digital fingerprint is assigned to all data captured or ingested into the Information Repository This option is always selected and cannot be changed for hard disk and tape Vaults Owner A read only box naming the owner of the media The media owner value is from the Vault s host computer and the login used Additional Permissions Permissions or rights are the limitations set for users and determine how users are permitted to manipulate files Each piece of media can have up to sixteen different permission levels The permissions information entered creates an access control list for the media For new media all users on the network are granted rights to use media by default To restrict access to media for specific users or groups the default rights must be deleted and then the new limited rights need to be added To add new permissions change existing permissions or delete existing permissions and for more information see Vault Properties Security tab Media Location Options differ depending on if you are preparing a hard disk or tape media Hard Disk e Leave the default location Store media at default location This location is set when the Vault is first added and can be changed using the Vault Properties Device tab for the Vault 2015 ne Phoenix RSM Element When to Prepare Prepare Existing Media Description 1 Select Store media at pathname to store media at a location other than the def
194. disc or installation folder 000 Install Server Bundle Welcome to the Server Bundle Installer Introduction You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software Destination Sele Installation Installations 2 Select Continue for the Select a Destination window 000 Install Server Bundle Select a Destination Select the volume where you want to install the Server Bundle software a a Macintosh HD Storage 273 GB available 470 GB available 297 GB total 931 GB total Introduction Destination Se Installatio Installations z C Go Back Continue 3 Accept the default destination for Phoenix RSM to be installed to 4 Select Continue for the Installation Type window 2015 34 Phoenix RSM 000 Install Server Bundle Standard Install on Macintosh HD Introduction Destination Sel This will take 120 MB of space on your computer Click Install to perform a standard installation of Installatio this software on the volume Macintosh HD Installati n Change Install Location GoBack install 5 Click the Install button the product installs 6 When the installation is complete restart your computer Client Bundle for Mac 1 Click the application executable from your installation
195. disc or installation folder O00 Install Client Bundle Welcome to the Client Bundle Installer Introduction You will be guided through the steps necessary to install this software Destination Sele Installatior Installation CO a Waa 2 Select Continue If you have multiple hard drives installed the Select Destination window appears Otherwise skip to the Installation Type window 2015 Installation 35 Install Client Bundle Select a Destination Select the volume where you want to install the Client Bundle software amp Macintosh HD Storage 273 GB available 470 GB available 297 GB total 931 GB total Introduction Destination Sel Installatio Installati n Tinsel this software requires 94 0 MB of space You have chosen to install this software on the volume Macintosh HD 3 Accept the default destination for Phoenix RSM to be installed to 4 Select Continue for the Installation Type window A000 Install Client Bundle Standard Install on Macintosh HD Introduction Destination Sel This will take 94 0 MB of space on your computer Installatio Click Install to perform a standard installation of Installation this software on the volume Macintosh HD Change Install Location 5 Click the Install button the produc
196. dle __ Display hide the right hand bottom corner resize handle Enable tool tips Tool tips display on screen if this is selected De select to turn tool tips off Enable advanced user A check mark by this element allows the shortcut menu to mode display from the Live Viewer when you right click the Title bar The advanced mode shortcut menu features camera related options if the camera has the available functionality Tench sere en Mendy Select the Show menu bar button EI to display or hide the main menu bar Enabled if the Auto hide menu bar and Touch screen friendly checkboxes are selected If this button is not visible and you do not see the main menu bar try pressing the ALT key Patrol Panel Select from panel options Enabled the panel is available Disabled the panel is not displayed inside the side Control panel Enabled open when needed the panel is available and the functions are available when a view frame is selected The panel is then maximized Volume Panel Select from panel options Enabled the panel is available Disabled the panel is not displayed inside the side Control panel 2015 250 Phoenix RSM Element PTZ Panel Camera Control Panel Preferred viewer Video Stream Delay Description Enabled open when needed the panel is available and the functions are available when a view frame is selected The panel is then maximized Select from panel options Enabled the
197. e URL manually Click the Test button to test the RTSP URL If the test is successful a Live View window appears A successful connection should take no more than 10 seconds If the test fails see the Video Capture URL element above for troubleshooting ideas If the camera is not listed and you are unsure of your camera s RTSP URL check with the camera s manufacturer Management URL Advanced mode only Enables camera management from a Web browser when this type of functionality is supported by the camera From the drop down list choose either http or https e With this checkbox selected the boxes to the right are for the HTTP or HTTPS URL of the camera that enables you to manage your camera This is an HTTP or HTTPS address provided by the manufacturer Click the Test button to test the URL If the test fails ensure you have entered the correct URL and that your camera and camera manufacturer support online camera management 2015 Camera Management 215 Element Description User Name Type a User Name if the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed This box works in conjunction with Password Password Type a Password if the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed This box works in conjunction with User Name Alternative Frame Advanced mode only Size The width and height in pixels of video images Use to define a frame size that is different from the camera s default The
198. e such as a VCR It is similar to the yellow RCA BNC cable that older television sets use to connect to a VCR Analytics A technology used to analyze video for specific data behavior objects or attitude It can be used to automate alarms and make searching through video easier Automatic fail over If there is more than one Vault available clients can divide their use of the available Vaults Clients fail over from the current Vault in use to another Vault should the current Vault fail B Cc Camera Policies A policy is a set of rules which define how to record video from cameras Camera Pool A camera pool is a user defined virtual grouping of cameras used to search video from specified cameras For example suppose you have a camera pool called Doors It is comprised of all the cameras that watch over the doors of your business When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video captured from this camera pool are included There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Phoenix RSM solution may have 2015 42 Phoenix RSM Channel The name traditionally used to describe the connection between a camera and the recorder CIF CIF refers to the size of the video in pixels CIF is a video image 352x288 Other common sizes include QCIF 176x144 4CIF 704x480 and 16CIF 1408x1152 Client Clients provide interfaces for system administrators and end users
199. e AXIS network camera configuration For more information about the AXIS network camera configuration web interface see your specific AXS camera documentation AXIS camera motion detection configuration 1 Open your AXIS camera management web interface AXIS a AXIS 210 Network Camera Live View Setup Help rire Basic Configuration Basic Configuration Instructions Before using the AXIS 210 Network Camera there are certain settings that should be 1 Users made most of which require Administrator access privileges To quickly access these 2 TCP IP settings use the numbered shortcuts to the left All the settings are also available 3 Date amp Time from the standard setup links in the menu Video 2 4 Video amp Image Note that the only required setting is the IP address which is set on the TCP IP page All other settings are optional Please see the online help for more information gt Video amp Image i 7 a Firmware version 4 40 gt Live View Config MAC address 00 40 9C 7F BB 76 gt Event Configuration gt System Options Language About Modify video image compression 2015 228 Phoenix RSM Phoenix RSM does not modify the default AXIS image compression parameter To maximize performance and minimize loss of image quality you may want to modify this value manually 2 Select Video amp Image The Image Settings page appears AXIS a AXIS 211 Network Camera Live View Setu
200. e Media from the shortcut menu When to Erase Erase media at next use 7 O Hep 5 From the When to Erase drop down list select an option Erase media at next use The media is erased just prior to the next time it is used in a job Erase media now The media is loaded into a drive and erased immediately 2015 Vault Management 129 6 Click the OK button to activate your selection Start Vaults Manually When managing an Information Repository there may be times when Vaults do not start automatically so you need to start them manually Vault Service is used to start a vault manually See Manage Services for information on manually controlling Vault Service Vault Details All the active Vaults within the Information Repository are displayed under Entire Network in the left pane of the Vault Admin window e Click the expand indicator plus sign in front of a Vault to view the sub items associated with the Vault and to activate toolbar buttons Certain icons in the toolbar are only active when a Vault Media or Drive is selected The following are details to view Information Current Clients E Volumes displayed only in advanced mode from the Vault Admin main menu click View gt Enable Advanced a Media depending on media type displayed information varies 3 Drives depending on media type displayed information varies Information From the Vault Admin left pane s
201. e Old Select files with a dtu date_time_use equal to or before the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number dt_stored lt alpha gt lt yyyy gt lt mm gt AN Absolute New Select files with a dtu T j lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt equal to or after the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number RO Relative Old Select files with a dtu equal to or before the relative specified date RN Relative New Select files with a dtu equal to or after the relative specified date e Inactive Do not use date Default erase_media_if unref lt boolean gt Erase the media when all the files on the media are marked for deletion Valid values true false Default false The path for the error log file If you specify dew tty error messages display on the default output error_log lt pathname gt device Supports token substitution Default path for the configuration file R Logs P err Omit directories Accept multiple instances exclude_dir_ spec lt pathname gt Default no directories excluded Omit files Accept multiple instances exclude_file_ spec lt pathname gt Default no files excluded 2015 306 Phoenix RSM Token Value file spec lt pattern gt hostname lt host name gt include_offline lt boolean gt job_type lt alpha gt list_pn lt pathname gt max file size lt number gt
202. e SoleraTec Phoenix e Linux A file at etc SoleraTec Keys conf is created when it is installed e Mac A file at Applications SoleraTec Keys conf is created when it is installed 2015 Customization 371 Keys conf File Format Linux and Mac Only e One key per line e Line is terminated by a new line character lt NEWLINE gt or end of file lt EOF gt e Fields in line are delimited by lt TAB gt or lt SPACE gt Keys conf Line Format lt Name gt lt TAB gt lt Type gt lt TAB gt lt Length gt lt TAB gt lt Value gt n EOF e lt Name gt is limited to 1024 characters e lt Type gt As specified in table below e lt Length gt As specified in table below e lt Value gt format depends on the type of data e Char The value is read as a character string e Int32 The value is read as a 32 bit signed integer e Binary The value is read as a series of bytes with each byte represented by a hex pair with a single space between each byte Keys conf Line Format Examples e key_name_1 lt TAB gt Char lt TAB gt 18 lt TAB gt this is a char key lt NEWLINE gt e key_name_2 lt SPACE gt Int32 lt SPACE gt 4 lt SPACE gt 1234 lt NEWLINE gt e key_name_4 lt TAB gt Binary lt TAB gt 14 lt TAB gt 1a 2e f1 20 9d lt EOF gt Keys vite py By default only the InstallRoot key is included when Phoenix RSM is installed Key Name CameraCacheDir Description Specifies a location where Phoenix RSM applications may store tempor
203. e Vault on One equipped with enough processor power memory and disk Computer space to accommodate the needs of the storage Vaults This type of configuration is common in smaller environments where a disk based and a tape based Vault are both configured on a single computer s Saf s py Configure multiple Vaults on a single network computer but for optimal performance it is recommended that Vaults reside on computers other than those where Camera policies and the Surveillance Video Manager are implemented Starting or Restarting If added Vaults are not visible by the Information Repository Vaults Manually you may have to start them manually See Start Vaults Manually Security Rights When adding a Vault it is accessible to all users To change Vault rights see Vault Properties Security tab Workflow Add Vaults Work through the following steps to add Vaults to your Information Repository 1 Add Vaults using the wizard 2 Reboot the computer with added Vaults 3 Prepare media using Vault Admin 2015 s Phoenix RSM Add or Remove Vault Wizard Use the Phoenix RSM Add or Remove Vault Wizard to add or remove a hard disk Vault shadow hard disk Vault standalone tape Vault or tape library Vault Unless you are an advanced user and have clearly defined reasons for changing the default values it is best to use default values leaving advanced user mode de selected Most settings can be modified after the fact u
204. e a security software blocking multicast Enable our multicast address 224 0 23 160 enable traffic and check your firewall Check that local firewall is not blocking any applications If the desktop computer has multiple network devices try disabling them and reboot Try using a static IP address on the desktop computer Check if application is being blocked by Windows UAC If running Vmware disable Vmware network connections Restart the NAS My Vault keeps e Restart the NAS stopping Check that the Vault license is current after Vault is seen My Vaults are filling e Watermarks are not set up properly up In Data Services Policies on the Criteria tab there are options to order the type of media like data tape or optical or purge dispensable data My Vault does not see e Check the data tape drive and data tape library my data tape drive or configurations for your computer the Add and Remove data tape library Vault wizard will not be able to communicate with the device Check for connection using the device manager for your operating system Disable the SCSI connection Disabling does not affect the software s use of the device Camera Issues Issue Possible Causes My camera connection e Live View must be checked in Camera Configurations to fails allow access by Live Viewer Check that the camera is powered and configured 2015 430 Phoenix RSM Issue cannot li
205. e criteria e atime access time e mtime modified time Default mtime The policy type of the policy file Default tap Update the job run record lt install dir gt JobHistory run_record trr whenever a level job runs Valid values true false Default true The number of files F or number of bytes S to ingest per single Vault connection Valid values e F files e S bytes e 1 0 Default F500 The version number of the policy The current version is 1 0 2 Extract closed captioning data from a video at ingest Valid values true false Default true 2015 2015 vid_gen_low_res_proxy lt boolean gt vid_gen_preview_image lt boolean gt vid_low_res_proxy_fr_ denom lt integer gt vid_low_res_proxy_quality lt setting gt vid_preview_image quality lt setting gt vid_process_components lt boolean gt vid_save_closed_caption lt boolean gt vid_save_closed_caption_dir_ pn lt pathname gt Camera Management Generate low resolution proxy videos at capture ingest Valid values true false Default true Generate preview image thumbnails at capture ingest Valid values true false Default true The frame rate at which the LRP will be generated Default 1 Determine the quality of the low resolution proxy video Valid values High Medium Low Default Medium Determine the quality of the p
206. e files The Vault drives the storage device and provides memory resources for program execution metadata management and continuous monitoring From your suite of product applications open the Network Activity application NetActivity exe From Network Activity access Mini Vault Stats to see high level Vault activity information Or access Vault Stats to view detailed vault activity information Every client and Vault in the Information Repository is represented by a sphere and a label in the Network Activity window Clients appear when jobs are running and the activity is denoted by dynamic lines connecting clients and Vaults As a job is running move the mouse pointer over the client symbol to view Job User and Status details If you need to freeze the current display of Network Activity right click and hold the application s Title bar Network Activity hautespot f A LAPD_Ha dDisk TS_Arm Lady HardDisk Dash_HardDisk StarGazer_HardDisk 2015 Vault Management 137 Network Activity Menu Items Menu Items File gt Exit Advanced gt Update Fast Advanced gt Force Vault Lookup Advanced gt Vault Expire Fast Advanced gt Client Expire Fast Help gt Current Page Help gt Network Activity Overview Help gt Contents Help gt Online Help Help gt technical Support Help gt About Network Activity Description Close the application Increase the Network Activity scr
207. e hardware where a Vault resides eg Open Change Vault Properties Define Vaults devices databases licensing diagnostics notifications logs and security settings for Vaults Open Vault Checkup Run a Vault checkup to check the general health of a Vault Open the Load Media dialog box Bring previously prepared media back online D Open the Prepare Media dialog box Prepare new or previously used media amp Open the Unload Media dialog box Media can be removed from the Information Repository or labeled as offline and be tracked by the Information Repository NS Open the Erase Media dialog box Remove all data from a unit of media without reformatting the media m J Refresh the view of the currently displayed data update the information in the Vault Admin 2015 82 Phoenix RSM File View Actions Options Help Hea O Skicecels P Entire Network E Office_Disk Information a Current Clients E Media EH Drives Office_Tape Vault Name Type Status Secured Media Ei Office_Disk HardDisk OK Yes 7 Fe Office Tape SingleTape OK Yes 6 vV pe When performing Vault and media operations the software may appear as if it is not responding When the given task is completed it responds normally Users that have unlimited rights and access to Vault resources are UNIX root Windows local group administrators and Windows backup operators Vault Admin Me
208. e media which overwrites erased files When you erase data tape media there is a delay in the actual event until just before the media is re used This ensures easy management of many units of media without having to wait for long delays associated with loading and positioning of media If you do not want a delay you can override the delay and execute the erase immediately Workflow Basic Vault Steps 1 From your suite of product applications open the Add or Remove Vault Wizard application AddRemVItWzrd exe For further explanation of how to launch applications using different operating systems see Getting Started 2 You ll need to add a Vault before you do anything Once added it is up and running automatically 3 Media is used to store your files or video Designate your media type and a place to which to store your media See Prepare Media 4 After your media is prepared then you ll need to load your media See Load Media 5 Vault parameters can be viewed and edited through the Vault Properties Or Vault activity can be monitored using Network Activity 6 Vaults can be removed or shut down at any time See Remove Vaults and Vault Shutdown or Restart Add Vaults After your Phoenix RSM clients are installed and configured add Vaults using the Add or Remove Vault Wizard Use the Add or Remove Vault Wizard before or in conjunction with the Vault Admin but in order to administrate a Vault a Vault must be added first Wh
209. e or inactive Valid values true false Default true The directory that contains the log retry and history files Supports token substitution Default path lt install dir gt JobHistory Allows any user to retrieve a file in the job regardless of the initial read access Valid values true false Default false Internal use only Internal use only 2015 Camera Management 165 Print all summary information plus the path names of the files ingested to the file indicated by the list_pn option complete lt boolean gt Valid values true false Default false compress Internal use only Create job history files for each job create_job_history lt boolean gt Valid values true false Default false The maximum number of concurrent files data_paths lt number gt that can be sent Default 1 A description of the policy description lt character string gt Default blank Print diagnostic information to the file indicated by the list_pn option diag lt boolean gt ne PERRA Valid values true false Default false Directories to include Multiple dir_spec options can be specified The dir_spec check is made for every directory found dir_spec lt pathname gt This includes the directories contained in the path name list that the job traverses Default any Cause job to search for but not store targeted files List the files that w
210. e scheduled using exact dates and times with specific parameters set A scheduled job is implemented as soon as the Data Service Policy is saved assuming all other parameters are acceptable Scheduling a Job The Scheduling tab displays different fields to populate depending on the parameter set for the When should the job run option 2015 Data Management 323 From the When should the job run drop down list select one of the options to schedule a process Each are described below e Option 1 On selected days each week e Option 2 Repeatedly at a defined interval e Option 3 On specific dates amp times On selected days each week Use this option to schedule jobs to run on particular days at specific times When this option is selected the Scheduling tab displays as follows Source Criteria Destination Scheduling advanced When should the job run On selected days each week On what days of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday At what time of the day 6 00 AM Should the job be stopped before itis completed No x L 1 Next to the On what days of the week text box click the Calendar button to open the Days window Set the days of the week to run the job 2 Next to the At what time of the day text box click the Clock button to open the Time window Set the time for the job to start running 2015 32 Phoen
211. e the recording policy is created if you select it from the Camera Policies left pane its associated information populates the tabs A To be able to view and record live video feeds make sure that RTSP is enabled on your IP camera See your camera s documentation for details on enabling RTSP The Camera tab displays differently depending on whether you are working in Standard mode or Advanced mode When Advanced mode is enabled more options are available on the Camera tab Standard mode image 2015 182 Phoenix RSM Name Basler_13000N Description Manufacturer Basler Model BIP 1300c dn video Capture URL Irtsp 192 168 5 100 mpeg4 User Name Password Recording Computer lt not selected gt Advanced mode image 2015 Camera Management 183 Camera Metadata Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced Camera Information Es Camera Axis 211 Rear Deck Active Z IP camera Axis 211 Rear Deck lt none gt AXIS Model 211 rtsp 192 168 1 229 mpeg4 media amp ser Name root Password password 0 0 cn e ed F no Recording Computer lt not selected gt Video Recording Options Cp iraton Cache Folder Default Location x lt default location gt Camera Policies Camera Tab Elements This table includes both Standard and Advanced mode descriptions Any Advance
212. e time stamped and indicate the name of the Vault Not using advanced mode only displays one generic notification regardless of multiple events Check mark by this menu item indicates that tool tips for the window display The tips are brief descriptions of window controls that are displayed if the mouse pointer is moved over a control De select to turn tool tips off Refresh the view of system information Open Vault Stats for monitoring detailed Vault activity Open Mini Vault Stats for monitoring basic Vault activity Open the Vault Security dialog box To secure a Vault means to lock it so no further media can be added to it Open the Shut Down Vault dialog box for assigning a Vault offline Take Vaults offline before performing any type of maintenance to the hardware where a Vault resides Open Change Vault Properties Define Vaults devices databases licensing diagnostics notifications logs and security settings for Vaults Open Vault Checkup Run a Vault checkup to check the general health of a Vault Open the Load Media dialog box Bring previously prepared media back online Open the Prepare Media dialog box Prepare new or previously used media e Phoenix RSM Menu Items Actions gt Unload Media Actions gt Erase Media Options gt Address Format Options gt Communications Timeout Help gt Current Page Help gt Vault Admin Overview Description Open the Unload Media dialog b
213. eady set For instance a single storage pool may only contain a few media types to choose from 2015 Data Management 315 e Create a new entry for Vault Media Name or Storage Pool Select from the drop down list lt new entry gt A window appears to type a new name Click OK and the new entry appears in the drop down list This new name is a placeholder A Vault cannot be used until it has been added using the Add and Remove Vault Wizard and the media and storage pool have to be configured using the Vault Admin s Prepare Media window If you try to run a job without configuration the job will fail Drop down list names above lt any gt are running in the Information Repository The names below lt any gt have not yet been configured x ae a pe To reset the Source tab select lt any gt from the Vault drop down list Data Service Policy Source Tab Elements Element Description Vault From the drop down list select a Vault or select lt new entry gt to add a new Vault name If a Vault is selected the Media Name drop down is automatically populated with the media on the given Vault If a new entry is given then the Media Name and Storage Pool options are limited to lt any gt or lt unnamed gt and lt new entry gt Media Name Media Name refers to the names of individual units of media in the Vaults within the Information Repository From the drop down list select the media or select lt new entry gt to a
214. eater than 1 Sample Usage LfrMaxNumFiles Int32 4 2 Name LfrCheckIntervalSec Description Specifies the check interval in seconds for log file rotation a Setting a value that is less than the default value could result in slower system operation Default 3600 1 hour Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Interval in seconds greater than zero Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Interval in seconds greater than zero 379 380 Phoenix RSM Key Sample Usage LfrCheckIntervalSec Int32 4 3600 Name LocSvcPriority Description Set process priority of LocSw Default standard Used by LocSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type String Value Value low standard high Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value low standard high Sample Usage LocSvwPriority Char 4 high Name MediaPlayerDefaultV olume Description Specifies the initial volume setting when playing video Default 50 Used by Video Content Manager Surveillance Video Manager Live Viewer Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Volume greater than zero Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Volume greater than zero Sample Usage MediaPlayerDefaultVolume Int32 4 50 Name MulticastAddress Description Specifies the multicast address used when various components communicate 2015 Customization 381
215. ed In the screenshots below the first displays disk media options for media being prepared for hard disk The second image displays tape media options for media being prepared for data tape 2015 Phoenix RSM Storage Pool lt unnamed gt v Size GB Content Searching Digital Fingerprinting Enable J Enable Rights Type Full Control Everyone Everyone DERE Media Location When to Prepare Store media in default location v Enter Pathname lt Storing in default location gt ox JC cme re 2015 Vault Management 113 General Information Media Name Tape_ B Barcode ID Description Storage Pool lt unnamed gt v Content Searching Digital Fingerprinting V Enable Enable Security Owner Domain Users ESC Rights Name Type amp Full Control Everyone Everyone CETESIES Media Location When to Prepare Load unknown media 7 Prepare media at next use 7 Choose Media 5 cme Hp 4 Enter values into the Prepare Media window fields Only Media Name and Size only hard disk are required The information entered for Media Name and Storage Pool appear in the Data Service Policy Source tab and in the Destination tabs of Camera Policies and Data Service Policies 5 In the Additional Permissions box optionally assign rights to a user group domain or everyone For more information see Vault Properties Security t
216. ed information quickly in large logs this becomes more difficult Range 25 MB 1 GB Either select Overwrite existing log or Create a new log Overriting the activity log prevents activity log build up Define where error logs are stored Where activity logs record all activity error logs record only events that have gone wrong Error logs are created only when a Vault encounters a problem Error logs include warnings and Vault start and stop information Phoenix RSM supports error logging for every Vault in the Information Repository and error logging is always enabled Vault Properties Notifications Tab Use the Notifications tab to set how Phoenix RSM event notifications are published by enabling and defining e mail Events include anything of interest for managing a Vault including Vault start Vault stop media requests etc Access this from Vault Properties by clicking the Notifications tab 2015 Vault Management 105 Enable email notifications Email recipient Event Logging Where events are sent Computer Console v Computer Console 1 Select preferred Vault values 2 Click OK to save new settings Notifications Tab Elements Element Description Enable e mail notification oe Enable optional e mail notifications and boxes from this Vault Properties tab 2015 106 Phoenix RSM Element E mail recipient Mail server address Where events are sent
217. ed to indicate the selected policies have different Active Settings Policy Information E Active x Cancel hep Camera Policies Menu Items Menu Items File gt Save All File gt Import from File gt Export to File gt Exit Edit gt Create a Policy Edit gt Modify Selected Policy Edit gt Delete Selected Policy Edit gt Delete All Policies View gt Refresh Policy View Description Save the information for all the current policies Open an Import from dialog box to navigate to and select a camera configurations file Open an Export to dialog box to navigate to and select where to save the active camera configurations file Close the application If changes have been made a Confirmation dialog box appears for saving changes click Yes No or Cancel Open Create a Policy window Select a policy listed in the left pane then select this menu item to modify the existing policy Select a policy listed in the left pane then select this menu item to remove the policy from Camera Policies Delete all the policies from the configuration file and removes policies listed in the left pane Refresh the view in the left pane for the latest list of policies 2015 2015 Menu Items View gt Enable Tool Tips View gt Enable Policy Tips View gt Enable Advanced Mode Tools gt User Preferences Tools gt Cameras Tools gt Find Cameras Camera Managem
218. edFeaturesEnable Int32 4 1 Name SarNoDelFilesInSearch Description When set to 1 for either host or user it will not allow the user to make the choice to include deleted files in their searches Default 0 disabled Used by Search and Retrieve Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value 0 disabled or 1 enabled Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value 0 disabled or 1 enabled Sample Usage SarNoDelFilesInSearch Int32 4 1 Name SarPurgeFeatureEnable Description When set to 1 for either host or user it will allow the user to use the Purge functionality in Search and Retrieve Default 0 disabled Used by Search and Retrieve Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value 2015 Customization 387 Key Value 0 disabled or 1 enabled Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value 0 disabled or 1 enabled Sample Usage SarPurgeFeatureEnable Int32 4 1 Name TapeFsGetintSec Description Interval in seconds at which a tape drive is queried for remaining free space on the current tape Minimum is 2 seconds Default 10 Used by VaultSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Interval in seconds greater than or equal to 2 Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Interval in seconds greater than or equal to 2 Sample Usage TapeFsGetintSec Int32 4 10 Name TapeMinBlockSizeKB Description Sets the minimum block size for data written to
219. eed parameters This tab only displays if you are in Advanced mode Camera Metadata Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced vault lt any gt nA Media Name lt any gt bd Storage Pool lt any gt X Media Type Media Speed lt any gt v lt any gt v Miscellaneous Options Keep files grouped together on the same media V Store on local vaults only Only the default names of lt any gt lt unnamed gt lt new entry gt or implemented names of Vaults storage pools media media types and media speeds already in the Information Repository appear in the Destination tab drop down lists New names with associated parameters appear also once added You can enter names of new Vaults media or storage pools to the Information Repository before actually adding them the names will appear beneath lt any gt in the given field However it is recommended to select only media that appears in the drop down list otherwise you may increase chances of error There are several options for populating the Destination tab fields e Leave the default values lt any gt Phoenix RSM determines the most accessible Vault and the media with the most free space e Select a parameter and let Phoenix RSM take care of the rest For example if the Media Speed of S8 is selected then only media running at the speed associated with S8 writes Or if Storage Pool or Media Name is selected then files
220. een made to the Vault since its latest startup cycle Total RPC Calls Out The number of remote procedural calls made by the Vault since its latest startup cycle Total RPC Packets In The number of network packets that have been received by the Vault since its latest startup cycle Total RPC Packets Out The number of network packets that have been sent by the Vault since its latest startup cycle Total Storage Slots Storage slots are areas where media is stored in the Vault s storage when it is not in a media drive With data tape and other physical media based storage devices the total storage slots number is fixed by the storage device In hard disk Vaults the number is usually mapped to the number of virtual media units set up in the Vault Total Volumes The number of volumes on media being tracked and managed by the Vault It includes all online and offline media tracked Total Volumes Offline Includes volumes on formatted media outside the Vault s storage tracked by the Information Repository Total Volumes Online Includes volumes on formatted media within the Vault s storage tracked by the Information Repository 2015 132 Phoenix RSM Type The storage device technology the Vault uses Current Clients From the Vault Admin left pane selecting Current Clients displays details in the Vault Admin right pane about computers on which the Information Repository is currently working A good way to watch for activity is t
221. een update rate Force a display update of Vaults active on the network Clear the screen of inactive Vaults Clear the screen of inactive clients Open online help to the Network Activity page Open online help with focus on Network Activity Open the local version of online help Open the web based version of online help Open the support webpage Open the About Network Activity window Network Activity Symbols Network Activity generates and places Vault symbols randomly on the window but you can move the Vault symbols In addition from the Network Activity Advanced menu you can modify the mode as to how the Network Activity window updates 1 Move the mouse pointer over the Vault symbol 2 Click and drag the Vault symbol to another location within the window To open Mini Vault Stats or Vault Stats move the mouse pointer over the a Vault label or symbol and right click for the shortcut menu vite pe To quickly open Mini Vault Stats double click a Vault label or symbol 2015 138 Phoenix RSM There are many different Network Activity symbols that can display on screen The following list identifies the symbols you may see Red circle A Vault in the Information Repository Yellow circle A client in the Information Repository Red line pulsing The Information Repository is waiting for offline media and operator intervention is required White line pulsing This is normal activity
222. efault media dir pn fs_num_virt_drives Te meos Chh Sme Cepe wel Siew woe diag diag high diag _pn act log emesis act dog recyele act log max size mb act log join email enable email recipient Gite NS ETVE cache sine mi bilockistzep write with verify background Pesce Tacez console pn errori Log admin_req_ cmd WAS SNS Sexe sas working cache pn working cache size gb Windows Diagnostics wes we Wales Oky true Messe berres iki E il HardDisk 00 00 L024 LOO usr local Phoenix Database usr local Phoenix Media LO LOO wn false false dev tty false false 50 wn false vault_admin Lem il Sierewnswe LO 0 Leus true Dean dev console asr local Phoenix Logs VaultSvc wee woe usr local Phoenix WorkingCache LLI TOUY This section pertains to the Windows operating system only log To open a diagnostics window for Vault Services you first need to configure Windows Services to allow the Vault Service to interact with the desktop client 2015 Command Line Arguments 413 A When enabling this feature a window appears to display Vault activity If you close this window it stops the Vault and Phoenix RSM does not operate without running Vaults To configure Vault Services to open a window for diagnostic messages do the following 1 Access SoleraTec Vault Service in the Windows Services window See Start Vaults Manually for directions 2
223. eisueaeduer 56 Disable SCSI Devices Wea CNG AIM hs oes eee Saeed ene detect Sages tad eee vente E E E dadedavea ren anedy Vault S Cure Or UNS 6 CURE siscisscvcssicvsceccceivsisesessrsaccnnescecdssasscstsnacssesseseneavenschsetssusctssuseteisesesoueveesnevsetesusctsesenrssestedendavenverserssvedtvedses Vault Shutdow nn OF Res tarts csscc csscsccccssocevessvsccvessonensstcevceceesersussecdaasevsesehietcsnseesesste ustevvetversencedetcsrscedesex ectevseaverstuersstccssersessek Vault Propertie S ficccccisesscsccesvssivsetsciscrssscnnsssssesencsvcnncesstecussstecoereseserseceresnncinetseusctsesesteespsenetervenicrstecussssessendunserneces ennirvetesvsctsesent Vault Properties General TA D E r a ra e ae eves aa aa a e A ae ra a er are ra ar aa aaaea aee arira aea irana E PEDAU ERATES Vault Properties Device Tab Vault Properties Database Tab Vault Properties License Tab x sccsciise cecsscesecveavatadsues castencctcosgusevcvincusanensstvsuadusveccvesasesudvcavaledevet sdutdaeshcosevenesvinuevaversvstussadunvecdes Vault Properties Security Tabs ccscscicccicsccsessvavscadazciecutsvesnhedecssacuthcesetgavaeesatenddovecesasi sensei snaasaicsssuteduchacseaecacuaiaevhcascuktvssch ia tauead Vault Properties Logs Tab isis vis nare a aa a E E EE a a E EA aE Vault Properties Notifications TaD a r E rae ae a r rar a a a ea rra a ee ara a a 104 Vault Properties Diagnostics Tabiv icse cc ccsccsecveivaesesdeacuackveconcveucovstevsencesvatisvaceccecessustduioveva
224. electing Information displays the overall details of the Vault in the Vault Admin right pane 2015 130 Phoenix RSM Item Value Address udp 192 168 1 19 59092 Current Time 2014 04 10 15 00 48 Free Space 343 28 GB Garbage Space 0 Bytes Media Type Hdisk Name batgirl_Disk Secured Yes Serial Number 203491 Software Version 6 3 2 Start Time 2014 04 07 12 29 05 Status OK Total Drives 10 Total Errors 0 Total Media 6 Total Media Offline 0 Total Media Online 6 Total Robotic Arms 10 Total RPC Calls In 181 859 Total RPC Calls Out 18 579 Total RPC PacketsIn 272 728 Total RPC Packets Out 350 723 Total Storage Slots 6 Total Volumes 6 Total Volumes Offline 0 Total Volumes Online 6 Type HardDisk The following are the items listed Address The network address of the Vault selected and the Vault s port number Current Time The Vault s internal clock time This is mapped to the Vault s host computer Free Space The amount of free space available in the Vault Garbage Space The amount of purge space in the Vault typically zero on hard disk based Vaults Media Type Additional information about the storage device technology used by the Vault Hard disk based Vaults always have a Media Type of Hdisk while data tape based Vaults list the type of technology used such as DLT or LTO Name The name of the Vault selected Secured Secur
225. elow before dicking Next Vault name Test_HardDisk1 Vault type HardDisk Number of data streams 10 Maximum number of directory entries 100 Location where media is stored by default C Program Files x86 Phoenix Automatically create storage media No Amount of memory per data stream cache 10 00 MB Temporary files storage location C Program Files x86 Phoenix WorkingC Amount of disk space used for temporary files 100 00 GB Database location C Program Files x86 Phoenix Database 1 Database optimized at 12 00 AM Maximum memory used for database 1 00 GB Maximum number of open database files 100 Activity logging enabled true Activity log pathname C Program Files x86 Phoenix Logs VaultSvcActivi Maximum size of activity log 50 00 MB Recycle activity log false Enable email notification false Error log pathname C Program Files x86 Phoenix Logs VaultSvc1 log Console pathname con 4 m b Tape Library Summary Vault Management e Review the displayed summary and ensure all the values are correct If information is incorrect click the Back button to navigate through previous wizard windows to edit Phoenix RSM Ready to Add Ready to Add Vault Review the summary below before clicking Next vault name TapeLibrary3 vault type TapeLibrary Changer Id SPECTRAPYTHON91 10004C84 Drive 1 Id IBMULTRIUM HH61011004C84 Drive 2 Id IBMULTRIUM HH61012004C84 Amount of
226. emented across the whole Information Repository refreshing is important to do to get the latest updates for the Data Service Policies view Also it refreshes for changes that could affect contents of Vaults media names and storage pools Before you refresh save If you do not save any changes made or added policies will be lost The Data Service Policies window is described below 2015 312 Phoenix RSM File Edit View Help Hse afp add O Delete Y Refresh Policy Name 4 Source Criteria Destination Scheduling Advanced By Batgirl VCM gt Doc VCM Vault AT Iceman_Purge lt any gt m K E Iceman_PurgeHighRes R E Iceman_ReplicateToTape Media Name T MICRONVR Purge lt any gt DID MICRONVR_PurgeHighRes MICRONVR ReplicateToTape Storage Pool s LE OFFICE Purge Full lt any gt AT OFFICE_Purge_Incr E E OFFICE _ReplicateToTape Meda Type p Meda Speed AT Rex Purge lt any gt 7 lt an gt v DX E Rex PurgeHighRes R E Rex_ReplicateToTape 4 m x pE q pe The triangular caution symbol on the policy icon in the left pane of the window indicates that the policy is not active Data Service Policy Menu Items Menu Items Description ane TAVE AN Poney Save settings for policies created or modified Settings File gt Import from Open an Import from window to select a Data Services Service configuration file t
227. en removing Vaults use the same wizard see Remove Vaults Keep the following in mind e You must have administrative rights to add a Vault e All devices running in Phoenix RSM must be time synchronized If they are not unexpected results may occur e To change Vault settings including the naming of Vaults security logs notifications diagnostics memory allocation for devices database optimization parameters and licensing after you have installed a Vault see Vault Properties 2015 Vault Management 55 Vault Considerations Vaults are installed on computers to control and manage storage devices The computer hosting a Vault needs adequate resources to operate and manage the storage device and considerations should be made for growth and scale As the amount of data being stored increases the volume of entries in the Vault database also increases Vaults that use high capacity storage devices need system resources to accommodate Consideration Description Calculating Needed i O Memory for the Vault The Vault database requires about 2 of the total amount of available storage space Catalog Date and Time All computers that contain Vaults and any VMS system that Properties on video is captured from must be synchronized to the same Computers with Vaults time source for the Information Repository to function correctly Hosting More than a A single computer can host up to four Vaults as long as it is Singl
228. ences to define default settings for the Live Viewer window Access the Live Viewer User Preferences from the Live Viewer Tools menu select User Preferences 2015 248 Phoenix RSM Window Appearance Set full screen mode when starting application Set full screen mode when camera port is double clicked Auto hide menu bar Enable resize handle Enable tool tips Enable advanced user mode Touch screen friendly Panel Options Patrol Panel Enabled open when needed Volume Panel Enabled open when needed Ptz Panel Enabled open when needed Camera Control Panel Enabled open when needed Video Options Preferred viewer VLC first then QuickTime Video Stream Delay 500ms F Camera Reconnect Timeout 60 secs Y Enable hardware overlay 2015 Enable multiple threads for decode Manual record cache folder Live Viewer 249 Live Viewer User Preference Elements Element Description Set full screen mode when starting application Select to start the Live Viewer application in Full Screen mode where no Title bar or Windows Start bar appear Set full screen mode When the camera port or view frame Title bar is double when camera portis clicked it displays in Full Screen mode with no Title bar double clicked or Windows Start bar Auto hide menu bar Select to hide the main menu bar e Press ALT to show the menu e Press ESC to hide it Enable resize han
229. ent Description Check mark by this menu item indicates that tool tips for the window display The tips are brief descriptions of window controls if the mouse pointer is moved over a control De select to turn tool tips off Check mark by this menu item indicates that policy tips display in the left pane Policy tips provide details of the recording policy De select to turn policy tips off Check mark by this menu item sets the Camera Policies window to unlock Advanced mode features and options See Advanced Mode for more information Advanced mode only Open the Camera Policies User Preferences window User Preferences define default settings for the Camera Policies window The information in User Preferences is the exact same as what is displayed on the Processing tab User preferences are a convenient way to set your commonly used options for the desktop client running Camera Policies and each subsequent time you run a job using your desktop client those settings are automatically set You can make changes using the Processing tab but those changes do not save as User Preferences and options reset to defaults for subsequent uses Open the Camera Configurations window Use to manually add and configure cameras to your Information Repository You must use the Camera Configurations when capturing video from a VMS The policy you create enables video to be retrieved from the VMS Advanced mode only Select Find Cameras to open
230. ent server system but without the need for hard coded static links between clients and servers In contrast the Locator architecture is flexible to allow dynamic client access to any storage resource on your network The Locator maintains a list of currently available Phoenix RSM services by using a multicast and beacon technology and it provides this list to clients on the network as needed To accomplish this the Locator constantly listens for active registered Vaults The Locator list notes Vault status and location changes Every Locator is self propagating and shares information with other Locators within the Information Repository For more information see Command Line Arguments 2015 Command Line Arguments 401 Vault Admin Command Line Use VaultAdminCl to manage media and Vaults in your Information Repository To execute Vault Admin tasks ensure that the folder where Phoenix RSM is installed is in your command path open a command prompt and run VaultAdminCl at the command line As needed use the commands listed below For more information see Vault Admin and Command Line Arguments e Access VaultAdminCl from your suite of application products Command Line Options As needed append the following options to the execution path When you run VaultAdminCl the command line is formed as follows VaultAdminCl lt option gt input_pathname lt pathname gt Contains the input list of commands e output_pathname lt
231. eport optons ees Po Performance Options Enable transmission optimization Maintain cient vault connection for 500 Troe Files Bytes Miscellaneous Options Test Run Output results but do not actually move files Indude offiine files Indude deleted files Erase media when all files are marked for deletion _ Data Service Policy Advanced Tab Elements Element Description Pre amp Post Processing Use the pre processing and post processing commands to Command execute commands before and after each session Type a pre processing or post processing command or both into the text boxes Command strings can be pointers to executable files with arguments pointers to shell scripts or a command string that the local processor is equipped to accept 2015 Data Management Element Description The following are variables in pre processing and post processing commands P or Pn Policy Name H or Hn Host Name D Date yyy mm dd Dy Year Dm Month Dd Day T Time hh mm Th Hour Tm Minute Ts Second R or Rn Root path name Valid only at the beginning of a string Ne Number of errors Nr Number of retries Nb Number of bytes written Nf Number for files written Error Log Filename An error log file is created anytime an error is encountered during a job It is useful for troubleshooting problems The Error
232. er Check that there are no yellow warning triangles in Camera Policies or Camera Configurations Issue Asterisks in the camera list My applications and camera stop functioning after a change How does my software handle camera connections Not seeing the date and time from the camera manufacturer Thumbnails do not generate with my camera Forgot camera password on the wizard Video freezes in low light conditions 42 Phoenix RSM Possible Causes Check the LCD panel on the NAS for an error condition Check the NAS Web UI for an error condition Check the log files Advanced user only Camera is not active and is ready to be configured Check network and DHCP settings Applications may not work if there have been any network or DHCP changes Each Vault should be assigned a static IP address Check IP network camera connectivity and active status if Camera Policies stop working Video is streamed to the recording server when the camera is scheduled to record Video is also streamed directly from a camera to any Live Viewer session which is watching that camera Log into the camera s management utility to enable the date and time stamp overlay Phoenix RSM relies on the network IP camera to superimpose the date and time onto the recorded video Disable the audio setting if it has audio Some older cameras do not correctly stream video and audio together Check with your camera
233. er string gt Data Management Description Default true A command that runs immediately after the job is finished Supports token substitution Default A pre process command that runs immediately before a job starts Supports token substitution Default Directories will be processed Valid values true false Default true Files will be processed Valid values true false Default true The amount of time that elapses before a job is repeated 1 2 Default 24 00 00 The maximum percent of media that is to be used If the used is greater than the entered value the file is processed Valid values 1 100 Default 0 The minimum percent of media used after the high watermark has been reached If the of media used is greater than this value and the high watermark has been reached the file is processed Valid values 1 100 Default 0 The source media name Default any The source media speed 307 sos Phoenix RSM Token Value src_media_type lt character string gt src_storage_pool lt character string gt src_vault_name lt character string gt src_volume_format src_volume_name src_volume_pack start_days lt mtwitfss gt Description Valid values e SO S10 e Unspecified Default Unspecified The source media type from where the file should be processed e Hdisk Hard disk e 8mm Eight millim
234. er while using your product applications Follow the steps below 1 Install Phoenix RSM To install the software from a CD ROM a Ensure that your computer is properly configured and connected to a network b Insert the Phoenix RSM CD ROM and open Setup html from your installation disc or folder c Follow the directions to open and install the Phoenix RSM Server Bundle d If running on Windows firewall settings are established automatically during the installation process If running on a platform other than Windows ensure that Phoenix RSM is not blocked by the firewall on your local computer To install the software from the website a Go to SoleraTec s website and click Download b In the Installation section double click Phoenix RSM to download Be sure to check the version number and operating system c Accept the License Agreement and click the Start Download button d Follow installation procedures Installation guidance can be found either in the Doc folder after clicking on the downloaded executable or online at the SoleraTec website or in the Installation chapter of this guide 2015 Getting Started a 2 Add a Vault a Find your suite of Phoenix RSM applications on your computer see Launch an Application e From a Windows desktop click Start gt All Programs gt Phoenix e From a Mac desktop click Applications gt Preview The Preview window appears Select Applications gt Phoenix gt Bin
235. ere is no limit to the number of camera pools your Phoenix RSM solution may have The manufacturer of the camera The Video Capture URL populates automatically A user defined value This is the camera s model number The RTSP URL of the camera for capturing video feeds e The text box displays the IP address for the selected camera Type a User Name if the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed This box works in conjunction with Password Type a Password if the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed This box works in conjunction with User Name Advanced mode only 2015 Camera Management 185 Element Description The width and height in pixels of video images Use to define a frame size that is different from the camera s default The first box is for width and the second is for height Enable stream over Advanced mode only TCP Causes the RTSP capture to stream data over a TCP connection rather than over a default HTTP connection Recording Computer Displays the computer that captures a video feed from your camera Clip Duration Advanced mode only A video recording option Captured video feeds are parsed into individual files default is 5 minutes Use to select the size of these files and therefore the duration of individual videos Shorter videos smaller files enable the Surveillance Video Manager to retrieve files for review more quickly and causes the
236. ere stored or on when they were last accessed Time and date process 1 From the Time drop down list select an option that includes a specific time and date for example Created after HH MM AM on Day The Clock button Calendar button and the Created Stored drop down list are activated 2 Select Created or Stored The text in the Time drop down list changes accordingly 3 Click the Clock button to select a time from the Time window The selected time displays in the Time drop down list 4 Click the Calendar button to select a date from the Date window The selected date displays in the Time drop down list Last accessed process 1 From the Time drop down list select an option that includes an interval of time for example Created more than x days ago The Clock button and the Created Stored drop down list are activated 2 Select Created or Stored The text in the Time drop down list changes accordingly 3 Click the Clock button to determine a period of time of years months days hours and minutes from the Period of Time window The selected period of time displays in the Time drop down list Use to specify a minimum or maximum file size associated with the policy This is useful for refining your file selection criteria further 2015 Data Management 319 Element Description 1 Type a file size in the text box 2 Select the unit of measurement bytes KB MB GB 3 Select Minimum or
237. erent NAS license is not valid e Is a demo product key and is now expired e Cannot move product keys between NAS units Log files Log files are system output files that can help diagnose or track warnings issues and problems with the applications The following provide insight as to what a log file might include Each log file should be analyzed and treated individually LocSvc log Reports networking NIC issues DataSvcsSvc log Reports problems mainly related to job scheduling of Data Service policies For example warnings at startup no active Vaults a Vault is not yet registered or no found jobs to run When a Vault does start Data Services Service picks up its jobs to run Vault log Contains errors warnings or informational messages from the VaultSvc Normally for every start message you should see a stop message If there is another start message immediately following the first start message then the VaultSvc was not properly stopped in its previous run CYA messages are informational messages for Phoenix RSM There is no loss of data only a warning that the database had to be rebuilt re indexed Purge When 80Pct Full log Log entries report a summary of the Data Service Job Purge When 80Pct Full running Every Data Service policy that runs produces this file with job information If there are any errors or warnings it also creates an err version of the same file lt policy gt log A Camera Poli
238. erties Logs Tab Use the Logs tab to set parameters and log activity for the selected Vault Access this from Vault Properties by clicking the Logs tab Activity Log Enable activity logging Activity log pathname C Logs VaultSvcActivity log Maximum log size Action to take when log reaches maximum size Create a new log Error Log Error log pathname C Logs VaultSvc log 1 Select preferred Vault values 2 Click OK to save new settings Logs Tab Elements 2015 104 Phoenix RSM Element Enable activity logging Activity log pathname Maximum log size Action to take when log reaches maximum size Error log pathname Description Select to enable activity logging and the activity log boxes for this Vault Properties tab If not selected no activity logs are created Phoenix RSM provides a security audit trail through activity logs Activity logs include the following events Vault start Vault stop file read file write file create file delete media load media unload and media erase For these events the name and IP address of the user who executed the event and the date and time the event was executed is recorded Activity logs can be imported into any application that supports a tab delimited format such as Microsoft Excel Define where the activity logs are written to Define the maximum size the activity log can become Limit the size of the activity log to find need
239. eter tape e Dds Digital data storage Dit Digital linear tape e Ait Advanced intelligent tape SuperAit Super advanced intelligent tape e Lto Linear tape open Vxa Exabyte Vxa tape e Travan Travan tape MagOptical Read write optical NullDevice e Unspecified Default Unspecified The source storage pool Default any The source vault name Default any Internal use only Internal use only Internal use only The days the job is to run Use to indicate days the job should not run 2015 Data Management 309 Token Value Description For example if the job is to run on Thursday you would enter t 1 Default mtwtfss The time the job should start for each defined start start_time lt hh mm ss gt day in start_days Default 0 0 0 midnight The date and time the job is to stop The date and stop_time R lt yyyy gt lt mm gt time entered is relative to the start of the job lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt Default RO000 00 00 00 00 00 no stop time Print the start and stop times and final statistics of the job to the file indicated by the list_pn option summary lt boolean gt k Valid values true false Default true The throttle controls the amount of bandwidth used by jobs and the speed files are sent to Vaults Throttle values are relative to Information Repository capacity and range from 1 t
240. etwork Camera WV NS202A WV NS202A Live Alarm VMD area Notification Alarm setup Setup menu Terminal alarm 1 Basic setu z P Terminal alarm 2 Camera setup Terminal alarm 3 Multi screen setup VMD alarm Command alarm Command alarm ap Originating port Authentication 4 setup mmber 1 65535 Server setup Network setup Camera motion on alarm Schedule setup Terminal alarm 1 Maintenance Terminal alarm 2 Help Terminal alarm 3 9 Select the VMD area Video Motion Detection tab and the video feed appears The white square enclosing the video feed indicates the area that motion alarms can be set and motion detection metadata collected Modify the following parameters Status Turn motion alarms and motion metadata gathering on and off When set to On alarms are enabled and motion metadata is captured When set to Off alarms are disabled and no motion detection metadata is captured Detection sensitivity Define the level of motion detected and recorded for the video feed area with a motion alarm This area is the white square enclosing the video feed Select from Super high to Low with Super high being the most sensitive to motion If you set Preset position select below the Detection sensitivity settings on this tab are ignored Preset position select Define up to four discrete motion detection areas If no areas are selected or are deactivated then the system detects motion for the entire vide
241. extension block structure includes three blocks IngestMdExt ModMdExt and SearchMdExt Each comprised of one or more Query blocks Query block statements describe the controls to appear on the application These can include any number of string fields checkboxes spin controls path name boxes and choice controls Each block can have any number of Query blocks It s best to ensure that the IngestMdExt block and SearchMdExt contain the same Query blocks since only ingested metadata is searched However the Query blocks contained in SearchMdExt can be limited to a subset of those in IngestMdExt In this case you would be able to search on the Query blocks listed in SearchMdExt vita N Pay attention to brackets for IngestMdExt ModMdExt and SearchMdExt there needs to be an opening bracket after lt Extension gt and a closing bracket after its last Query block ay If a Query block contains an error the entire metadata extension block IngestMdExt SearchMdExt is ignored In the following example note that tokens cannot be used in Query blocks indiscriminately Each Query block supports only specific tokens See Valid Token Values for Query Blocks below for details This identifies the beginning of the block lt block identifier gt This is the opening brace for the block Query lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt v
242. fault false Save a preview image at the path entered in pict_save_preview_image_dir_pn Valid values true false Default false The path where the copy of the preview image is saved Default path The job identifier No default A post process command that runs immediately after the job is finished Supports token substitution Default A pre process command that runs immediately before the job starts Supports token substitution Default Preserve the state of directories Valid values true false Default true Internal use only The amount of time that elapses before a job is repeated 2 Default 24 00 00 2015 2015 retry_time lt alpha gt lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt start_days lt mtwtfss gt start_time lt hh mm ss gt stop_time R lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt summary lt boolean gt system_info lt boolean gt Camera Management The date and time to retry the list of files not ingested These files match all job criteria but were not sent to the Vault You must precede the date time value with an A to specify an absolute date and time or an R to specify a date and time relative to the end of the job Enter the absolute year as a four digit number for example 2001 2002 etc Valid values e A Absolute date and time e R Relative date and time
243. fine For example you might have a camera pool called Doors that includes all of the cameras that are videotaping the doors of your establishment It is often useful to see the live feeds from all of the cameras that belong to a certain pool The Live Viewer lists camera pools as well as individual cameras to easily see the live feeds of cameras from a particular pool A You will only see live feeds from cameras that are configured with the live view option enabled How to create a camera pool Camera pools are configured when creating a policy using Camera Policies 2015 240 Phoenix RSM To view live feeds from a camera pool 1 Open the Live Viewer application directly or you can open it from the menu bar of the Surveillance Video Manager select Tools gt Live Viewer The Live Viewer window opens with the default layout The Title bar for each camera port reads Not in Use as no cameras have been selected yet 2 Click the Pools folder on the top right The names of the camera pools are displayed 3 Select the pool to view and drag it into a camera view frame Live views of the cameras contained in that camera pool are displayed in the viewer window The camera name for each camera is displayed in the Title bar of its camera port For more information see Live Viewer Layout Live Viewer Layout The first time opened the Live Viewer is set to display four feeds from two cameras arranged as 2x2 two rows of tw
244. fine how much virtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache can improve performance but at the expense of using more virtual memory The total amount of space used equals the number of data streams multiplied by the selected cache size With 10 data streams and 10 MB of cache the Vault sets aside 100 MB of total virtual memory for caching data A selection of 10 MB is usually enough From the Where can temporary files be stored box type a location for the working cache or select a location from the Browse for Folder window by clicking the Browse button The default location is lt install dir gt WorkingCache When Phoenix RSM processes files it may create temporary files for efficient performance especially when clipping video files From the How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files drop down list select how much working cache space is used for temporary files The working cache should be large enough to hold multiple large video files The default size is 100 GB 2015 Phoenix RSM Ry 38 Device X Which standalone tape drive do you want to use select one Devices Found lt No storage devices detected on this computer gt gi gt Look for Devices How much memory should be used for each data stream cache 10 00MB v Where can temporary Files be stored IC Program Files WorkingCache2 How much disk sp
245. first box is for width and the second is for height Enable stream over Advanced mode only TCP Causes the RTSP capture to stream data over a TCP connection rather than over a default HTTP connection Recording Computer The computer that captures a video feed from your camera Access Permissions Advanced mode only Ability to add change or delete rights for a camera Access permissions determine who has access to cameras and the access level When working in Standard mode the default permissions include everyone and Recorded and Live Video and PTZ Double click an existing security entry to change an entry click the Add button to insert a new entry click the Delete button to remove an entry or click the Up or Down arrow buttons to change the order the entries are listed in the Access Permissions group box See the Add New Security Entry section below Active Advanced mode only Determine whether the camera is active or inactive To capture video and view live feeds this checkbox must be selected If it is not selected then any policy that uses this camera will not run 4 When you are finished selecting options and entering values in the Add New Camera window click OK 5 From the Camera Configurations toolbar click the Save button to save the new camera configuration and add the camera to the Information Repository 2015 z6 Phoenix RSM 6 Repeat this process for each camera to add y os da py
246. from the selected camera e None No access to the camera whe pe If recorded is not included in user rights you can still record using Live Viewer but you will not be able to search for recorded video when using SVM Motion Detection Some RTSP enabled IP cameras include or support motion detection Depending on the camera type Phoenix RSM supports motion detection information automatically configures camera settings and preserves motion metadata along with captured video This data is then used by the Surillance Video 2015 Camera Management 227 Manager SVM application to create histograms of detected motion The following describes how to configure cameras for motion detection Supported camera types are AXIS and Panasonic AXIS When adding a RTSP enabled AXIS IP camera using versions 2 or 3 of AXIS S VAPIX API the AXIS camera settings are configured and motion detection metadata is preserved with captured video Default settings should be sufficient to meet most needs but you can manually configure parameters that affect performance my tS a py Be sure to see your AXIS camera s specifications to determine if your camera supports motion detection A Except for Image Compression and Motion Detection settings do not modify pre set Phoenix RSM configuration settings for your AXIS camera otherwise capturing motion detection data may not occur This configuration is intended for advanced users and documents only th
247. from the toolbar click the Add button Policy Name Description Source Surveillance Camera v Active OK Cancel Help b In the Create a Policy window type a Policy Name and Description select the Active checkbox and click OK c The policy is displayed in the left pane Recording Policy Name of the Camera Policies window d From the Camera Policies Camera tab select the camera added from the Camera drop down list e In the Scheduling tab leave the defaults so video feeds are recorded continuously 2015 so Phoenix RSM f Click the Save button to save the policy 6 Create a Data Service policy It is a good practice to set limits on the amount of space available for video storage This step sets up that policy so that the oldest video is overwritten before the storage space is full As limits are reached new video feeds replace the older ones We recommend to set an automatic purge policy the system ensures each hour that when 80 of the space available has been filled the oldest clips are overwritten by the new clips being recorded a From your suite of Phoenix RSM applications open Data Service Policies b From the toolbar of the Data Service Policies window click the Add button Policy Name Description Policy Type Migrate Replicate Purge v Active x J canei Hep c In the Create a Policy window type a Policy Name and Description select a Policy
248. g This is the distribution of jobs and data throughout the Information Repository Phoenix RSM queries each Vault regarding the best match for processing requirements storage resources free space and then establishes a connection to the Vault and copies files to the Vault The network remains load balanced Vault The Vault concept makes the SoleraTec product unique and powerful A Vault can be thought of as a storage container On the server side a Vault is comprised of a central processing unit CPU Phoenix RSM software and storage Each Vault requires its own product key because of its scalable possibilities 2015 Introduction 19 The Vault s on the network make up the Information Repository to manage all your data storage needs The Vaults have attributes associated to them like licensing media and files and are easy to upgrade They are decentralized making the Information Repository a distributed solution across your network but overall data management remains centralized and under complete control Phoenix RSM is truly a multi tiered storage and digital asset management solution For more information see Vault Admin Components Phoenix RSM includes server components and client components all i Ja pe During the installation process you can opt to install the server or client but it is important to note that clients do not function unless a Phoenix RSM server has been installed on the network For more infor
249. g an administrator to load the required media Do not track media any longer The Location where media will be stored text box is disabled When the media leaves the Information Repository its entries are removed from the Vault s memory 6 If you select Track media after unloading type a descriptive note about where media is to be stored in the Location where media will be stored text box 7 From the Media Updating drop down list select an option Update media if needed The Vault updates the media memory on the media being unloaded if it is out of date Do not update media The Vault does not update the media memory for the media being unloaded 8 From the Media Handling drop down list select an option Leave media in library The tape will remain in the library after it has been unloaded Move media to mail slot The tape will be moved to the library s mail slot after it has been unloaded AN When multiple tapes are selected to be unloaded only the Leave media in library option is available 12 Phoenix RSM 8 Click OK to complete the process The media appears with a gold background in the Vault Admin main window Erase Media The erase media feature erases data from a unit of media but leaves the media header information intact Header information comprises the information entered when the media was prepared media name owner rights and other information It is better to erase media rather than reforma
250. g provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect 6 2 This Agreement is governed by and construed in accordance with the law s of the State of California without regard to its conflicts of law principles The parties to this Agreement hereby irrevocably consent to the personal jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in San Diego California to resolve any dispute or controversy related to this Agreement 6 3 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement betw een the parties w ith respect to the subject matter hereof and all prior agreements representations statements and undertakings are hereby expressly canceled 6 4 Neither party hereto shall be liable in any manner for failure or delay in fulfillment of all or part of this Agreement directly or indirectly ow ing to any causes or circumstances beyond its reasonable control 7 EXPORT CONTROL REGULATIONS Licensee acknow ledges and agrees that none of the Softw are Documentation or underlying information or technology may be installed or otherwise exported or re exported a into or to a national or resident of Cuba Iran North Korea Sudan Syria and any other country to which the U S has embargoed goods or b to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s List of Specially Designated Nationals or the U S Commerce Department s Table of Denial Orders Licensee further represents and warrants that it is not located in under the control of or a national or
251. ger Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value ffmpeg Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value ffmpeg Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenBackend Char 6 ffmpeg Name VideoComponentsGenMaxInstances Description The number of transcoding processes that can be run simultaneously It can be represented in several different formats Use the number of cores default 0 Unlimited n Use this number explicitly n Multiply the number of cores by n n Divide the number of cores by n n Add n to the number of cores n Subtract n from the number of cores Default Used by Target and Process TgtProcSvc Video Content Manager Surveillance Video Manager Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Number of transcoding processes Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Number of transcoding processes Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenMaxinstances Char 2 6 Name VideoComponentsGenMax Threads 2015 32 Phoenix RSM Key Description The number of threads that can be used by each transcoding process A value of 0 default indicates that the number of threads will not be restricted but will instead be left to the transcoding engine Default 0 Used by Target and Process TgtProcSvc Video Content Manager Surveillance Video Manager Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Minimum of 0 Keys
252. gth Number of characters in Value Value Pathname of directory Sample Usage TempDir Char 7 C tmp Name TgtProcSvcPriority Description Set process priority of TgtProcSw Default standard Used by TgtProcSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type String Value Value low standard high Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value low standard high Sample Usage TgtProcSwPriority Char 4 high 2015 390 Phoenix RSM Key Name VaultSvcPriority Description Set process priority of VaultSvc Default standard Used by VaultSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type String Value Value low standard high Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value low standard high Sample Usage VaultSvcPriority Char 4 high Name VideoClipGenPathname Description Pathname of executable to create a clip of a video file Default lt install dir gt Bin VideoComponentsGen exe Used by VaultSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname of executable Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname of executable Sample Usage VideoClipGenPathname Char 16 C MyClipper exe Name VideoComponents GenBackend Description VideoComponentsGen s backend package to use Default ffmpeg 2015 Customization 301 Key Used by Target and Process TgtProcSvc Video Content Manager Surveillance Video Mana
253. hat contains values for a policy File gt Export to Open an Export to window to select where a Data Services Service configuration file saves to File gt Exit Close the application If changes have been made a Confirmation dialog box appears for saving changes click Yes No or Cancel Edit gt Create a Policy Open the Create a Policy window Assign a new policy name description of policy and the type of policy Also indicate if you want the policy to be active or not 2015 Data Management 313 Menu Items Description Edit gt Modify Selected Select a policy listed in the left pane then select this menu Policy item to modify the existing policy Edit gt Delete Selected Select a policy listed in the left pane then select this menu Policy item to remove the policy from Data Services Edit gt Delete All Delete all the policies from the configuration file and Policies removes policies listed in the left pane View gt Refresh Policy Refresh the view in the left pane for the latest list of policies View View gt Enable Tool Check mark by this menu item indicates that tool tips for the Tips window will display The tips are brief descriptions of window controls if the mouse pointer is moved over a control De select to turn tool tips off View gt Enable Policy Check mark by this menu item indicates that policy tips Tips display in the left pane Policy tips provide details of the policy as set usi
254. he Softw are into another computer language or e copy or otherw ise reproduce the Softw are or Documentation other than as specifically authorized in this Section 3 4 Sublicense Licensee may sublicense the Softw are to another party provided that such sublicense is granted on the same terms and conditions as are set forth herein It is the sole responsibility of the Licensee to obtain acceptance of these terms and conditions from any party to whom the Software is sublicensed In order to constitute a validly sublicensed copy the Softw are must be reproduced in its entirety and without modification including but not limited to any copyright notice serial number and any other notice affixed thereto 4 OWNERSHIP NOTICE 4 1 The Softw are and Documentation and all intellectual property contained therein are and shall remain the sole and exclusive property of Company and its licensors and are protected by copyright and trade secret laws and international copyright treaty provisions 4 2 Licensee shall not remove modify or in any manner tamper with any copyright trademark or other proprietary notices embodied in the Softw are or on the Documentation on any copy of the Softw are and Documentation in any form in whole or in part 5 WARRANTY DISCLAIMERS AND LIABILITY LIMITATIONS 5 1 COMPANY MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND IT IS LICENSED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED I
255. he ability to view 16 channels at a time The Phoenix RSM solution manages unaltered high resolution original video and creates low resolution companion video at a fraction of the original size and then implements storage policies to replicate and migrate the video to and from a storage device automatically with no data loss Phoenix RSM manages a multi tiered solution meaning that it has a scalable architecture and can manage multiple storage devices With the low resolution companion video archives are active and available when video is located online near line or offline There is no cumbersome process of video backup and restoration that traditional single tiered systems have 2015 6 Phoenix RSM From capturing your video with Camera Policies searching for and retrieving stored video using the Surveillance Video Manager and then reviewing using the Media Viewer to viewing live video feeds with the Live Viewer you will find that with Phoenix RSM all your video surveillance needs are met with ease See also Architectural Overview and Technical Overview Seamless Integration Seamless integration refers to the ease at which Phoenix RSM handles all your data asset management needs From video capture to online near line or offline storage to retrieving data for review or manipulation on your desktop client all your data regardless of when it was ingested recorded or where stored are under complete management and are eas
256. he histogram displays where motion detection thresholds were reached When no motion has reached the detection threshold or no motion detection data has been gathered then the histogram is filled black and empty Line height and color indicate the magnitude of the motion detected based on how your motion detection enabled camera is configured See motion detection Timeline The timeline pointer indicates the part of the video that is displayed Click hold and drag the pointer either forward or backward in the video Click to the left of the pointer to rewind the video one second at a time or click to the right of the pointer to advance the video one second at a time Click and hold in either direction and the pointer moves automatically one second at a time 2015 270 Phoenix RSM The number to the left is a time code that indicates where the pointer is in the video and the part being displayed The number to the right indicates the total length of the video The vertical green line to the left indicates where a clip begins and the vertical green line to the right indicates where a clip ends Only the segment of video between the vertical green lines will be exported By default the lines mark the beginning and the end of the video they can be adjusted using the scissor buttons ae s 1 if you set the beginning of the clip to within one second of the beginning of the file and one second of the end of the file the
257. hese servers are used to receive uploaded Motion JPEG images or event notification messages Configuration is performed in the Event Servers menu 5 Select Motion Detection The Motion Detection Page appears 2015 Camera Management 229 AXISA AXIS 211 Network Camera Live View Setup Help Motion Detection 2 Motion Detection gt Basic Configuration 2010 02 j 12 23 36 gt Video amp Image Add Window gt Live View Config 0 ly Event Configuration Mines te Include Exclude Event Servers Event Types SoleraTec_me Motion Detection Object Size Port Status History gt System Options Sensitivity Language 0 SoleraTec_me es i z About View All Windows View Selected Window Stop Play 7 fps Each camera supports one motion detection area This is the part of the camera s field of view that is covered by motion detection By default the entire field of vew is selected You can change the covered area to suit your needs by dragging the borders of the motion detection area frame titled SoleraTec_me above and the entire frame itself so that it covers the area that you want monitored for motion 6 Adjust the following parameters to suit your needs Include By default Include is selected and the motion detection area is titled SoleraTec_me Do not change these values Object Size Determine how large
258. ia first unload the media and then reload the media otherwise the operation fails and an error message appears Loading Media Types The following subsections instruct you on how to load a hard disk media a data tape media and a shadow hard disk media Load Hard Disk Media Load media to existing Vaults only If you have not yet added any Vaults do so now by using the Add or Remove Vault Wizard 1 From the Vault Admin left pane click the expand indicator plus sign in front of the Vault to load media to 2 Click on the expand indicator for Media to have a tree of the media names displayed and also to have a list of the media names displayed in the right pane 3 Select desired media individual or multiple then click on the Load Media button in the toolbar Or right click on the selected media and choose Load Media from the shortcut menu The Load Media window opens nts Y pe You can load multiple hard disk media by holding the Shift key or Control key and clicking on the desired hard disk media in the right pane 2015 122 Phoenix RSM General Information Media Name Media Location Media is located in default location v Enter Pathname lt Located in default location gt Force Re Index Only re index if needed v o Cancel Help 4 In the Media Name text box type the name for the media being loaded 5 From the Media Location drop down list select Media is located in
259. ideo Manager 259 Select Search End Time e In the End Time window select a time and click OK wit e pe To search all stored video regardless of date and time de select the Search using date range checkbox 4 Search by camera From the Camera drop down list select the camera that captured the video to search or leave it set to lt any gt If set at lt any gt video streams captured from all cameras are searched 5 Select more search options More options selected focus the search and return less videos Keep in mind e For search results to include contiguous video do not limit your search to a specific NAS device computer or unit of media e Drop down lists support the use of wildcards Select from the options listed below Element Description Camera Pool If you know a video is located in a specific camera pool select that camera pool from the drop down list type the camera pool name in the box or use a wildcard A camera pool is a user defined virtual grouping of cameras and can be used to search for video from specified cameras For example suppose you have a camera pool called Doors It is comprised of all the cameras that watch over the doors of your business When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video captured from this camera pool are included There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Phoenix RSM solution may have C
260. ideo file but with the xml extension One metadata file per video is created and they stick together e Create a single file A single file containing the metadata for all files being exported is generated A Metadata output file box appears requiring a name for the metadata file Click the Browse button to select At a minimum the data included contain pathname file id size and the date and time modified FTP site address Type the host name or address FTP site user name Type the user name to log into the FTP site 2015 286 Phoenix RSM Element Description FTP site password Type the password to log into the FTP site Destination folder at Type the destination path and directory the files should be FTP site exported to This directory is a place to store files Custom You can customize export options for Export Job Configuration Custom options are available only when an ExportExtensions cfg file is in place at ae fe f Y Available options are customizable via ExportExtensions cfg at lt install dir gt Program Files Phoenix Config For more information see ExportExtensions cfg 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 287 Export Job Configuration Export destination Custom Job name Generate checksum for video Watermark video Generate metadata output file Case Name Agent Name John Napoli Agent ID 1001 Case Type Arson Pathname Browse Include content metadata
261. ies Camera Tab nsss Camera Policies Metadata Tab Camera Policies Proce SSIng Tab veicccssteccsstiediccescciccssetceudevcavcecsnecedccedsestesvevdetecsuesorsseuvedeccustevevserebvedetencessnavedceedusstedSuerseterevels Camera Policies De Stimatiom Tab aa vcs a a aa e a aaae Era PaT aa aare aE E aaa aaea a cove suicsescsvacstecdaincessadsucucersecetevsees Camera Policies Scheduling Tab Camera Policies Advanced Tab 00000 Camera Policies User Preferences Camera Configurations aseenaan aaaea A Eea as AAAS a Vana a KANI EE ANa ENAA Pa Ahaaa gehi ank Eenes RSS Camera Configurations Window cccscccssceeseeeeseeeeseeceesaeeeseeeesseseesaeeeseeeesaeseesaeeesaaeasaaseeaeeesaeessaaseesaeeeseeeesaaeessaeeeseeeeseeeeesas Import Export Camera Configurations Manually Add P C aM OT r a a raa a aE E aa Ae aa aaa r a ae a E e A a aaa aa naii Add VMS Camera era aaraa Gee eenceyuevccne stesegecti es dedeneued sdecbdei eaaa aeaa ranea Aaaa ree raaa ri aasad Saa aa anakaa EiS Motion Dete CliOM iiiiis isuriaren anana ce vende ne eintcs sevebeeeebeeevicesieuctavetuvensecewenianneedieesteeretis Live Viewer View Camera Fee dS aa a aa aa aa a a a aa a a a a a a a a a Aa a aaraa A i aaa raaa ra aTi 239 View Camera Pool Fee dsSitci ios iceccsfecccecet daia aiaa aE da Ea a Eaa ariaa aari ga da rE aia aidi 239 Live Viewer LayOut cics2 ici soiegcceccheicecceces ae aaaea A aa aaa a A Aaaa aa anana EE aar aa iaa 240 Live Viewer Palro S A a a
262. ies by clicking the Security tab General Device Database License Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics Vault Access Control List Rights Name Type Full Control Everyone Everyone ponot cme Hp 1 Add change or delete security rights 2 Click OK to save new settings Security Tab Elements 2015 10 Phoenix RSM Element Vault Access Control List Add button x Delete button g Up button Down button Add Entry Description Click on a right in the list to select it or double click ona right for the Change Entry window View the columns Rights The level of rights given to user group domain or everyone Indicates full rights Indicates rights to store and retrieve data Indicates rights to retrieve but not store data X Indicates no rights Name Name of the user group domain or everyone Type The Type of rights Open the Add Entry dialog box Use to add a new user group domain or everyone See Add Entry section below Remove the selected right from the Vault Access Control list Move the selected right up one line in the Vault Access Control list Move the selected right down one line in the Vault Access Control list Use the Add Entry dialog box to add a new user group domain or everyone 1 Click the Add Entry button 2015 Vault Management 101 Add New En
263. igration policies Online near line Or offline storage Such as a tape library Original video assets for Affordable long term retention Software License Agreement The Softw are Programs Utilities and documentation provided by SoleraTec under the name of Phoenix RSM are licensed only on the condition that you referred to as YOU or Licensee agree with SoleraTec referred to as Company to the terms and conditions set forth below PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION BY CLICKING ON THE ACCEPT BUTTON OPENING THE PACKAGE DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT OR USING THE EQUIPMENT THAT CONTAINS THIS PRODUCT YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT CLICK THE DO NOT ACCEPT BUTTON AND THE INSTALLATION PROCESS WILL NOT CONTINUE RETURN THE PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND OR DO NOT DOWNLOAD THE PRODUCT In consideration for use of the Softw are Licensee hereby agrees to the follow ing terms and conditions 2015 3 Phoenix RSM 1 DEFINITIONS 1 1 Documentation shall mean the documentation provided in connection w ith the Softw are 1 2 Effective Date shall mean the date on which Licensee opens the package dow nloads the product or uses equipment that contains the product 1 3 Softw are shall mean the object code of the Programs Utilities in
264. ilable for direct editing Date Time will change after a log entry has been edited and then saved Delete a log entry 1 Select a log entry from the list that you want to delete 2 Right click on that entry and select Delete from the shortcut menu Update the Repository with log changes The Information Repository needs to be updated with any changes that have been made to logs 1 Click Update The Send Logging Information window opens Destination Vault lt any gt Media lt any gt Storage Pool Cancel 2 Choose a value from the Vault Media and Storage Pool drop down lists e You can specify as many as you like or leave them as lt any gt 3 Click Send to send these changes to the Repository Send Logging Information window Elements Element Description Vault From the drop down list select a Vault or select lt any gt to use any available vault 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 277 Element Description If a Vault is selected the Media and Storage Pool drop down lists are automatically populated with the media and storage pools on the given Vault If lt any gt is selected then the Media and Storage Pool options contain all available media and storage pools Media Media refers to the names of individual units of media in the Vaults within the Information Repository From the drop down list select the media or select lt any gt to use any available vault The system automatically looks fo
265. ile Block name Description The beginning of an ExportExtension block ExportExtension Required A Note that the entire block is ignored if there are fewer Query block statements than in the Command For example if you have three Query block sections and four then the block will not be read Command Description Define the execute command specification Along with the command the command line must enumerate each Query block See the sample file below for an illustration Required is the substitution query value where is a number Each enumerates a Query one per Query and can be in any order The command specification cannot have more Command lt command specification gt than Query statements but you can specify certain blocks by omitting query numbers For example to include only query blocks 1 3 and 7 use lt 1 3 7 gt The following substitution tokens may also be in the Command specification e U User e M Host 2015 Customization 351 Command Description e D Date e T Time P Path to where the files are retrieved e O Filename containing list of files in the export list Use tokens to define optional functionality in the Command section Unless noted tokens are not necessary When tokens are omitted default values are used Include any of the following tokens when you want to use non default values Token Value Description Define if file
266. ily accessible Phoenix RSM manages the unaltered high resolution original video and creates low resolution companion or proxy video at a fraction of the original video size along with customizable metadata to enable fast searches and video review Phoenix RSM then implements storage policies to replicate and migrate the original unaltered video between primary hard disk based storage and other storage devices such as data tape libraries automatically with no data loss and complete chain of custody When searching for video the low resolution companion video would be the primary video footage retrieved but it is teamed with the original source video Phoenix RSM has a scalable multi tiered infrastructure where it can manage multiple storage devices across a network for the most affordable long term retention available The following is an example of a complete video lifecycle management solution The illustrated data tape library can be substituted with any type of storage device 2015 Introduction Low resolution companion yideo is readily available for fast retrieval and playback Initial HDD storage 7 Original video Low resolution companion video Data replication and migration policies HDD storage Optional s The application quickly exports the requested original video clip to the client 7 No extra retrieval steps required Original video Data replication and m
267. ime false false false Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified We We Wen We true false 00 00 05 RO000 00 00 00 from Rear Deck ROW OO 175 176 Phoenix RSM Camera Management Camera Policies Window 177 The main Camera Policies window is divided into two main panes the right pane contains the tabs you will need to populate in order to create a policy and the left pane provides an overview of all of the recording policies in the Information Repository Overview information includes the Recording Policy Name Camera Recording Computer and a Policy Description When you move your mouse over a policy listed in the left pane a small popup displays summary information about the Recording Policy There are also two modes that Camera Policies can run in Standard mode and Advanced mode After initial install of the Camera Policies application the default setting opens in Standard mode The Advanced mode reveals more features and options available to Camera Policies The Camera Policies toolbar consists of the following buttons Save all policy settings A Open the Add Camera Wizard to easily configure a camera and schedule it to record video automatically Add a new policy x Delete the selected policy m J Refresh the Camera Policies view to see the latest version of each policy displayed g Open the Camera Configurations windo
268. in installation IF you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Current Settings Setup Type Typical Destination Folder C Program Files User Information Name John Doe Company Doe Corp InstallShield 10 Review the summary of installation in the Ready to Install the Program window If all the information looks correct click the Install button and the Installing Server Bundle window displays Installing Server Bundle The program features you selected are being installed Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs Server Bundle This may take several minutes Status Copying new files _ InstallShield 11 When the installation is complete the InstallShield Wizard Completed window presents you with the options to see the readme file and log 2015 z Phoenix RSM InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed Server Bundle Click Finish to exit the wizard 7 Show the readme file O Show the Windows Installer log lt Back Finish Cancel 12 Click the Finish button to complete the process Client Bundle for Windows 1 Click the application executable from your installation disc or installation folder Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard The InstallShield R Wizard will install on your computer WARNING This program is
269. ine how much wirtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache can improve performance but at the expense of using more virtual memory The total amount of space used equals the number of data streams multiplied by the selected cache size With 10 data streams and 10 MB of cache the Vault sets aside 100 MB of total virtual memory for caching data A selection of 10 MB is usually enough From the Where can temporary files be stored box type a location for the working cache or select a location from the Browse for Folder window by clicking the Browse button The default location is lt install dir gt WorkingCache When Phoenix RSM processes files it may create temporary files for efficient performance especially when clipping video files From the How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files drop down list select how much working cache space is used for temporary files The working cache should be large enough to hold multiple large video files The default size is 100 GB 2015 Vault Management 63 wy 38 Device lt Which tape library do you want to use select one Devices Found lt No storage devices detected on this computer gt E f e Look for Devices How much memory should be used for each data stream cache 10 00MB Where can temporary files be stored C Pragram Files WorkingCache2 How much disk space can
270. ing computer selection is not valid in Camera Configurations 2015 Troubleshooting ast 2015 Issue My cameras do not show up in a camera search My camera video is poor quality How do install camera drivers removed and replaced my drives now my cameras are not recording and my video is not playable My camera is not viewable in Live Viewer when using Remote Desktop or VNC How do know if my camera is recording Possible Causes No license License is expired See resolutions for Connection fails above The NAS has run out of storage Camera is not powered on Camera is not connected to network Camera is not configured per installation instructions Auto discovery is not enabled on camera Camera does not support auto discovery Must enter IP address manually Camera is low quality Camera is configured to high compression Camera is configured to small frame size Lighting is insufficient Camera is malfunctioning Camera drivers are not required Vault has marked the drives as being offline You must reload all media 1 Open Vault Admin 2 Expand Media tree item 3 Right click on each media and select Reload Media Video is not always playable through remote connections because of hardware considerations Try another tool such as Log Me In or Team Viewer Wait 10 minutes and do a video search using Surveillance Video Manag
271. ion Repository e For manually adding cameras where the camera manufacturer or model are not found on the network Add New Cameras To add a camera through Camera Configurations see Manually Add IP Camera or Add VMS Camera Modify Camera Configurations To modify an existing camera configuration 1 From the Camera Policies toolbar click the Cameras button This opens the Camera Configurations window populated with a list of all of the cameras configured in the Information Repository 2 Select the camera to modify from the list 3 From the Camera Configurations menu select Edit gt Modify Selected Camera The Modify Camera window opens and is populated with camera parameters for the selected camera 4 Change the options and values as needed and then click OK 5 From Camera Configurations click the Save button to save the modified camera wile A For easy access to the Modify Camera Window from the Camera Configurations camera list right click a selected camera and select Edit Delete Camera Configurations To delete an existing camera configuration 1 From the Camera Policies toolbar click the Cameras button This opens the Camera Configurations window populated with a list of all of the cameras configured in the Information Repository 2 Select the camera to delete from the list 3 Click the Delete button 4 If you are certain to delete the camera configuration from Information Repository in the Confirm
272. ions of the wizard buttons and windows refer to Add or Remove Vault Wizard 2 Click Next for the Add or Remove window 3 Select Remove an existing Vault from this computer 4 Select Next for the Select window 2015 146 Phoenix RSM if Select Which vault do you want to remove from this computer Name Type HardDisk1 HardDisk eet nest am 5 Select the Vault you want to remove 6 Click Next for the Ready to Remove window 2015 2015 Ready to Remove Ready to Remove Vault Review the summary below before dicking Next Vault name _HardDisk1 A Vault type HardDisk Number of data streams 10 Maximum number of directory entries 100 Location where media is stored by default C Program Files x86 Phoenix Automatically create storage media No Amount of memory per data stream cache 10 00 MB Temporary files storage location C Program Files x86 Phoenix WorkingC Amount of disk space used for temporary files 100 00 GB Database location C Program Files x86 Phoenix Database 1 Database optimized at 12 00 AM Maximum memory used for database 1 00 GB Maximum number of open database files 100 Activity logging enabled true Activity log pathname C Program Files x86 Phoenix Logs VaultSvcActivi Maximum size of activity log 50 00 MB Recycle activity log false Enable email notification false Error log pathname C Program Files x86 Phoenix Logs
273. iption Storage pools are used to group disparate units of media They are advantageous for performing multiple jobs at once and for preventing incomplete processing An example storage pool uses several units of media which can be in different Vaults together for use by a single policy If you needed to have a Monday night backup write to several units of media you would create a Monday night backup storage pool and assign to it every piece of media for that purpose To assign media to a storage pool select a storage pool from the Storage Pool drop down list or type the name of the storage pool Define the amount of storage space to make available for the Information Repository on the given unit of media 2015 Vault Management 115 Element Description You can limit how much physical space on a single hard disk the Information Repository uses For example if the media has a physical capacity of 100 GB you can limit the amount available to the Information Repository to 50 GB by typing 50 Values greater than the amount of space available are not accepted Content Searching Search the content of files in the Information Repository Enable this feature to run content specific searches Enabling this feature increases the size of your Vault s database If not selected you cannot search for content in your Information Repository Digital Fingerprinting This option supports chain of custody management When enabled a
274. is a location other than the default location the user s home directory 2015 Camera Management 163 NYEK Before restoring a set of policies to a computer that currently has policies set up be sure to delete all of the current policies otherwise imported policies are added to current policies A Camera policies are incompatible with other client policies and vice versa If you try to import a Camera policy into a non Camera policies client or vice versa an error message appears and no policies are added Import Policies When importing policies they are added to the policies that are already in the policy editor 1 From the application s main menu or policy editor click File gt Import from The Import from window appears 2 lf you are not importing policies from your local computer navigate to the networked computer that contains the policies that you need 3 Select the policy file that contains the policies that you want to use 4 Click Open The policies in the configuration file are implemented Export Policies 1 Create policies 2 From the application s main menu or policy editor click File gt Export to The Export to window appears 3 To save your policies with the default policy file name click Save without entering a new file name Or enter a new name in the File name text box and then click Save Import Export Policy File Structure An exported policy file is block st
275. is recommended to avoid using characters that Phoenix RSM interprets as special If you need to use a character literally that Phoenix RSM uses as a wildcard the character must be preceded by an escape character Filters The two main types of filters used in Phoenix RSM are file and directory and can be applied in several of the product applications Use filters to pinpoint the inclusion or exclusion of specific or groups of files or directories Wildcards may also be used when formulating a filter For more information see Wildcards File filters operate on file names and directory filters operate on directory names If a policy features both file and directory files then both types are used File filters and directory filters can complement each other but the product processes them separately first applying any directory filters and then applying any file filters Exclude filters Implies include all meaning that everything is processed in the job unless files or directories are explicitly excluded Include filters Implies exclude all meaning that only the files or directories specified by an include filter are included in a job 2015 sa Phoenix RSM wit e f Filters process exactly what you type For example if you create an include filter for doc then the processed files are literally named doc If you want to process all files that are of a doc type the filter would include a wildcard doc File
276. is to run 2015 Job Scheduling V Sunday v Monday JlTuesday C saam v Wednesday Tithursday Deselect al v Friday v Saturday ok Cancel 1 Select the day s you want the job to run 2 Click OK to sawe the values to the policy The selected days appear in the On what days of the week text box Click Cancel to close the dialog box without saving new or changed parameters Duration window Use to set a maximum time that a job should be allowed to run Select time interval Hours Minutes Seconds 24 1 Set the duration using the Hour Minutes and Seconds boxes The job terminates after the duration time is met 2 Click OK The Should the job be stopped before it is completed text box displays the duration of the job before it terminates Click Cancel to close the dialog box without saving new or changed parameters Time Interval window Use to set the time interval to run your jobs at The job runs at the interval entered until it is changed To stop a job that is using the repeat setting edit or delete the policy For example to run a job every three hours enter 3 00 00 once a day enter 24 00 00 every two days enter 48 00 00 If you enter 3 30 30 the job repeats every three hours thirty minutes and thirty seconds from the time the policy is saved 2015 4 Phoenix RSM Select time interval Hours Minutes Seconds ox cae 1 Set the time interval for the job to
277. isk storage must also be provided to store the Low Resolution Companion files and Thumbnails This amount is normally equal to 10 of the total digital data tape storage capacity Database Disk Storage Database storage requirements vary based on the amount of stored video and the use of metadata Each server has its own database which correlates to the video it is storing As a guideline every 16 TB video storage will require 10 GB of disk storage as a minimum for the database all i f pe For assistance in determining the amount of storage needed please consult your Phoenix RSM sales agent 3rd Party VMS Integration Milestone OnSSI For minimal CPU load impact to the Milestone OnSSl image server the recording server should be configured to record in JPEG mode exacqVision No special requirements Genetec No special requirements Hardware Storage Configurations Supported Phoenix RSM Vaults support several types of storage hardware such as the following Hard Disk 2015 Introduction 15 When a hard disk based Vault is set up Phoenix RSM uses an assigned portion of a computer s file system disk space Space in this dynamic media environment can be added or removed very easily using the media management tools in Vault Admin Data tape Stackers Changers Auto loaders and Libraries A digital data tape system is a single unit of equipment with one or more data tape drives and internal shelves or slots where media is store
278. itional drive panes can be displayed by clicking the Previous or Next buttons The drive information stack rotates up or down one pane for each button click Media Loads Media Writes Media Errors Each drive pane has three basic parts e Top part Displays drive information of name or number the media technology it is based on its use and problem history and drive cleaning and life cycle information e Bottom part Displays information about the media the drive is using This is the same information provided in the Vault statistics pane e Right part Displays the drive performance and read or write speed in near real time For data tape drive the dial specifically shows the I O input output transfer rate throughout the drive For hard disk the dial shows data streaming usage 2015 Vault Management 145 Remove Vaults Use the Phoenix RSM Add or Remove Vault Wizard to remove hard disk based Vaults tape library Vaults and single tape drive Vaults from your Information Repository Removing a Vault is easy All you have to do is remove the Vault using the wizard and then reboot the computer where you have removed the Vault whe A When you remove a Vault the data in the Vault is not erased and your license file is not affected Removing a Vault 1 From your suite of product applications open the Add or Remove Vault Wizard application AddRemVItWzrd exe The Welcome window appears For complete descript
279. ity of Vault secured or unsecured 2015 Vault Management 131 Serial Number A number created at the time of manufacture mapping to a license Software Version The version of software used by the Vault Start Time The date and time of the Vault s last startup cycle Status The status of the Vault regarding errors or media requests Total Drives The total number of storage media drives within the Vault s storage device ity G Hard disk Vaults are mapped differently than other Vault storage devices Vault s mapped at a physical drive may be one to one or virtualized making the ratio higher or lower Total Errors A cumulative list of errors since the Vault has been online This number is reset whenever the Vault is restarted Total Media The amount of media online and offline being tracked and managed by the Vault Total Media Offline Includes formatted media outside of the Vault s storage that is tracked by the Information Repository Total Media Online Includes formatted media within the Vault s storage that is tracked by the Information Repository Total Robotic Arms The number of robotic devices within the Vault s storage used to move media from storage slots to drives and back again Hard disk based Vaults usually have as many robotic arms as drives Other storage devices like data tape based devices usually have only one robotic arm Total RPC Calls In The number of remote procedural calls that have b
280. ix RSM 3 Determine if the job should be stopped before it completes This option is useful if there is or could be a conflict with another process If Yes is selected the Duration window appears for you to specify the job duration time For more information about the Days Time and Duration windows see Job Scheduling Repeatedly at a defined interval Use this option to schedule jobs to run repeatedly at a set interval for as long as the policy is active To stop a policy that has been set to run repeatedly you must deactivate change or delete the policy When this option is selected the Scheduling tab displays as follows Source Criteria Destination Scheduling advanced When should the job run Repeatedly at a defined interval v How often should this job run Every 24hours Should the job be stopped before it is completed No Y 1 Next to the How often should this job run text box click the Clock button to open the Time Interval window Set the interval time for the job to incrementally run 2 Determine if the job should be stopped before it completes This option is useful if there is or could be a conflict with another process If Yes is selected the Duration window appears for you to specify the job duration time On specific dates amp times Use this option to schedule jobs to run on specific dates and times When this option is selected the Scheduling tab displays as follows
281. k1 Hep Cee Genes 4 Click Next for the Device window appears for advanced mode only The Device window enables you to define how many data streams are allowed simultaneously and how many files are kept in a directory To work through the Device window for your storage device type see the appropriate heading below Hard Disk e From the How many data streams are allowed at a time drop down list select from a range of 1 10 Data streams refers to the number of connections made to a Vault at once Several connections enables clients to communicate with the Vault simultaneously The more streams permitted requires more processing power 2015 so Phoenix RSM From the How much memory should be used for each data stream cache drop down list select between 5 10 15 or 20 MB Here you are defining how much virtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache can improve performance but at the expense of using more virtual memory The total amount of space used equals the number of data streams multiplied by the selected cache size With 10 data streams and 10 MB of cache the Vault sets aside 100 MB of total virtual memory for caching data A selection of 10 MB is usually sufficient From the When storing data how many files will be kept in a directory drop down list select between 50 500 Data is stored in files in the Vault More files provides more storage on
282. l Wizard for SoleraTec Phoenix RSM Wailes m installs Wiza wiil belep yon to tnsrall Solara Nsete Pigemiks RSM verson Koxox Om yovie computer TDU mothe mnst a lilat lone process you vi benas kediwhere to ims ta NMEN OETI AIRS M and which components to install Choices appear in a comma separated list with the default choice in square brackets Pressing the Enter key selects the default choice To continue press lt Enter gt 2015 Installation 2 Press ENTER The following appears The current location for Phoenix RSM is usr local Phoenix Would you like tomi metani Phoenix RSM in its current location y es n o b ack q uit gt y pe From this point on you have the option of using b to go back to any earlier point in the process and change your selection You can also use q to quit the installation process and exit the wizard 3 Type y to accept the default location Or type n to enter a new location If you select n you are prompted to enter the new installation directory location After typing y the following appears Hare als gi liet or rhe peCkages ayailable tor tosiallaciom Please iineliCceace the package you want to aasieellil JoN Pioresretioe ele iMibiNoe lossalcls iotle Sallsciciom Nivimlosre I as was detault choice Vand willl be chosen if you simply press the Enter key 1 Phoenix RSM Server package Hile 2 Usack oeie Si 4 Type 1 to select the Phoenix RSM Server B
283. lash is used as an escape character Use whenever you type characters such as quotation marks that Phoenix RSM interprets as code For example ExportExtensions cfg contains the following line Sample Value for the How do you want to export the retrieved files field In this line each backslash tells Phoenix RSM that the next character is literal not a command While ExportExtensions cfg contains Sample Value for the How do you want to export the retrieved files the Export Job Configuration pane displays Sample Value for the How do you want to export the retrieved files notice no backslashes 6 Close the application Once this file is created you can go back and modify it at any time with different or additional variables See the above sections for tokens values to change or add MetadataExtensions cfg Create a MetadataExtensions cfg e Create a MetadataExtensions cfg using any text editor such as Notepad Text Edit WordPad Be sure to create a Text Document txt and not Rich Text Format rtf e MetadataExtensions cfg is a block structured text file e Once created add it to the path lt install dir gt Config 2015 Customization 3s At the end of this section find a sample MetadataExtensions cfg You can implement the file as is at the path noted above to see how it works or modify the file to meet your own criteria and then implement it re Metadata Extension Block Structure The metadata
284. ld also select the specific camera and search through its video or click More Search Options to see more parameters to narrow search results For more information see Search Surveillance Video or Export Surveillance Video to export video out of the system 9 Install Phoenix RSM Client on other computers To run policies from a computer other than the one where the Vault resides From a CD ROM a Insert the Phoenix RSM CD ROM and open Setup html b Follow the directions to open the Phoenix RSM Client Bundle and install the client on the computer To install the software from the SoleraTec website a Go to the SoleraTec website and click the Download tab b In the Installation section double click Phoenix RSM to download c Accept the License Agreement and click the Start Download button d Follow installation procedures Installation guidance can be found either in the Doc folder after clicking on the downloaded executable or online at the SoleraTec website or in the Installation chapter of this guide 2015 Vault Management 53 Vault Management Vault operation is important to understand as it is key to managing your Information Repository Vaults can be set up all across your network which decentralizes your Information Repository for a safe dynamic and server less solution for managing your data assets Remember that a Vault is a CPU SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM software and storage and each Vault on the network make up yo
285. ldcard additions for example Ac appear beneath lt any gt See Wildcards Data Service Policy Destination Tab Elements Element Description Vault From the drop down list select a Vault or select lt new entry gt to add a new Vault name If a Vault is selected the Media Name drop down is automatically populated with the media on the given Vault If a new entry is given then the Media Name and Storage Pool options are limited to lt any gt or lt unnamed gt and lt new entry gt Media Name Media Name refers to the names of individual units of media in the Vaults within the Information Repository From the drop down list select the media or select lt new entry gt to add a new media name The system automatically looks for any storage pools comprised of the selected media If it cannot find any then the Storage Pool drop down list displays lt any gt Storage Pool Storage pools are groupings of media on a single policy used for a particular purpose For example if you had a policy called Night backup and it wrote to several units of media you would use a Night backup storage pool and assign to it every unit of media to use for that purpose For more information see Prepare Media Storage Pool 2015 322 Phoenix RSM Element Media Type Media Speed Description From the drop down list select a storage pool or select lt new entry gt to add a new storage pool name Determine the types of medi
286. led IP cameras Configure RTSP enabled IP cameras to create policies that automatically record video directly into the Information Repository e VMS managed cameras Configure VMS managed cameras to create policies to capture video into the Information Repository Depending on your hardware device and your product license video capture from VMS may not be available 2015 Camera Management 159 Camera Policies are used to control which video feeds are captured where video is stored when jobs start and stop how often jobs run and many other aspects of jobs This information is decided by defining parameters for a camera or recording policy Each Camera Policy created runs independently and manages all error logging job operation completion times and other information for its own computer platform and file systems Any Camera Policy can see and capture video data from any configured RTSP enabled IP camera or VMS managed camera Keep the following in mind when working with Camera Policies e The first time that Camera Policies is opened the left pane is empty Before accessing any of the tabs create a policy There can be multiple recording policies per camera but it is not recommended to have multiple policies active and running at the same time for a single camera A triangular caution symbol superimposed on a policy icon in the left pane indicates that the policy is not running A policy does not run if its Active checkbo
287. lick the left and right arrow buttons to pan the camera horizontally Pan Tilt A 2 Click the up and down arrow buttons to tilt the camera vertically wht pe Alternatively you can click and hold anywhere on the target graphic and then move your mouse to change the direction of the pan and tilt To control a camera s zoom 1 On the Zoom control panel at the right use the In button to zoom in on the center of the view Use the Out button to zoom out from the center and include a wider angle of view wet pe A camera s zoom can also be controlled using the scroll wheel on a mouse To do this place the cursor over the target graphic in the Pan Tilt area of the control panel Move the scroll wheel forward away from you to zoom in and backward towards you to zoom out A Because digital PTZ does not physically move the camera you cannot view outside the camera s original view area This means you can only use digital pan and tilt after zooming in on the live video feed To control a camera s focus 1 On the Focus control panel at the right use the Auto button to activate the camera s auto focus feature Use the Near button to focus on near objects in the foreground and the Far button to focus on objects in the background 2015 Live Viewer 247 For more information see View Camera Feeds View Camera Pool Feeds and Live Viewer Layout Live Viewer User Preferences Use the Live Viewer User Prefer
288. ll of the videos in the Search Results e Send to Export Queue Send the selected video to the Export Queue 2015 25 Phoenix RSM Menu Items Actions gt Export Queue Tools gt User Preferences Help gt Current Page Help gt Surveillance Video Manager Overview Help gt Contents Help gt Online Help Help gt Online Support Help gt About Surveillance Video Manager Description e Play Open the Media Viewer with the selected video queued up and ready to play Choose an action to perform on the videos and images in the Export Queue pane vite pe This menu can also be accessed by right clicking on a video in the Export Queue pane e Show Metadata Select to show and edit the metadata for the video e Rename Export File Select to rename an export file or reset file to the original name e Remove From Export Queue Remove the selected video from the Export Queue Select All Select all of the videos in the Export Queue Unselect All Unselect all of the videos in the Export Queue e Play Open the Media Viewer with the selected video queued up and ready to play Open the Surveillance Video Manager User Preferences window Open online help to the Surveillance Video Manager webpage Open online help with focus on Surveillance Video Manager Open the local version of online help Open the web based version of online help Open the support webpage Open the About Su
289. llow these steps to prepare new or unknown media wie Some vaults such as tape libraries or standalone tape will show media labeled Unknown_xx with xx representing a number This is referred to as unknown media These are removable media which are not known to the vault you are connected Media in this state can be unprepared new media media from another vault that is not indexed or media with an unknown format Preparing an Unknown media will erase all existing data 1 From the Vault Admin left pane click the expand indicator plus sign in front of the Vault to add media to 2015 Vault Management 111 2 To prepare new media click on Media then click on the Prepare Media button in the toolbar Or right click on Media and choose Prepare Media from the shortcut menu To prepare unknown media click on the expand indicator in front of Media to display all media in a tree Click on the unknown media in the tree then click on the Prepare Media button in the toolbar Or right click on the selected unknown media and choose Prepare Media from the shortcut menu e You can prepare multiple Unknown Media at one time by holding the Shift key or Control key and clicking on the desired media A Currently you can only prepare multiple tape media If you try to prepare multiple media that is not tape you will receive an error message 3 The options in the Prepare Media window are based on the media type of the Vault select
290. locks 2015 Customization 361 It is best to avoid using characters that Phoenix RSM interprets as wildcards or as otherwise special If you need to use one of these characters then the character must be preceded by an escape character For example This is an example using escape characters in a statement with a wildcard The following are wildcards and special characters amp For more information see Wildcards Query block Valid Token Values Description Type The metadata item s name Name lt character string gt Required Default Type Checkbox The Query type The label for the control as it will Label lt character string gt appear in the application Checkbox Default The value to load into the control by default Default Value lt bool a i efault Value ootean Valid values true false Defaults true checked Description lt character The tooltip for the control SINE Default The metadata item s name Name lt character string gt Required Default Type Choice The Query type The label for the control as it will Choice Label lt character string gt Ppear in the application Default The value to load into the control by default PEVE Sere Valid values the number of the entry in the drop down list 2015 s2 Phoenix RSM Query block Valid Token Values Type Blank ValueOk lt bo
291. lp 2 Type a pathname in the Source File text box or click Browse to open the Choose a File window e If you clicked Browse navigate to the xdl file that was previously saved from the Export Queue Click Open 3 Click Load in the Load Export Decision List window to load the Export Queue from the file Load Export Decision List window Elements Element Description Source File The file from which the export decision list will be loaded Manually enter the pathname of the file or click Browse to navigate to a xdl file that will be used SVM Media Viewer and Logging In the Search Results pane double click the file you want to view The Media Viewer window opens with a low resolution proxy video ready for viewing and all of the log entries for the video are displayed if any have been created 2015 266 Phoenix RSM L pe Remember that low resolution proxy files also called companion files are playable videos a fraction of the size of stored originals and are created when data is captured or ingested They allow for quick retrieval and viewing of stored video The low resolution proxies remain online even if their originals are offline They are entirely managed and fully searchable ing lot Nam Nam Nam Nam 2013 02 12 10 05 29 ade sida Lite feed fil 10 07 56 13 53 43 Poss Wo New Close The Media Viewer window is divided into two main areas e Media Viewer Use the Media Viewer to view
292. lt Admin Use Vault Admin and the Vault Service to administrate added Vaults manage video and storage and to prepare media and manage media on your network The Vaults can use different types of media to store all your video and data assets The Vault Admin application can be installed anywhere and it can be used anywhere on the network 2015 Vault Management 81 aye e f A Vault must be configured and running and media must be prepared in order to do any other task To access the Vault Admin from your suite of product applications open the Vault Admin application VaultAdmin exe Vault Admin window Vault Admin is divided into two main panes and it has toolbar buttons across the top of the window Most Phoenix RSM applications require you to interface through tab options but with Vault Admin you use the menu items or toolbar The left pane displays a list of the tracked Vaults and views like a common file manager application The right pane displays details for the object select from the left pane The toolbar consists of the following buttons Open Vault Stats for monitoring detailed Vault activity MM Open Mini Vault Stats for monitoring basic Vault activity i Open the Vault Security dialog box To secure a Vault means to lock it so no further media can be added to it II ea Open the Shut Down Vault dialog box for assigning a Vault offline Take Vaults offline before performing any type of maintenance to th
293. lt boolean gt Description The location of the cache to hold the clips before sending to Vault foo Default is The length of clip that incoming video streams are captured into Default 300 seconds Determine if motion detection data is captured from RTSP enabled IP cameras that support motion detection If selected for cameras that do not capture motion detection data or otherwise are not supported no motion detection data is preserved 2015 Token Value camera_name lt character string gt camera_use_config lt boolean gt Sample Recording Policy Description Default true The name of the camera Default Camera Management Use the camera information found in the Camera Configurations for the selected camera Default true If you were to export a policy it would look similar to the following 2015 p Starc Or oject cule tor poliey neme poliey name NR eie DETE type version active job_type obj_type description dtu_type local_only follow_links PLOCESS _Chiwecicorw las timestamp backup_stub backup _ data Lineker orrie dst_media_ type cet mecie speed dst_volume_ format dst_vault_name dst_media_name dst_volume_name dst_storage pool dst_volume_pack dst_local_only hovel we repeat _imecwya ll STOD Cime pre_proc_cmd PREGEDE Cki tap SATO true move Wee Camarat Record video LO false false false mt
294. lue of information with the most appropriate and cost effective IT infrastructure from the time information is conceived through its final disposition When ILM is video aware it is called Video Lifecycle Management VLM Information Repository The Information Repository is where data is stored Since a Vault is a storage device used to store files the Information Repository is made up of all the storage devices clients and Vaults on your network Ingesting The process of using Phoenix RSM clients to archive or move data including metadata from a networked computer into the Information Repository Capturing video from RTSP enabled IP cameras is a type of ingesting 2015 a Phoenix RSM Label A label or media label is a name assigned to a unit of media Assigned manually to media unless a barcode system is available the labels are used for media identification If a barcode system is in use the label name is superseded by the barcode on the media When media is loaded into a drive the Information Repository s first task is to read the label to identify and ensure that the proper media unit is being used lic File extension for a license file To be seen by the Information Repository the license file s must be in the lt install dir gt Config folder Live Viewer The application that is used to watch what is being seen by your surveillance camera Load balancing Load balancing is the distribution of jobs and data
295. ly The barcode number or label assigned to the media selected If the storage device has a barcode reader the data is assigned by the physical barcode label on the media and any other information is ignored by the Information Repository Block Size The block size used by the media unit selected Content Search Indicates if content search is enabled Current Location data tape media only The current location of the media Date Time Formatted The most recent time the media unit was formatted for use 2015 134 Phoenix RSM Date Time Last Accessed The last time the media unit was accessed for use by the Information Repository Date Time Last Written The last time data was written to the selected media Description The description from the Prepare Media dialog box Digital Fingerprinting Indicates if digital fingerprinting is enabled File De duplication Indicates if de duplication is enabled Free Space The available amount of space on the media for use Garbage Space The amount of used media space that is eligible to be purged from the Information Repository Home Location data tape media only The assigned media slot in a drive Media Name The name of the media selected The name is part of the media label Owner Displays the user logged into the Information Repository during media format Pathname hard disk and shadow hard disk media only The directory path of where the media s space actually resides
296. m size in bytes of a source file The min_file_size and max_file_size options max_file_size lt number gt are mutually exclusive Default 18446744073709551615 Specify the minimum size in bytes of a source file The max_file_size and min_file_size options are min_file_size lt number gt mutually exclusive Default 0 none Enable the application to constantly monitor its processes and select the network transmission protocol that best suits the files being processed out_of band lt boolean gt Valid values true false Default true Specify a command that runs immediately after the post_proc_cmd lt command gt job is finished Supports token substitution Default Specify a pre process command that runs pre_proc_cmd lt command gt immediately before a job starts Supports token substitution 2015 420 Phoenix RSM Token Value remove_only lt boolean gt repeat_interval lt hh ss mm gt stc_high water_mark lt number gt stc_low_water_mark lt number gt src_media_name lt character string gt src_media_speed lt character string gt src_media_type lt character string gt Description Default Purge the targeted file from the source Vault instead of migrating or replicating it Valid values true false Default false Used only in the policy file The amount of time that elapses before a job is repeated Default 24 00 00
297. m specified cameras For example suppose you have a camera pool called Doors It is comprised of all the cameras that watch over the doors of your business When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video captured from this camera pool are included There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Phoenix RSM solution may have The host name or IP address of the image server where you want to extract video See the Modify Target Camera section below The User Name if the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed This box works in conjunction with Password See the Modify Target Camera section below The Password if the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed This box works in conjunction with User Name See the Modify Target Camera section below The camera whose video you want to capture Click the Refresh button to update the list of cameras associated with the server Select a camera See the Modify Target Camera section below For Exacq only The pathname to the video storage area Type the path or click Browse to navigate to the video storage area See the Modify Target Camera section below 2015 Camera Management 223 Element Description A By default Target and Process Service runs as Local System and may not have read access to network shares Because of this be sure to configure the video storage area to allow re
298. mation see Installation Server The server contains all the applications found in the client component plus Vaults and administrative tools Server Vault applications are e Vault Service The Vault service manages the Vault s on the network The Vault uses storage space in a hierarchical manner where each level is unique and features its own access control list and other parameters This allows for load balancing automatic fail over and for media to be targeted granularly for specific uses and across multiple devices e Data Services Service Use to create policies for complete data lifecycle management in the Information Repository This service provides an easy way to migrate replicate or purge data between Vaults and ensure that data is preserved or maintained on media within a storage hierarchy Target and Process Service This service ingests data into the Information Repository and metadata is extracted from the data and cataloged in databases e Add Remove Vault Wizard Use to add or remove a hard disk Vault standalone data tape Vault or a data tape library Vault With the server set up you can optionally select the following server administration tools e Camera Policies Add cameras and create camera policies that capture live video feeds automatically on a scheduled basis e Vault Admin Prepare media and manage media in the Information Repository Vaults e Data Service Policies Create data services policies t
299. me MCN yin version SR Oa type sitecfg ip_address SMD S a USS 5 LES description elk NVR Policy meme MOC n version AEO type sitecfg pmcddisesis MN ths WSS 5 ISM description TOCENVRS policy name WL NVR version SP ele Oat type Sitecfg SE OMECICLCne Sis A72 TG oO Tek description WL NVR 3 Save the document to lt install dir gt Config naming it Site cfg 4 Launch your Phoenix RSM Vault Admin Live Viewer or Surveillance Video Manager 5 While the splash screen is being displayed a Remote Site dialog box will pop up and be displayed Choose your remote site from the drop down list e Local Network is a default choice and is always available 6 Click OK to continue opening your application Once this file is created you can go back and modify it at any time with different or additional policy names for remote sites See the above sections for tokens values to change Key Configurations Phoenix RSM enables you to use special settings to modify its default functionality These settings are called keys It is important to note that a Windows operating system uses keys differently than a Linux or Mac operating system e Windows 32 bit Keys for customizing functionality are located in the Registry at lt Local Machine gt Software SoleraTec Phoenix e Windows 64 bit Keys for customizing functionality are located in the Registry at lt Local Machine gt Software W ow6432Nod
300. medium except as specifically allow ed in the license agreement 2015 10 Phoenix RSM No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without the express written permission of the manufacturer SoleraTec 2015 All Rights Reserved Printed in the United States of America Contact Information Please contact us with any comments or suggestions regarding how we can improve our products or documentation In your message to us include the name version and comments about the product or guide and also leave your name phone number or e mail so we can contact you for clarifications SoleraTec LLC Website www SoleraTec com E mail sales SoleraTec com Phone 760 743 7200 Ext 109 Address 2430 Auto Park Way Suite 205 Escondido CA 92029 2015 Introduction 11 Documentation Overview Notes about this guide Screenshots The screenshots in this guide are taken from a Windows operating system Depending on the operating system you are running the appearance of the applications may vary slightly but the functionality is the same If viewing Help online click a screenshot image to enlarge the display and then click again to return its display to original size Blue Text Blue text that is a topic heading can be clicked
301. ment Description CD ROM Devices Information about the storage device itself DVD Devices Information about the storage device itself Hard Disk Devices Information about the storage device itself Database Subsystem For use only by Phoenix RSM engineers RPC Mechanism For use only by Phoenix RSM engineers Lock Subsystem For use only by Phoenix RSM engineers Message Detail Select the level of detail of diagnostic logs Short Provides only high level overview information about the issues being tracked For example the General Vault feature only contains client connection names Standard Provides some detail about the issue being tracked For example the General Vault feature provides additional information about the client connection times and connection types The Standard option is recommended Extended Provides a full set of details It is usually reserved to assist in resolving complex issues in low level Information Repository functions Vault Checkup Use the Vault Checkup dialog box to view the health of a Vault This tool is great to use if you suspect something may be wrong with a Vault in your Information Repository Ry py To run a Vault checkup Vault Admin requires at least one piece of media with available space and that it does not belong to a storage pool To run a Vault checkup 1 From the Vault Admin left pane select a Vault name 2 From the toolbar click the Vault Check
302. mmand Line Arguments 425 Option Description Starts the Live Viewer with the entered patrol Quotes are required if the name has any spaces in it patrol lt patrol name gt The patrol names are not case sensitive on the command line If patrol and layout are both specified then the first encountered option is used and the other is ignored Starts the Live Viewer with the entered layout Quotes are required if the name has any spaces in it layout lt layout name gt The layout names are not case sensitive on the command line If patrol and layout are both specified then the first encountered option is used and the other is ignored Delays the start of the Live Viewer by the number of delay lt sec gt i seconds entered The default is 0 no delay fullscreen lt screen gt Maximize the Live Viewer but also removes the Title bar and the Windows Start bar at the bottom of your monitor This option overrides maximize Displays the entire Live Viewer to maximum size on the screen The screen number is the screen to display the maximized Live Viewer on if there are multiple screens maximize lt screen number gt For more information see Live Viewer Job Scheduling Job scheduling windows are evident when creating policies they determine when those policies should run as jobs The jobs can be scheduled to run on various dates and times If you want to save captured video to a Vault a Camera Policy is
303. mmary and lists all files Diagnostic Same as complete but adds relevant diagnostic information e From the drop down list select a report option Use the Summary or Complete options on a normal basis and switch to Diagnostics if problems occur In the Report Options text box leave the default variables in place or type in the file name and extension to use or type a variable name using file name field variables see File Name Field Variables section below Use the Browse button to locate a file to overwrite an already existing log file Activity Log Activity logs provide logistical information about jobs Refer to the logs after a job runs they are stored in a specified location e Set Activity Log to Enabled The Activity Log text box becomes active e In the Activity Log text box leave the default variables in place Or type in a file name to use including an extension Or type in a variable name using Filename Field Variables see section below e Opt to use the Browse button to define a new location and type in the file name Enable Transmission Select for the client to constantly monitor its processes and Optimization to determine the best network transmission protocol for files being processed Leave this option selected to get up toa 20 increase in performance If the Information Repository is slow run a few timed tests to determine a setting that works best for your Information Repository 2015
304. mote read access to everyone or change Target and Process Service to run with an account that will have read access Use VMS to generate For Milestone and OnSSI only low resolution proxy and preview image Select the checkbox to use the VMS to generate low resolution proxy and preview images Currently this option is only supported when the camera is configured for jpeg mode Selecting this option may increase the workload of the VMS server Enable Record on For Milestone and OnSSI only motion detection Select the checkbox to enable record on motion detection Specify the Motion threshold the amount of time to wait for motion before adding blank frames A For Milestone only The server can be set up to delete older recorded frames from its recording database by specifying the recording retention time Any frames that are older than the set recording retention time will be automatically deleted It is important that the retention time is long enough to always have recorded frames with motion in the database or specify the maximum recording storage size instead Recording Computer The computer that captures a video feed from your camera Access Permissions Advanced mode only Ability to add change or delete rights for a camera Access permissions determine who has access to cameras and the access level When working in Standard mode the default permissions include everyone and Recorded and Live Video and PTZ Double
305. mple hard disk is a good medium to process files to because there is no latency associated with it It is ready to accept data as it is sent from network clients and it can service several clients at the same time The media hierarchy is organized as such e The highest level of the hierarchy is the Vault itself e Media units are the next level and they coincide with logical media units like data tapes or portions of hard disks e The volume level is lowest Volumes are sections of media units They can be as large as the media itself or very small On some media there can be one or several volumes on a unit There can be one or more units of media in a Vault There can also be multiple Vaults on a single host computer depending on its performance and storage pools where one or more pieces of media are linked together for a common use All managed media is configured with common elements including label header data storage area on media catalog data tape media hard disk media and virtual media 2015 s Phoenix RSM Media Retention and Purging Administrators can eliminate outdated data on supported media For hard disk Vaults use Data Service Policies to define file retention rules for removing duplicated data or for retaining source data indefinitely The same retention rules can be used even if files are never copied or moved This allows data to be erased after a pre defined period Using Vault Admin you can eras
306. mponentsGen 2015 2015 Customization Key Default standard Used by VideoComponentsGen Windows Registry Settings Key Type String Value Value low standard high Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value low standard high Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPriority Char 4 high Name VideoExtList Description Specifies which files will be considered video files and therefore processed as video files when option is enabled in Camera policies if enabled Default 3g2 3gp avi divx f4v for flvy m4v mkv mov mp4 mpg mpg2 mts mxf qt rm swf vob wmv xvid Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value lt video extension list gt lt video extension gt SEMI COLON lt video extension gt lt video extension gt lt string of characters gt Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value lt video extension list gt lt video extension gt SEMI COLON lt video extension gt lt video extension gt lt string of characters gt Sample Usage VideoExtList Char 11 mpg mxf mov Name VitPrefetchQueLen 397 398 Phoenix RSM Key Description Sets the limit for the number of 128K blocks which are initially read from a file when opened for transfer This value will be reduced if the file is smaller or the device cache size is smaller Default 10 Used by Vault Service Windows Registry Settings
307. n dialog box by clicking the Browse button 2015 Phoenix RSM From the How large can the activity log grow drop down list select between 25 00 MB 1 00 GB to define the maximum size an activity log can grow to Limit the size of the log because it can be difficult to find specific information in a huge activity log From the Overwrite the activity log when it reaches maximum size drop down list select either Yes or No By selecting No a new activity log is created whenever the current activity log reaches the maximum size Overwriting the activity log prevents against proliferation From the Where should the error log be stored box type a location of where to store error logs or select a location from the Error Log Location dialog box by clicking the Browse button Error logs are always enabled and are created when a Vault encounters a problem Error logging is supported for every Vault in your Information Repository the logs include warning and Vault start and stop information Q Logs Activity Log V Enable activity logging Where should the activity log be stored C Program Files x86 Logs VaultSvcActivity 1 log Browse How large can the activity log grow 50 00MB Overwrite the activity log when it reaches maximum size No create a new activity log when the maximum size is reached z Error Log Where should the error log be stored C Program Files x86 Logs VaultSvc1 log l Browse meren
308. n the Add Camera Wizard If your camera is not listed in the Add Camera Wizard you ll need to add the camera s information manually using the Camera Configurations window for IP cameras See Manually Add IP Camera for this procedure 7 Click Next for the Description window Description What is the name of this camera For example Front Lobby Back Lot Enter a brief description of this camera __ Help lt Back _ Next gt cancel 8 In the What is the name of this camera text box type a meaningful name to identify the camera 9 In the Enter a brief description of this camera text box optionally type a short note describing the camera 10 Click Next for the Recording Schedule window 2015 Camera Management 153 MAY Recording Schedule When do you want to record video Always At selected times xi es Gene 11 Indicate when you want to record video e Select Always to record video continuously e Select At selected times to record only on certain days or at certain times of the day 12 If you selected the At selected times option the following window appears when the Next button is clicked 2015 154 Phoenix RSM MAY Recording Schedule On what days of the week V Sunday V Monday 7 Tuesday V Wednesday V Thursday V Friday V Saturday At what time Start 00 00 v Stop 00 00 nextday v Length 24hours 0 minutes Help Go je 13 Use
309. n the Search Results pane for each video clip This advanced information may not be visible depending on the version of your software When checked thumbnail images are loaded as you scroll down the Search Results pane If de selected thumbnail images load only when scrolling stops 200 Phoenix RSM Group Searching Options Viewer Element Wait for slow media Preferred format for embedded time display Preferred viewer Enable hardware overlay Enable multiple threads for decode Description The application will try to retrieve thumbnail images event entries logging entries and other display related files from slow media i e tape Search results will be slow Thumbnails only exist on tape or other slow media Select the type of time code that displays in the Media Viewer Select the type of video viewer to drive the play back of videos The orders to use the media player are QuickTime first then VLC QuickTime only VLC first then QuickTime or VLC only y E A Ip To play back videos in Phoenix RSM you can use the supplied media player VLC or Apple QuickTime free or Pro on your computer See Hardware and Software Requirements for the latest information A Be sure to restart any media viewer that is running if you change the preferred viewer Select to enable the ability to render video directly A If disabled remote desktop or shared desktop view may not work correctly for
310. nces My export procedure e Ensure you have proper versions of VLC or QuickTime on does not complete to your computer When exporting a video segment or 100 Clip that spans a number of video files from storage one of the final steps in the export procedure is stitching the segments together The Export process gets close to 100 but then fails Search Issues Issue Possible Causes My search results do not populate with video e Ensure a correct camera is selected in the Search Criteria pane e Try searching without selecting a camera 2015 434 Phoenix RSM Issue Cannot find or add metadata How do tell if export extensions are running Possible Causes Other search options are selected which do not match any video or cameras Clear all of these selections and search again Try closing the application restarting and then press Search Ensure the camera has a recording policy configured Ensure the created camera policies are saved Go to the Camera Policies application to view the policies Check the parameters associated with the camera policy Is the camera configured to record video for the times you are searching The NAS is not running The NAS is not properly licensed A firewall is blocking access to the NAS Times on NAS cameras and desktop computers are not synchronized Metadata search options appear in Camera Policies and SVM only if there is a MetadataExtension
311. ncluding e Vault Admin e Network Activity e Locator Admin Command Line Interface LocAdminCl e Vault Admin Command Line Interface VaultAdminCl 2015 z Phoenix RSM Module Contents Server Surveillance Video A visual interface that enables users to Yes Manager search for surveillance video files in the Information Repository Also export selected clips or entire files to any computer on the network Camera Policies Add cameras capture video feeds ona Yes scheduled basis from RTSP enabled IP cameras Live Viewer View Live feeds from any RTSP enabled Yes IP camera that is on the network Cameras must first be configured using Camera Policies Data Services Applications for migrating replicating Yes and purging data in the Information Repository including e Data Service Policies e Data Services Command Line Interface DataSvcsCl e Data Services Service DataSvcsSvc Vault The Vault services applications Yes e Vault Service VaultSvc e Add or Remove Vault Wizard Windows Client Yes Yes Yes Yes No Perform the following steps to install on the Windows operating system OS The appearance of your screens may vary slightly from those shown here depending on your Phoenix RSM version and your OS Installation is quick and easy and done through an InstallShield Wizard Each wizard dialog box includes Back Next and Cancel buttons The Back button navigates you back to the
312. nd 30 minutes 1 hour and 2 hours Also select Start and Stop buttons Enabled only if camera has wiper functionality Day Night Mode Options of Day Night and Auto If Auto is selected the camera automatically adjusts to determine the correct mode This is enabled only if it is supported by Phoenix RSM for your camera and if the camera has Day Night Mode functionality View Camera Feeds If the live view option is enabled from a camera during configuration you can view a camera s live feed in the Phoenix RSM Live Viewer View live feeds from up to 16 cameras at a time To view a live feed froma camera 1 Open the Live Viewer application The Live Viewer window opens with the default layout The Title bar for each camera port reads Not in Use as no cameras have been selected 2 Expand the Cameras folder on the top right The names of live view enabled cameras are displayed 3 Select the camera feed to view and drag it into a camera view frame The camera s live feed is displayed and the camera name is displayed in the Title bar of the camera port 4 To view the feed from an additional camera repeat the step above i s 4 To move one live feed to a different camera view frame click the title bar and drag to the new view frame For more information see Live Viewer View Camera Pool Feeds and Live Viewer Layout View Camera Pool Feeds Camera pools are virtual groupings of cameras that you can de
313. nd Groups 3 FF Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager E Sj Storage i fF Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management ms Services and Applications Bis 3 Computer s Disk drives E Display adapters LA DVD CD ROM drives E E IDE ATAJATAPI controllers Li Fe lt Medium Changers lt Unknown Medium Changer 2 Monitors 8 Network adapters 4 Other devices ay Unknown device EY Ports COM amp LPT SM Processors lt SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers System devices 2A Tape drives RA Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive amp Universal Serial Bus controllers 5 In the right pane find the tape drive or tape library installed on the computer 6 Right click the tape drive and then select Properties ae s oe AS running a tape library be sure to disable the tape library Medium Changers and the actual tape drives in the library Repeat the disabling process for each tape drive within the library 2015 Vault Management 79 m Computer Management Local E a L i System Tools E y Computer H E Event Viewer Hs Disk drives Shared Folders E Display adapters E 2 Local Users and Gr
314. nding on if you ve selected a hard disk Vault or a data tape Vault Access this from Vault Properties by clicking the Device tab 1 Select preferred Vault values 2 Click OK to save new settings Hard Disk Vault 2015 90 Phoenix RSM Maximum files kept in a directory Default location to store media E Media Connection Resources Maximum number of data streams Virtual memory used for each data stream cache Working Cache Location where temporary files can be stored E WorkingCache Amount of disk space that can be used 100GB v Data Tape Vault On the Device tab for data tape Vaults change only the amount of virtual memory used for each data stream cache ae vie pe SCSI device is a read only box It indicates the hardware in use and where it is located on the network 2015 Vault Management 91 SCSI device Standalone tape drive at lt Host 0 gt lt Bus 0 gt lt Id 0 gt lt Lun 0 gt Connection Resources Virtual memory used for each data stream cache Working Cache Location where temporary files can be stored WorkingCache_Tape Amount of disk space that can be used 100GB v Device Tab Elements Use this table to help change the values for the appropriate Vault type Note that not all elements are available for each type of Vault 2015 2 Phoenix RSM Element Maximum files kept in a directory Default location to store media Maximum
315. ne to begin the search See SVM Search and Export 3 When the search is complete the results display in the Search Results pane 4 Click a video thumbnail to open a recorded low resolution companion video in the Media Viewer 5 Use the Media Viewer to review and play the video and clip portions of the video to export Click the Export button to send video clips to the Export Queue 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 253 6 Select the Surveillance Video Manager Export tab to set your Export Job Configuration options This is where you determine what system to export to where to save files and other options Click Start Export Files in the Export Queue are exported all at once See Export Surveillance Video For more information on how to search for review and export video files see Search Surveillance Video SVM Search and Export Search Search Export Search Criteria Search Results Export Queue Search using date range a October 2013 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 8 20 2 22 23 24 27 28 29 30 31 Start 2013 10 15 00 00 00 End 2013 10 18 23 59 59 More search options Camera Pool lt a M Camera Description Show video stored on iceman_Dis ha Add Search Sortby Date and Time Once you open SoleraTec s Surveillance Video Manager the Search tab is in focus and ready to perform powerful searches on stored video files As mentioned in the chapter overview the Surveillance Video Manager
316. nedeust cotadecuuech vacesudnentateessbvosadansecs 107 Vault Che CKUPp ississcssesnticsscssestcaseieviescedeccdesontsvasscusancovennsssssasoceivsancsasbecveascavesedivesedouciesonctaasecusancovenssassivsscesssoucrussuenesveavesevaessvienccess 109 Prepare MG Gia ssrin nennt eaaa eaaa saarea iasa raaraa e da aAA aaa aaa a Eea aaa aA Naaa Aaaa baase Kaaa Ed retan aa ariasi aia 110 Load Media Reload Media Unload Media EER E r E E EE E E A E A E A OE Start Vauilts MaN ua a t r a eaa r a a a a a e a aE e Ea ae a aaae aaa Ea Aaea aata 129 ED ea e A E EE A ttn ne he E E E E A A T AA 129 Network AGtivity 5 321 225 tor rnain a Eaa EA eae aana dcddescogeedvssrcyceveceuscdeosivand eceyuadensssatees cauettenedacestecs 135 TaN E TENI EST E AET A E T A AEE E ete 138 Vault Stats sik ie ieee E eee ee I ts 140 Remove Vatiltsicciicccssenc scsee eich a headend coeds be et p a deel chet Fedde ee eel ks eaa a aariaa nies 145 Camera Management 148 Add Camera WAZAl a tuts icecaddsapestedaceccnscseeee deta scucasscagdodeeit vantua sages Eaa eaae a ae arealni 149 CaMe Fa ROlICIOS a T E AEEA EAE cia uanavnddevewdenutasedateacteasteduevesdaVusivnsvpebcleteaevsacseveseietsavevneies 158 Import Export Recording Policie S ccc cccssseeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeaneeesneesaeeesaeeensaeesaeeesaeeeesaeeseaeeesaeeesaneessaeeeseeeeseaeeneaees 162 Camera Policies WING OW ressarrar innara riaa e e a ao aaia daa dea dekana aa ladain Tisai Camera Polic
317. ng digital PTZ no white target symbol will be displayed With the use of the Live Viewer any camera can have PTZ functionality vite Sif you are running Windows you can use any Windows supported joystick to control the pan tilt and zoom of a camera A joystick with XY axis capabilities is able to control the pan and tilt a joystick with X Y Z axis capabilities is able to control the pan tilt and zoom Joystick control can be used for mechanical and digital PTZ Camera Control Click the Title bar of the camera port for the camera A blue border appears around the entire camera port to indicate the controls are active 2015 Live Viewer 245 Canon M40 2012 10 29 Digital or Mechanical PTZ The top area of the PTZ control panel displays two radio buttons Digital and Mechanical The selection made here indicates the use of either digital or mechanical PTZ for controlling your camera 1 If your camera has mechanical PTZ functionality both options are available Digital Mechanical e Click the Digital radio button to use digital PTZ or click the Mechanical radio button to use mechanical PTZ A Only one type of PTZ can be selected to use at a time 2 If your camera does not have mechanical PTZ functionality then Digital is automatically selected and the radio buttons are disabled 2015 24 Phoenix RSM To control a camera s pan and tilt 1 On the Pan Tilt control panel at the right c
318. ng gt Blank ValueOk lt boolean gt Description lt character string gt Description Valid value today to insert today s date yyyy mm dd for a chosen date Default Indicate if the value is left blank Valid for String Pathname Date and Choice only A red asterisk will be displayed if this value is set to false Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Default The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value to load into the control by default Valid value a string Default Indicate if the value is left blank Valid for String Pathname Date and Choice only A red asterisk will be displayed if this value is set to false Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Default 364 Phoenix RSM Query block Type Spin String Valid Token Values Name lt character string gt Type Spin Label lt character string gt Default Value lt number gt Description lt character string gt LowerLimit lt number gt UpperLimit lt number gt Name lt character string gt Type String Description The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default
319. ng the right pane tabs De select to turn policy tips off Help gt Current Page Open online help to the Data Services Policies webpage Help gt Data Service Policies Overview Open online help with focus on Data Services Policies Help gt Contents Open the local version of online help Help gt Online Help Open the web based version of online help Help gt Online Support Open the support webpage Help gt About Data ie Open the About Data Services Policies window Services Policies Data Service Policies Source Tab After a Data Service Policy has been added the next step is to define the source where files are migrated replicated or purged from Use the Source tab to specify parameters for the policy for where files come from The point of origin can be a Vault media storage pool media type or media speed 2015 sa Phoenix RSM Source Criteria Destination Scheduling Advanced Vault Office_Disk hd Media Name lt any gt v Storage Pool lt any gt v Media Type Media Speed lt any gt lt any gt The drop down elements include a default setting of lt any gt If you leave the default setting then all information from all sources is processed for the given field For example if the Vault drop down is set to lt any gt then data from all Vaults within your Information Repository is processed Adding to that the parameters of lt any gt
320. ns for files and video that have been retrieved e Site cfg Use to work remotely on a network subnet that does not have multicast capabilities e Command line arguments Use as an alternative way for executing functionality for Phoenix RSM applications e Key configurations Use to modify default functionality settings as seen in the application interfaces Wildcards For effective thorough and quick searching Phoenix RSM offers the availability of employing wildcard characters throughout all applications Wildcards are useful for searching and filtering stored video files and file names directories and directory names and content within your Information Repository See also Filters The two types of wildcards Phoenix RSM recognizes are e POSIX standard wildcards For use in path names filtering and metadata searching e Regular expressions For use only in text or content searching For example a word in a file POSIX Standard Wildcards Use these standard wildcards when creating file and directory filters or when searching for files and metadata These wildcards are convenient to use in text boxes on windows dealing with the Vault Media Name and Storage Pools Wildcards for file filters operate on file names directory filters operate on directory name A single wildcard character represents a single variable in a query and wildcard operators search for words with variable characters The following are things to keep
321. nu Items Menu Items Description File gt Extended Import from The Import from window opens Navigate to the MetadataExtensions cfg file that you wish to import Export to The Export to window opens Navigate to the location where you want to export the MetadataExtensions Close the application Metadata Click Open cfg file Click Save File gt Exit View gt Enable toolbar Check mark by this menu item indicates that the toolbar is displayed 2015 Vault Management 83 2015 Menu Items View gt Enable Advanced View gt Enable Tool Tips View gt Refresh Actions gt Vault Stats Actions gt Mini Vault Stats Actions gt Secure Unsecure Vault Actions gt Shut Down Vault Actions gt Change Vault s Properties Actions gt Vault Checkup Actions gt Load Media Actions gt Prepare Media Description Select to access advanced options for a Vault item This advanced mode displays a couple of details Volume This details volume information on media if the media has more than one volume associated with it For example a data tape might store data on both sides of the tape presenting two volumes of media storage If advanced mode is selected a Volume icon displays with Vault sub items in the Vault Admin left pane Shut down notifications In advanced mode shut down methods present notifications of each event which ar
322. number of data streams Virtual memory used for each data stream cache Description Data is stored in files in the Vault More files allow more storage per unit of media but also slow down Information Repository performance Select a value to meet but not exceed your needs The following details the number of files that correlates with each value Value Number of Files 50 125 billion 100 250 billion 150 375 billion 200 500 billion 300 750 billion 400 1 trillion 500 125 trillion Define a default location where media is stored and managed Whenever there is an option to use a default location Phoenix RSM uses this path The number of connections that can be made to a Vault simultaneously Having several connections enables several clients to communicate with the Vault at once more streams demand greater requirements for processing power Range 1 50 Define how much wirtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache may improve performance at the expense of using more virtual memory The total amount of space used equals the number of data streams multiplied by the selected cache size For example with 10 data streams and 10 MB of cache the Vault sets aside 100 MB of total virtual memory for caching data A selection of 10 MB is usually sufficient Range 5 10 15 20 MB 2015 Vault Management 93 Element Description Location where Define where the
323. o 100 throttle lt number gt A lower setting reduces the amount of available bandwidth that is used Valid values 1 100 Default 100 The policy type of the policy file type lt alpha gt Default ds Specify the number of files F or number of bytes S to store per single Vault connection Valid values vcs lt alpha gt lt number gt e F files e S bytes e 1 Default F500 The version number of the policy The current version lt number gt f f version number is 1 0 2015 310 Phoenix RSM Token Value volume_use Description Internal use only Note Timing tokens are mutually exclusive Only one timing token may be set may set either absolute_start or repeat_interval or start_days and start_time Note Token Value pair is used for policy only Sample Data Service Policy If you were to export a policy it would look similar to the following Start of object rule for policy name Virtualization2LongTerm peliey mama MWalirewiel li maneio nZone En type Pass description on version ON eE ralsg complete irgdlae PLOCSSS zi les TEUS PrOCESSECINEC ROTES TEUS Conteng iu Iheeie ik data_paths il ceilecec Siles false diag Telge display only false dst_vault_name Dany dst_media_name ee dst_storage pool LongTerm clet mecie SpeESC Unspecified dst_media_ type dst_volume_ format dst_volume_name dst_volume_pack dt_access dt_s
324. o across You can change the default Live Viewer display by modifying renaming deleting and then saving the new layout The Live Viewer remembers the last layout opened and gives you the option to open it the next time you use Live Viewer To change the Live Viewer display 1 Click the View drop down list at the top of the right control panel 2015 Live Viewer a 1x1 1x2 1x3 1x4 2x1 2x2 2x3 2x4 3x1 3x2 3x3 3x4 4x1 4x2 4x3 4x4 1 2L 1 2R 1 2T 1 26B 1 5TL 1 57R 1 5BL 1 56BR 1 7TL 1 7TR 1 7 BL 1 7BR 1 12C 1 12TL 1 12TR 1 12BL 1 12BR 2 Select a view configuration e For the views 1x1 through 4x4 the first number represents the number of live views across in the row the second number represents the number of rows from top to bottom You can view a maximum of 16 feeds 4x4 at a time e In addition to the standard grid layouts there are other layouts that feature one large view frame along with multiple smaller view frames up to 12 The large view frame is positioned at the top left top right bottom left bottom right or center of the Live Viewer with the smaller view frames around it To save a Live Viewer layout 1 Right click the Layouts folder under the Entire Network area in the top right control panel and select Save Layout As 2015 2 Phoenix RSM 2 In the Save As dialog box type a name for the layout and a description 3 Click OK The layout name is now listed
325. o camera selected gt gt Refresh x ji caei Hep For exacq only Fill in the Storage Location area with the pathname to the video storage area Server Information Address User Name Password Selected Camera lt no camera selected gt Refresh Storage Location Browse ox cancel Help Add New Security Entry 2015 226 Phoenix RSM From the Add New Camera window click the Add New Security Entry button under the Access Permissions group box Use this window to insert a new access permissions entry These permissions determine who has access to cameras and the access level Add New Entry Name type User Entry name Rights Recorded and Live Video and PTZ ox cancel Hep Name type Determine who the new security setting for a camera is applied to or the type of rights select between User Group Domain and Everyone Entry name Type a name to appear under the Access Permissions group box Rights Select the rights granted for the new user group domain or everyone The rights are as follows e Recorded and Live Video and PTZ Can view recorded and live video from selected camera and have PTZ control Live Video and PTZ Can view live video and have PTZ control Live Video Can view live video Recorded and Live Video Can view recorded and live video from selected camera Recorded Video Only view recorded video
326. o feed area Each camera supports up to four motion detection areas This is the part of the camera s field of view where motion is monitored By default the entire field of view is selected You can change covered areas by 1 deleting current areas 2 creating new ones by dragging your cursor across the area you want covered and 3 setting detection sensitivity See the Preset Position Select section below for detailed directions for creating motion detection areas Information addition Should be set to Off It adds information such as a timestamp that is not used 2015 Camera Management 235 10 Click Set when you are finished changing your motion detection settings Preset position select 1 Beneath the video feed on the VMD area tab find the Video area setting for Preset position section Select Setup to the right of Preset position select The VMD area page for Position No 1 appears VMD area for Position No 1 Area 1 White i 2 Blue 3 Green 4 Red ON OCOFF ON OOFF ON OOFF ON OFF Detection sensitivity 4 High Each color coded section represents one motion detection area You can define up to four areas N f you set Preset position select options settings on the VMD area tab are ignored 2 Change the covered areas to suit your needs by 1 deleting current areas and 2 creating new ones by dragging your cursor across the area you want covered 3 Set the Detection sensitivity by
327. o manage the data lifecycle within the Information Repository The data services policies can classify collate and consolidate data automatically Easily migrate replicate or purge data between Vaults and ensure that data is preserved or maintained on media within a storage hierarchy Tasks the server manages are the Locator Service finding and connecting to available Vaults receiving locating storing content and metadata to and from Vaults and SHA256 checksum digital fingerprinting 2015 z Phoenix RSM Client The client contains all of the applications found in the server component except Vaults and administrative tools It can run on any computer that is not running Phoenix RSM servers Client functionality can be run from the executables from your suite of product applications Each application plays a role in your complete digital asset management solution All Phoenix RSM applications are easy to use and include many features to customize job parameters and schedules The clients operate independently of servers and Vaults Client applications are e Live Viewer View and record live video feeds from RTSP enabled IP cameras Surveillance Video Manager Use to search review and export video and metadata managed in the Information Repository to any computer on the network e Video Components Generator The video components generator specifies the quality for the picture thumbnail Locator Service The L
328. o monitor Network Activity e Click Current Clients and if there is any current working activity the computers are listed in the Vault Admin right pane You can opt to change the format of computer details listed from the Options menu gt Address Format Media From the Vault Admin left pane selecting Media displays a list of the media for the selected Vault Then select a specific piece of media from the left pane and the details of that unit of media display in the Vault Admin right pane 2015 Vault Management 133 Item Value Access Control 1 World Full Control Block Size 4 00 KB Content Search Enabled Date Time Formatted 2013 12 16 15 28 18 Date Time Last Accessed 2014 03 25 08 02 02 Date Time Last Written 2013 12 16 16 51 12 Description Digital Fingerprinting Enabled File De duplication Disabled Free Space 97 35 GB Garbage Space 0 Bytes Media Name Hurricanes Owner A Domain Users Pathname E Media Hurricanes Random Access Yes Size 200 00 GB Speed 88 Status OK Storage Pool lt unnamed gt Total Errors 0 Type Hdisk Access Control 1 The first of sixteen controls that can be assigned to the selected media Each object in a system like files or directories has a security attribute identifying it to the access control list ACL telling the operating system of access rights each user has to an object Barcode ID data tape media on
329. ocator is an essential component of communication to run any Phoenix RSM application it enables the dynamic resource allocation and it keeps the Information Repository current regardless of how large the environment is e Network Activity Use to monitor all data media and vault operations within the Information Repository in real time Tasks the client applications manage are searching digital assets for capture ingest and moving assets within the Information Repository communicating with servers for storage resources digital fingerprinting validations error and activity logging and video file location and retrieval Administrative Control Along with Phoenix RSM applications a suite of command line executables are available for managing the Information Repository When a window based session is not available the command lines can be used for scripting and running Phoenix RSM Use the command line interface only if you are an advanced user of Phoenix RSM and are familiar with command line environments Access to any Phoenix RSM functionality can be controlled fully by the system administrator Access to sensitive activities within the Information Repository such as installing opening securing and de securing Vaults requires administrator level access This allows administrators to determine who has permissions to management functionality Administrators can limit access to functionality as follows e Client access for users e
330. og file is created error log or activity log the older file is renamed and the newer log becomes the primary log file This is log file rotation You can specify the maximum file size maximum number of files to keep and the interval for how often to check if rotation is needed Logging The ability to create log entries that are associated with a certain video clip These log entries contain information about a clip such as time in and time out the user who created it date and time created bullet color associated with the clip and the title and description of the clip Low resolution companion proxy file Playable video a fraction of the size of the original video created when video is captured This primary video footage remains online and is always teamed with the original source video even if original is stored near line or offline This allows for quick and easy search and play back of video or seamless video export video to a desktop Media Recording media is a device used to store data or information Examples of media are hard disk optical disc and data tapes Megapixel HD A megapixel is one million pixels representing the number of pixels in an image or the number of elements in a digital display HD is a type of megapixel camera Metadata Data describing digital content Migrate The process of moving video and files from one storage area to another This process is managed by the Data Services Service 201
331. oken gt lt value gt This is the closing brace for the ExportExtension block The following block name defines the beginning of a Query block in an ExportExtensions cfg file Block name Description The beginning of a Query block Query Required The following tokens can be used in Query blocks 2015 Customization 353 Query plock Valid Token Values Description Type The export item s name Name lt character string gt Required Default Type Checkbox The Query type The label for the control as it will Label lt character string gt appear in the application Checkbox Default The value to load into the control by default DefaultValue lt boolean gt a nee Valid values true false Defaults true checked Description lt character The tooltip for the control string gt Default The export item s name Name lt character string gt Required Default Type Choice The Query type The label for the control as it will Label lt character string gt appear in the application Default Choice The value to load into the control by default Valid values the number of the entry in the drop down list Default the first choice listed DefaultValue lt number gt AN If the DefaultValue for a Choice block is greater than the number of Choices entered the entire ExportExtension block is ignored 2015 354 Phoenix RSM Query block Type Pathname
332. olean gt Description lt character string gt Choice lt character string gt g EditableChoice lt boolean gt Name lt character string gt Type Date Date Label lt character string gt DefaultValue lt character string gt Description Default the first choice listed AN If the DefaultValue for a Choice block is greater than the number of Choices entered the entire MetadataExtensions block is ignored Indicate if the value is left blank Valid for String Pathname Date and Choice only A red asterisk will be displayed if this value is set to false Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Default A choice statement that can be selected Must have at least one choice Can be reused as many times as needed to create multiple choices to choose from Allow the user to edit a choice option Valid values true false Default false The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value to load into the control by default 2015 Customization 363 Query block 2015 Type Pathname Valid Token Values Blank ValueOk lt boolean gt Description lt character string gt Name lt character string gt Type Pathname Label lt character string gt Default Value lt character stri
333. on storage loc e prepare media now lt yes no gt Arguments for a hard disk Vault e media name 2015 404 Phoenix RSM Argument quit reload lt arguments gt secure lt boolean gt select lt Vault name gt shut lt type of shutdown gt Description description storage pool media size content searching file de duplication store media in default location lt yes no gt if not in default location pathname prepare media now lt yes no gt Exit the application Reload media for the selected Vault Valid arguments e media name e force reindex of media lt yes no gt Secure unsecure the selected Vault from any media eject or load commands You must have administrator rights to execute this command Valid values e on e off Select the Vault for operation Close the selected Vault You must have administrator access to execute this command Valid values e extended Close the Vault after all clients and callbacks have been serviced Close all open databases e normal Close the Vault and all current connections e restart Execute a normal shutdown and then restart the Vault 2015 Command Line Arguments 405 Argument Description e emergency Close the Vault immediately stat Display status information of selected Vault timeout lt number gt Set the communication timeout value Valid values e 0 10 where 0 is the shortest 9 is
334. on the computer where they are created but the Data Service Policies created affects the entire Information Repository All Data Service Policies display and can be edited in any instance of the Data Service Policy application Data Service Policies take on many different forms being broad or narrow A single Vault can contain any number of policies that can span through multiple sites vite py The following three actions are all it takes for effective data management across multiple tiers of storage Each policy created will have one of these actions assigned to it No two policies can have the same name e Migrate Move files or video from one Vault to another Vault Use migrate to move data into another Vault that may have more space available or have better performance or move unnecessary and older data offline completely e Replicate Copy multiple instances of stored files that can be accessed for retrieval Use replicate to copy data into a storage device or to share the data with another network e Purge Remove data that is no longer needed or use as a way to keep Vaults uncluttered and clear The policy manages the scheduled purge A The Data Services Policies window displays all of the Data Service Policies implemented across the Information Repository on the network Consequently if two or more users attempt to modify a policy simultaneously a conflict occurs and only the changes by one are saved Create a Policy
335. on to display the search results as a list Each video in the search results will be displayed as a preview image filename and other basic details about the video View gt Details Select this option to display the search results as a thumbnails with details Each video in the search results will be displayed as a large thumbnail a filename and an in depth list of details about the video View gt Sort Results Choose how the search results should be sorted e The options to choose from are Camera and Date and Time e Your metadata fields are also available as Sort field options vite Sf sorting based on a metadata field SVM will sort your results based only on the first 64 characters of the field you selected e From the Sort order drop down list choose either Ascending or Descending e Click OK to sort results View gt Status Bar A check mark by this menu item will display the status bar at the bottom of the Surveillance Video Manager window It shows the number of files found how the files are sorted and how many files will be exported Actions gt Search Choose an action to perform on the videos and images in the Results Search Results pane wile This menu can also be accessed by right clicking on a video in the Search Results pane e Show Metadata Select to show and edit the metadata for the video e Select All Select all of the videos in the Search Results e Unselect All Unselect a
336. one Client Windows Requirements Windows Server 2003 SP2 Windows XP SP3 Windows Vista SP2 32 bit and 64 bit Windows 7 SP1 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2008 SP1 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Windows 8 32 bit and 64 bit Windows 8 1 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2012 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2012 R2 64 bit Processor Requirements Intel Dual Core 2 20 GHz or better Hard Drive Requirements 10 GB of available space to install and run the product Memory Requirements 4 GB of RAM 2015 Introduction 13 Third party Requirements Latest version of Apple QuickTime 7 and supported codecs to allow playing of the video with which you are working Supported audio codecs X QT X QUICKTIME PCMU GSM PCMA MPEG4 GENERIC MP4A LATM Supported video codecs X QT X QUICKTIME H263 1998 H263 2000 H264 MP4V ES VideoLAN media player VLC 2 2 1 or newer or some other video viewer Mac Server Apple Requirements Mac OS X 10 8 5 or newer Processor Requirements Intel i5 Core 3 00 GHz or better Hard Drive Requirements 20 GB of available space to install and run the product Memory Requirements 8 GB of RAM Third party Requirements None Client Apple Requirements Mac OS X 10 8 5 or newer Processor Requirements Intel is Core 3 00 GHz or better Hard Drive Requirements 10 GB of available space to install and run the product Memory Requirements 4 GB of RAM Third party Requi
337. option to define the times when video is recorded or captured From the When do you want to record video drop down list select one of the options to schedule a process Each are described below e Option 1 Always e Option 2 At Selected Times 2015 Camera Management 193 Camera Metadata Processing Destination Scheduling advanced When do you want to record video At selected times z On what days of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday At what time Start 00 00 v Stop 00 00 nextday v Length 24hours 0 minutes Always This option enables you to record or capture video 24 hours a day seven days a week for as long as the policy is active To stop a policy that has been set to record video always you must deactivate change or delete the policy When you select this option the rest of the Scheduling tab fields are inactive At Selected Times This option enables you to schedule video recording or capture on particular days at specific times 1 For the On what days of the week text box click the Calendar button This opens the Days window to select the days of the week to record or capture video 2 For the Start time drop down list select a start time 3 From the Stop drop down list select a stop time Once you hawe selected start and stop times the Length element displays the total number of hours that video is to be recorded or ca
338. or Repository are processed The table below lists all the wildcard operators only for content searching Wildcard Description Substitutes a single character or can be combined to represent multiple characters Use the for specific Any single character aiternative spellings substitutes a single character substitutes two characters 2015 Customization 33 Wildcard Description 2 substitutes three characters and so on If used in a path it cannot replace a forward slash Use within or at the end of a phrase Examples The query cell searches names containing cell lt one additional character gt cells and cello but not cell The query xI searches names containing xIl lt a third character gt xls or xlr The query wom n searches names containing wom lt a fourth character gt n woman or women The query carbon fib searches names containing carbon fib lt two characters gt carbon fiber or carbon fibre Substitutes zero or more characters or can be used to truncate multiple characters Use for alternative spellings Zero or more and an unlimited number of characters within a word characters If used in a path it cannot replace a forward slash Examples The query behavi r searches names containing behavi lt any character or number of characters gt r behaviour behavior or behavi123 zr The query patent searches names containing patent lt a character o
339. or small a moving object must be in order to trigger motion detection History The number of frames against motion measured Sensitivity How much change triggers a motion event Activity Histogram of motion activity The amount of activity displayed is determined by selected settings 7 Click the Save button when you are finished changing the motion detection settings Supported Cameras Your Phoenix RSM supports RTSP enabled AXIS IP cameras using versions 2 or 3 of AXIS S VAPIX API For a complete listing of cameras go to the AXIS online Product Interface guide www axis com techsup cam_servers dewproduct_interface_quide htm Panasonic 2015 230 Phoenix RSM When adding a RTSP enabled Panasonic camera that features motion alarms the camera settings are configured and motion detection metadata is preserved with captured video Default settings should be sufficient to meet most needs but you can manually configure parameters that affect performance wile 2 Be sure to see your Panasonic camera s specifications to determine if your camera features motion alarms This configuration is intended for advanced users and documents only the Panasonic network camera configuration For more information about the Panasonic network camera configuration web interface see your specific Panasonic camera documentation Modify alarm and motion detection settings Use the Panasonic camera web interface to set customized m
340. otion alarms for up to four individual areas per camera To capture motion metadata set up motion alarms 1 Open your Panasonic Network Camera management web interface Neer Comes 5 WV NS202A omp bamean Live Setup ZOOM AUTO MODE Oha hao a 2 Select Setup for the Setup page to appear 2015 Camera Management 231 SD memory card Camera title WV NS202A Setup menu Meee May 24 2010 v 14v 12 28 v Basic setup Time display 24 hours Time amp date HEELS Date time display format Daylight saving Summertime Camera setup Mmm DD YYYY e Multti screen setup Alarm setup Link Access LED ON Authentication setup OSD Position Upper left E Tarver setup Alarm status update mode OPolling 30sec Real time Alarm status port 1819 1 65535 Network setup Automatic installation of Viewer software ON OOFF Schedule setup Maintenance 3 Select Camera setup for the Camera setup page to appear Network Camera WV NS202A WV NS202A wo Setup JPEG MPEG 4 Cam Function Image Position Audio JPEG setup Setup menu Refresh interval JPEG Basic setu P Image capture size Camera setup maoe st 5 Normal E Multi screen setup Alarm setup Authentication setup MPEG 4 setup Server setup MPEG 4 transmission ON O OFF Network setup Internet mode over HTTP ON OOFF Cee eS Max bit rate per 1 client 2048kbps 4 Select the Image Position tab Yo
341. ould have been ingested display_only lt boolean gt Valid values true false Default false Cause job to use only a Vault local to the computer from where service is running dst_local_only lt boolean gt See OREN Valid values true false Default false 2015 166 Phoenix RSM dst_media_name lt character string gt dst_media_speed lt character string gt dst_media_type lt character string gt dst_storage_pool lt alpha gt dst_vault_name lt character string gt The destination media to be used If not specified the first available unit of media is used Default any The destination media to be used according to media speed Valid values e S0 S10 e Unspecified Default Unspecified The media type to be used for a job Valid values Hdisk Hard disk 8mm Eight millimeter tape Dds Digital data storage Dit Digital linear tape Ait Advanced intelligent tape SuperAit Vxa Exabyte Vxa tape Travan Travan tape Lto Linear tape open MagOptical Read write optical NullDevice Unspecified Default Unspecified The name of the destination storage pool Use for no storage pool name Default any The destination Vault name If not specified the first available Vault is used Default any 2015 dst_volume_ format dst_volume_name dst_volume_pack dtu_type lt alpha g
342. oups DVD CD ROM drives z Performance Logs and Alerts H E IDE ATA JATAPI controllers Z Device Manager El p Medium Changers iS Sa Storage gt Unknown Medium Changer E Removable Storage E 2 Monitors Disk Defragmenter Network adapters Disk Management oS Other devices E a Services and Applications ae Gi Unknown device H Ports COM amp LPT m Processors SCSI and RAID controllers H 9 Sound video and game controllers E System devices Tape drives H 4 Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive Universal Serial Bus controllers Caro Bika Enable 4 gt Uninstall E Scan for hardware changes Properties 7 The Tape Drive Properties window appears 2015 so Phoenix RSM Tape Drive Parameters Tape Media Capacity Driver Details General Tape Symbolic Name va Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive Device type Tape drives Manufacturer Quantum Location Bus Number 0 Target ID 2 LUN 0 M Device status This device is working properly If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the troubleshooter Troubleshoot Device usage Use this device enable Cancel 8 Under Device Usage click the down arrow and select Do not use this device disable 9 Click OK The Tape Drive Properties window closes and the icon for the device in the right pane of Computer Management should now have x superimposed on it to show the tape drive is disabled Vau
343. out the Vault s identity and capabilities based on the media resources available to it Vault Name Media Technology No Drives Active System Status Manufacturer No Drives Installed Media Unit Capacity Device Type Vault Security Status Media Units Loaded Some of the details in the pane include Vault name manufacturer device type security level applied to Vault number of drives and media information The System Status can be Nominal Media Request or Trouble and switches between the three depending on actual status e Nominal Everything is okay e Media Request Request for offline media to be reloaded e Trouble Indicates a serious problem Vault Activity pane Located in the Vault Stats upper left part of the window the Vault activity pane displays the overall performance in files per second and megabytes per second 2015 12 Phoenix RSM Vault Activity Files per Second Mbytes per Second e Files per Second Monitors performance of data transfer to and from Vaults e Mbytes per Second Displays data transfer performance from clients or Vaults Vault Communication pane Located in the Vault Stats upper middle part of the window the Vault communication pane displays connection activity Connections can be between clients engaged in job activity or connections to other Vaults during data migration or replication activity Connection types are color coded to define different activities
344. ow much memory should be used for each data stream cache 10 00MB v When storing data how many files will be kept in a directory m0 Where will media be stored by default C Program Files x86 Phoenix Media 1 Browse Do you want storage media to be created automatically M gt 0 Bytes Where can temporary files be stored C Program Files x86 Phoenix WorkingCache 1 How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files 100 00GB gt Tape Library if you are using Windows Vista or older or Windows Server 2008 or older you must first disable the tape library and tape drives in the Windows Device Manager so Windows does not interfere with Phoenix RSM s management of the device See Disable SCSI Devices e From the Which tape library do you want to use box select a device If no devices are found make sure the tape drive is connected to your computer and powered on If you are adding a Vault to a Windows computer ensure that the device or devices are disabled in the Windows Device Manager Then click Look for Devices to refresh the list 2015 Phoenix RSM Some tape libraries do not support automatic detection of their tape drives The phrase drives need to be identified appears to the right of the device name When Next is clicked you need to select the drives From the How much memory should be used for each data stream cache drop down list select between 5 10 15 or 20 MB Def
345. ow resolution companion files resolution proxy From the Low resolution proxy quality drop down list select a resolution quality of High Medium or Low From the Low resolution proxy frame rate drop down list select one of the listed frame rates Generate preview Select to generate a preview image image From the Preview image quality drop down list select a resolution quality of High Medium or Low Camera Configurations View live feeds from RTSP enabled IP cameras and record video directly from RTSP enabled IP cameras To do this you need to add cameras to your Information Repository and configure them Once added the cameras are listed on the Camera tab of every Camera Policies application on your network The first step is to add a camera configuration using SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM Camera Policies application To record video from a RTSP enabled IP camera the quickest and easiest way to do it is to use the Add Camera Wizard Sometimes you may need to capture video from a VMS managed camera or edit existing cameras configurations this is done through the Camera Configurations window 2015 Camera Management 199 Use Camera Configurations e To view a list of all the configured cameras that have been created and are available for recording e To modify existing camera configurations e For manually adding VMS managed Milestone OnSSI or exacqVision cameras to create policies to capture video into the Informat
346. ox Media can be removed from the Information Repository or labeled as offline and be tracked by the Information Repository Open the Erase Media dialog box Remove all data from a unit of media without reformatting the media Address format refers to the format that client addresses are displayed in the Vault Admin Change the Address Format to see Current Client addresses displayed in a different format e Select one of the following address format view options Dot Notation The client s computer network address is displayed Full Domain Name The client computer is displayed along with the domain and subnet names Host Name Only The client s host name and port number are displayed vite pe Use the Refresh button to redisplay the active clients Right click in the active window to activate the button If unable to connect with a computer on the network or communications are interrupted during a job Phoenix RSM waits a predefined period of time before completely dropping the connection This period of time is called the communications timeout Set a higher or lower timeout wait value to better suit network conditions should communications between components fail or hang during a job e Select a timeout value for the Information Repository 0 being shortest 3 the default 9 being longest and 10 never All values are relative a The communications timeout value can impact the performance of other components
347. p Help gt Basic Configuration Image Settings Q Image Appearance maa Image Resolution 640x480 pixels Overlay Mask Compression 20 0 100 Advanced Rotate image o wl degrees 3 Set Compression to 20 This setting does reset if you disable and then enable the camera through your product By selecting a setting less than 20 system performance may be impaired while motion is being recorded By selecting a setting higher than 20 image quality may begin to degrade Modify motion detection settings Along with video compression you can change a camera s field of view that is covered by motion detection and motion detection sensitivity 4 Select Event Configuration The Instructions page appears gt Basic Configuration gt Video amp Image gt Live View Config v Event Configuration Instructions Event Servers Event Types Motion Detection Port Status AXIS AXIS 211 Network Camera Live View Setup Help Event Instructions An Event Type is a configuration that describes how and when the AXIS 211 Network Camera will perform certain actions Event types may be set up as Scheduled or as Triggered Event types are often set up to upload Motion JPEG images to a specified destination but they can also send email activate output ports and send various types of notification messages Event types are configured in the Event Types menu Many event types require an Event Server for their function T
348. panel and is searchable content in the search criteria tab of the Surveillance Video Manager Description The description of the clip and log entry The description is optional A user can change this value by typing a new description in the text box The description is searchable content in the search criteria tab of the Surveillance Video Manager Create a New log entry After you have created a clip using the Media Viewer scissors and controls you can create a log entry to keep track of any notes that you wish to add 1 Click New 2 Change the Time In and Time Out values by using the scissors in the Media Viewer 3 Choose a color from the Color drop down list 4 Enter a title of the clip in the Title text box 5 Enter a description of the clip in the Description text box 6 Click Save vite In order to get better search results for clips that have log entries associated with them turn on Search for preview images Search for low resolution proxies and Search for related files in User Preferences Edit a log entry Any log entry that is displayed in the list can be edited 1 Select a log entry that you want to edit 2 Click Edit All of the information contained in that log will be displayed 3 Edit the information and then click Save 2015 276 Phoenix RSM e Editing information is done similarly to steps 2 6 in the above directions about how to create a log entry A User and Date Time are not ava
349. panel is available Disabled the panel is not displayed inside the side Control panel Enabled open when needed the panel is available and the functions are available when a view frame is selected The panel is then maximized Select from panel options Enabled the panel is available Disabled the panel is not displayed inside the side Control panel Enabled open when needed the panel is available and the functions are available when a view frame is selected The panel is then maximized Select the type of video viewer to drive the play back of videos The orders to use the media players are QuickTime first then VLC QuickTime only VLC first then QuickTime or VLC only vite N To play back videos in Phoenix RSM you can use the supplied media player VLC or Apple QuickTime free or Pro on your computer See Hardware and Software Requirements for the latest information This selection determines how fast video feed streams to your camera view frame in Live Viewer Changing the delay causes the video you are viewing to be delayed by that amount The default value is 500 ms milliseconds but the options range from 0 ms to 3 seconds A small delay value means the video can be viewed closer to real time but if the delay time is too small the video could freeze or hang 2015 Live Viewer 251 Element Description Be sure to change the video stream delay setting before adding the camera to a view fr
350. phics png extension If you use a bitmap bmp file the watermark image will not be transparent and it will be surrounded by a white box covering up part of the video Generate metadata xml files for output along with video If selected a drop down list appears for you to select Create multiple files or Create a single file e Create multiple files The metadata file has the same name as its associated video file but with the xml extension One metadata file per video is created and they stick together e Create a single file A single file containing the metadata for all files being exported is generated A Metadata output file box appears requiring a name for the metadata file Click the Browse button to select At a minimum the data included contain pathname file id size and the date and time modified Define how selected data is arranged when retrieved There are three options 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 283 Element Description Active only for Include full original pathnames This option recreates Different Location and the source file structure The retrieved data file structure Export to Rimage matches that of the source file For example if the source is C Accounting Marketing then the retrieved data is C Accounting Marketing Include filenames only This option ignores file folders and the retrieved data is comprised of only files A Include filenames only do not work
351. plays the Vault Host Id The Host Id information is used to activate your product key e The Installed Licenses group displays all the individual licenses assigned to a Vault The license statistics shown are Serial Type Capacity Expiration Product Type and Platform Type Click the Add button to open the Add License window where you can add a new license by activating a product key or import a license file Select an installed license from the group and then click the Delete button to remove the license from the Vault A Once the Add or Delete button is clicked the changes are immediate You can add the same license as many times as you like but the Vault Admin just overwrites the license file so only one instance is displayed in the Installed Licenses group Add license and activate product key Connected to Internet 2015 96 Phoenix RSM Once you have received your product key and you are connected to the Internet follow the steps below to activate your license 1 Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin main window select a Vault to modify 2 From the Vault Admin toolbar click the Change Vault Properties button to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click on the selected Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab 3 Select the License tab
352. pletion notice Disc type CD Recordable Number of copies 1 Start Export Element Description Export destination Define where files are exported to Rimage a This option is only available when it is enabled in your Job name Type a job name to associate a text name with the job This name appears in job logs 2015 22 Phoenix RSM Element Generate checksum for video Watermark video Generate metadata output file How to name files Description Select to generate a checksum file for each exported video file The checksum or digital fingerprint is calculated using the SHA256 hash algorithm The resulting filename is the original base name with a sha256 extension Select to apply a watermark to the exported video file When this item is selected the pane expands to show additional fields Placement Specify where the watermark should be placed in the video Select from upper left upper right lower left lower right and center Type Specify the type of watermark to be applied If Text then there are fields displayed to input the text size text color and the actual text to be used as the watermark If Bitmap then a box displays where the pathname of a watermark file can be entered or click the Browse button to browse for the watermark file vite When using QuickTime as the backend to watermark a video the preferred format for a watermark file is Portable Network Gra
353. policy used for a particular purpose For example if you had a policy called Night backup and it wrote to several units of media you would use a Night backup storage pool and assign to it every unit of media to use for that purpose For more information see Prepare Media Storage Pool From the drop down list select a storage pool or select lt new entry gt to add a new storage pool name The Enter New Storage Pool Name window opens for you to type a name Media Type Determine the types of media a policy uses by specifying a media type For example if Hdisk is selected then only Hdisk media is used Media Type is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives From the drop down list select the media type Only media types for the parameters selected in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool drop down lists are displayed If none were selected then only the media types from media available within the Information Repository are displayed Set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both Media Speed Source files run based on speed and media performance This is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives Hard disk is considered a high performance media and is assigned a high rating of S8 Slower data tape technologies are lower performance and are assigned a lower rating of S0 From the drop down list select a performance rating
354. ption The job searches for target files without processing them Lists the files that would have been processed Valid values true false Default false Specify the destination media name If you don t specify a value in this option The first available unit of media is used Default any Specify the destination media to be used according to media speed Valid values e SO S10 e Unspecified Default Unspecified Specify the destination media type to be used Valid Values e Hdisk Hard disk 8mm Eight millimeter tape e Dds Digital data storage Dit Digital linear tape e Ait Advanced intelligent tape SuperAit Super advanced intelligent tape e Vxa Exabyte VXA tape e Travan Travan tape e Lto Linear tape open MagOptical Read write optical e Unspecified Default Unspecified 2015 2015 Token Value dst_storage_pool lt character string gt dst_Vault_name lt character string gt dst_volume_ format dst_volume_name dt_access lt alpha gt lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt dt_stored lt alpha gt lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt Command Line Arguments Description Specify the name of the destination storage pool to be used Use for no storage pool name Default any Specify the destination Vault to be used Default any Currently not supporte
355. ptured per day 2015 194 Phoenix RSM Camera Policies Advanced Tab Use the Camera Policies Advanced tab to set log report and performance options This tab only displays if you are in Advanced mode Camera Metadata Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced Log and Report Options Error Log Filename R Logs P err Browse Report Options R Logs P log Browse Activity Log Disabled R Logs P act Performance Options oo V Enable transmission optimization Maintain dient vault connection for 500 Files Bytes Throttle 100 v Camera Policies Advanced Tab Elements Element Description Error Log Filename An error log file is created anytime an error is encountered during a job It is useful for troubleshooting problems The Error Log Filename text box can include literal file names or a combination of file name field variables to generate file names for logs e Leave the default variables in place or type in a file name and extension to use or type in a variable name using file name field variables see File Name Field Variables section below e Use the Browse button to define a new location and type in the file name that you want to use including an extension 2015 Camera Management 195 Element Description Report Options When a job runs one of the following report files is created Summary A header and summary report Complete Same as su
356. r Service has not stopped e See troubleshooting entry Cannot see my Vaults Libraries not available warning displays when starting applications in Linux e Libraries that are required for correct Phoenix RSM operation are not installed on your machine Install the requested libraries shown in the message My Vault is shown with e Vault or NAS is not running correctly Reboot the NAS a RPC Error message in Vault Admin Your desktop network configurations are not correct e Your NAS network configurations are not correct e NAS is on a different subnet which is not accessible receive an Rvt error when starting any GUI application Local Locator Service is not running Reboot machine Firewall settings are blocking correct network operation Windows UAC is blocking correct application operation Application was not started from Start menu on Windows Client software was installed as For my use only Re install for all users Where are the system Look in the Phoenix RSM share log files for the NAS Log files are best read with WordPad Windows or TextEdit Apple The Recording Computer field shows Not found Check that the NAS is running correctly Has the NAS been factory reset Must reselect recording computer 2015 as Phoenix RSM Licensing Issues Issue Possible Causes My Product Key or e May have been activated previously on a diff
357. r any number of characters patents patentable patented patent123 The query patent jpg searches names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt jpg patents jpg patentable jpg patented jpg patent123 jpg etc jpg substitutes for only all names containing lt any character or set of characters gt jpg Substitutes a minimum number or more characters The One or more minimum number of characters matched is equal to the characters number of that follow the substitutes for at least two characters 2015 340 Phoenix RSM Wildcard Proximity searches Fuzzy searches 0 Range searches TO Description substitutes for at least three characters and so on If used in a path it cannot replace a forward slash Use within or at the end of a word Examples The query carbon fib searches for carbon fiber carbon fibre carbon fibers carbon fibres and carbonfib123 The query actua searches for filenames containing actua lt four or more additional characters gt actuarial actuaries actualization actua12345 xls but not actual Use a proximity search to find words that are within proximity to one another To execute use the tilde symbol and a value at the end of a phrase Example To query for compliance and December within 10 words of each other use compliance December 10 Use a fuzzy search to find an appro
358. r any storage pools comprised of the selected media If it cannot find any then the Storage Pool drop down list displays lt any gt Storage Pool Storage pools are groupings of media on a single policy used for a particular purpose For example if you had a policy called Night backup and it wrote to several units of media you would use a Night backup storage pool and assign to it every unit of media to use for that purpose For more information see Prepare Media Storage Pool From the drop down list select a storage pool or select lt any gt to use any available storage pool For more information see Search Surveillance Video and Surveillance Video Manager Export Surveillance Video After you have searched for reviewed and selected the video clips to export from the Surveillance Video Manager Search tab and the videos are in the Export Queue use the Suneillance Video Manager Export tab to export the video in different ways Access the Export window panes by clicking the Export tab at the top of the main Surveillance Video Manager application window Depending on your system the following options may or may not be available for you to select from The contents in the Export Job Configuration pane are dynamic depending on the Export Destination chosen Work your way through the Export Job Configuration pane parameters Local File System The Export Destination of local file system is the default setting for this pane Populate
359. r directory at that pathname is a match to the applied filter If Yes use the Include Exclude value of the filter to determine the final process value If No the directory can still be walked to look for further matches Walk Determine if the tree will be walked further down in search of a match Files are never walked Filter HAF HH1 H1 D1 D2 H1 D1 D2 D1 D2 H Host D Directory F File Filter Examples 2015 Pathname H1 D1 F 1 H1 D1 F 1 H1 D1 D2 F 1 H1 D1 D2 D3 F 1 H1 D1 D2 D3 F 1 H1 D1 D2 F 1 H1 D1 F 1 H1 D1 D2 D3 F 1 H1 D1 F 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Process No No No No No No No No No Walk 348 Phoenix RSM If you had a directory that contained several different file types and you want to process all of the files in the directory except jpg files you can create an exclude filter for files with a jpg extension In the following example denotes exclude asterisk is the wildcard symbol for all jpg is the file extension subject to the prefixed symbols The left column lists all the directory files the center column shows the applied filter and the right column shows the processed files Notice that the jpg files are not processed Files in specified directory Elevator design 12502 vsd Elevator design rev 20502 vsd Elevator design rev 21502 vsd Part345X xls Part2
360. r example if the job is to run on Thursday type t 1 Default mtwtfss Used only in the policy file Specify the time the job should start for each defined start day in start_time lt hh mm ss gt start_days Default 0 0 0 midnight Used only in the policy file Specify the date and time the job is to stop The date and time entered is relative to the start of the job stop_time R lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt 2015 42 Phoenix RSM Token Value summary lt boolean gt throttle lt number gt type lt alpha gt ves lt alpha gt lt number gt version lt number gt volume_use Description Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 no stop time Print the start and stop times and final statistics of the job to the file indicated by the list_pn option above Valid values true false Default true The throttle controls the amount of bandwidth used by jobs and the speed that files are sent to Vaults Throttle values are relative to Information Repository capacity and range from 1 to 100 A lower setting reduces the amount of available bandwidth Valid values 1 100 Default 100 The policy type of the policy file Only ds is valid for Data Service policies Specify the number of files F or number of bytes S to store per single Vault connection Valid values e F files e S bytes e 1 0 Default F500 The version n
361. r performance with the flexible Information Repository design to eliminate a single point of failure If there is more than one Vault available clients can divide use of the available Vaults They can fail over to other Vaults should a Vault fail The same logic applies if there is more than a single tape based Vault containing tapes with the same label For example you can move media freely between Vaults of the same type If a tape is taken out of one Vault and inserted into another the Information Repository automatically locates the data If a tape library is full a second library can be brought online seamlessly The result is a balanced Information Repository with two libraries that are accessible to the network Load Media Manage your media by loading media reloading media or re indexing media Use each in the following ways 2015 Vault Management 124 Load Media e To add previously created media to a Vault e To re load media that has been ejected at some point in time and is not tracked If you attempt to load unprepared media to a Vault the operation will fail Reload Media e To add offline but tracked media back to the Information Repository When reloading media the Vault uses its database for the media unless it finds corruption or re indexing is forced Use to reload media to the Vault See Reload Media Re index Media e Rescan data on the media If media becomes unreliable then re index it To re index med
362. r the application are displayed Depending on your product you may see options to e Enable Rimage Select to enable the Configure button Use the Rimage Export Configuration window for configuring Rimage to publish video files See the following section e Enable Ftp Site The options selected are then displayed on the Export tab gt Export Job Configuration pane gt in the Export Destination drop down list The Local File System selection is always available Save your settings 22 Phoenix RSM Group Element Description Cancel Close the window without saving modifications Help Open help For more information see SVM Search and Export SVM Media Viewer and Surveillance Video Manager Rimage Configuration window Configure for Rimage export using the Rimage Configuration window This process enables you to export or save files to a Rimage system Access the Rimage Configuration window from the User Preferences window Under Export Destination select Enable Rimage and then click the Configure button 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 293 Local view xport folder Browse Network Publisher Orders folder Browse Remote View Export folder Browse Disc label Browse User Assigned Merge Fields Number of fields 4 Save configuration for all users Save Cancel Element Description Local View Export The view of the export folder on the Phoenix RSM client folder
363. re from VMS may not be available depending on your hardware device and your product license The supported VMS managed solutions are Milestone XProtect OnSSI and exacqVision To configure a Milestone OnSSI or Exacq managed camera AN You must be in Advanced Mode to add a VMS camera 1 From the Camera Policies View menu select Enable Advanced Mode 2 From the Camera Policies toolbar click the Cameras button The Camera Configuration window appears 3 From the Camera Configuration window click the Add button The Add New Camera window appears Fill in the necessary areas by using the table below 2015 Camera Management 219 Camera Pool lt none gt Target Camera Server Address User Name Password Camera lt no camera selected gt Use VMS to generate low resolution proxy and preview image Enable Record on motion detection Motion threshold se fe seconds Recording Computer Access Permissions Rights Name Type Ba O recorded and Live Video and PTZ Everyone Everyone OnSSI managed camera image 2015 220 Phoenix RSM Camera Pool lt none gt Target Camera Server Address User Name Password E Camera lt no camera selected gt Use VMS to generate low resolution proxy and preview image Enable Record on motion detection Ca Motion threshold 5 fe Seconds cece Conte
364. ready exist and a report named Job_Report log If a path with variables for the file name is typed for example R Logs P_from_ H_on_ D_at_ T the system generates the report destination folder and a report where policy name host name date and time are populated with the actual details from your Information Repository and job The following are the variables to use When using multiple variables separate them from each other with an underscore _ Variable Description P or Pn Policy Name H or Hn Host Name D Date yyyy mm dd Dy Year Dm Month Dd Day T Time hh mm Th Hour Tm Minute Ts Second R or Rn Root Pathname Valid only at the beginning of a string Customization SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM has many strengths for managing your digital data assets One of the key benefits is the ability to customize Phoenix RSM and really make it your own so that it is the best solution it can be for your specific needs 2015 332 Phoenix RSM The customization topics are intended for advanced users and are easy to use once mastered Phoenix RSM applications are highly customizable through use of the following items e Wildcards Phoenix RSM supports the use of wildcards for more efficient data asset searches e Filters Make use of filters during data asset searches with or without wildcards to include or exclude specific or groups of files or directories e ExportExtensions cfg Use to customize export optio
365. reating a policy Make one modification or change all controls 1 Double click the policy name in the Data Service Policy window Policy Name pane 2 Optional Type a new name in the Policy Name text box 2015 Data Management 299 3 Optional Type a modified description in the Description text box 4 Optional Select a Policy Type 5 Optional Select the policy as active or de select the Active checkbox if you do not want the policy to run 6 Click OK to accept modifications and the window closes 7 Optional Modify the parameters as needed on each Data Service Policy window tab for the policy See the subsequent sections for details 8 From the Data Service Policy window click the save icon to keep all policy settings and implement the policy To modify a policy s parameters see the corresponding Data Service Policy window tab Create a Policy and Modify a Policy Elements Elements Description Policy Name The name typed here becomes the name of the new Data Service Policy Description Text box to type a short description about the policy The description should tell you something about the policy so you know what it does without having to open it Policy Type Select between Migrate Replicate and Purge Migrate Set the policy up to move files from one location to another one Vault to another Vault Once the data is safely moved the original stored copy is deleted immediately vite
366. rec_mot_threshold_sec lt integer gt Sample Cameras cfg File 2015 POlilcy mame NPeimesomie sje sO type version active name description model manufacturer pool user name password WES capteze vizi Iive view wall mgmt_url Camera Management Description The RTSP URL for capturing low resolution video feeds Default Enable the video capture LRP URL Valid values true false Default false The RTSP URL used to capture video from the camera Default Enable the VMS Milestone or OnSSI to generate the LRP Valid values true false Default true Enable record on motion detection Valid values true false Default false The motion detection threshold Default 5 Seamer o Llyn ee Panasonic sp306 Wh ISP SOG WPamcs Omedeeu admin JEL SHA rtsp 192 168 5 103 MediaInput h264 rtsp 192 168 5 103 MediaInput h264 Naess LIZ 6S S lOs 7 207 208 Phoenix RSM Camera Management 209 video capture url Wess 12 168 S 242 lise moega sicko liva view wri Viteo 192 168 55242 live moeg Bca mgmt_url Wineries WO AMS8i S Bays frame width 0 frame height 0 ptz enable erue live view_enable true mgmt_enable true stream_over_ tcp ralge owner um host id 00000000000000000000000000000000 hostname uu AGS 0008001901010800 end of object rule for Camera Sh
367. rements Latest version of Apple QuickTime 7 and supported codecs to allow playing of exported video Supported audio codecs X QT X QUICKTIME PCMU GSM PCMA MPEG4 GENERIC MP4A LATM Supported video codecs X QT X QUICKTIME H263 1998 H263 2000 H264 MP4V ES VideoLAN media player VLC 2 2 1 or newer or some other video viewer Linux Server Linux Requirements Red Hat 7 2 or newer Fedora Core 12 or newer Processor Requirements Intel Dual Core 2 20 GHz or better Hard Drive Requirements 20 GB of available space to install and run the product Memory Requirements 4 GB of RAM Third party Requirements None 2015 a Phoenix RSM Client Linux Requirements Red Hat 7 2 or newer Fedora Core 12 or newer Processor Requirements Intel Pentium IV 3 40 GHz or better Hard Drive Requirements 10 GB of available space to install and run the product Memory Requirements 2 GB of RAM Third party Requirements None Network Multicast packet routing is required between all server and client machines Vault Disk Storage Disk only Vault Storage is required on all servers In case of disk only configurations sufficient storage must be provided to store all original video for the required retention period Disk and Digital Data Tape In a mixed storage environment of disk and digital data tape sufficient disk storage must be provided to store original video for period which it is required to be stored on disk Additional d
368. requires more Information Repository resources e From the How much virtual memory can the database use drop down list select between 256 MB 2 GB For best Information Repository performance select a value that does not exceed 75 of the physical memory on the computer 2015 Vault Management 69 i Database Where will the database be stored C Program Files x86 Database 1 Browse At what time daily do you want the database optimized 2a oon awa How many database files can be opened at a time 100 v How much virtual memory can the database use 10068 Hep lt Back Cancel 6 Click Next for the Logs window appears for advanced mode only Use to define where activity and error logs are written to e Select Enable activity logging to activate logging functionality Activity logs provide a security audit trail for these events Vault start Vault stop file read file write file create file delete media load media unload and media erase For these events the name and IP of the user who executed the event and the date and time the event was executed are reported Activity logging is optional but if activated they create in a tab delimited format and can be viewed in any application that supports the format such as Microsoft Excel From the Where should the activity log be stored box type a location of where to write activity logs or select a location from the Activity Log Locatio
369. resident of any such country or on any such list and will not transfer the Softw are to any of the foregoing 8 U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Softw are is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS The use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c 1 ii of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Softw are clause at 52 227 7013 9 INCLUDED SOFTWARE This product can be configured to use QuickTime softw are Copyright 2009 Apple Inc All rights reserved This product can be configured to use VLC media player softw are Copyright VideoLAN team All rights reserved This product uses w xWidgets softw are Copyright 1998 2005 Julian Smart amp Robert Roebling et al This product can be configured to use FFmpeg softw are Copyright FFmpeg project Legal Disclaimer The manufacturer provides this manual as is makes no representations or w arranties w ith respect to its contents or use and specifically disclaims any expressed or implied w arranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes to the content of this manual at any time w ithout obligation to notify any person or entity of such changes The softw are described in this document is furnished under a license agreement The softw are may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement It is against the law to copy the softw are on any
370. review image Valid values High Medium Low Default Medium Capture ingest video files so they are readable by Phoenix RSM search applications Valid values true false Default false Save a copy of the closed captioning data in a location specified by vid_save_closed_caption_dir_pn Valid values true false Default false The path where the closed captioning file is saved Default path 173 174 Phoenix RSM vid_save_low_res_ proxy lt boolean gt vid_save_low_res_proxy_dir pn lt pathname gt vid_save_preview_image lt boolean gt vid_save_preview image dir pn lt pathname gt Save a copy of the low resolution proxy video at the location entered in vid_save_low_res_proxy_dir_pn Valid values true false Default false The path where the copy of the low resolution proxy video is saved Default path Save a preview image at the path entered in id_save_preview_image_dir_pn Valid values true false Default false The path where the copy of the preview image is saved Default path Note Timing tokens are mutually exclusive Only one timing token may be set In other words you may set either absolute_start or repeat_interval or start_days and start_time Note Token Value pair is used for policy only Camera Token Value camera_cache_pn lt character string gt camera _clip duration lt integer gt camera_motion_detect
371. riting to tapes A value of 0 zero indicates that a default value supplied by the host operating system is used Default 0 The amount of memory in megabytes allocated for the temporary storage of incoming data Default 10 The SCSI library device or stand alone drive to be managed by the Vault This option is only valid for data tape library Vaults and stand alone tape drive Vaults The SCSI device ID string is composed as follows lt Manufacturer gt lt Product ID gt lt Serial Number gt Default The path to the file where all console activity is written Default dewconsole The number of database files that can open simultaneously There is one database file per volume As database files stay open the service accesses the database files faster without extensive file opening Default 100 Limit how much virtual memory in megabytes the database uses For best Information Repository performance select a value that does not exceed 75 of physical memory on the computer Default 1024 1 GB The time the database is optimized daily Default 00 00 midnight 2015 Command Line Arguments 409 Token Value The path to the folder where database files are stored Ensure files are stored on a local hard db_pn lt pathname gt disk Default lt usr local Phoenix gt Database diag lt boolean gt Run the service in diagnostic mode All internal activity displays on the local
372. rk together in a single location Once logs have been created they become searchable content and can be entered as search criteria in the main Search tab of the Surveillance Video Manager Logging Blue can i King lot Nam 7 5 Nam 00 04 13 D Nam OF 00 04 49 Mr J ves the office Nam gt Update New 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 273 List of Log Entries This list displays each log entry and is organized chronologically according to the clip start time Each entry in the list will have a colored bullet the start date and time of the clip the title and the user who created the log entry Select a log from this list to display all of its information and to view edit or delete it Logging Blue can er marking lot Nam Nam Deliv man arrives Nam Mr Jones leaves the office Nam To access the shortcut controls for managing the list of log entries right click on a selected entry Select from the following options e New Create a new log entry e Edit Edit the selected log entry e Delete Delete the selected log entry e Export Send the log entry and the clip associated with it to the Export Queue e Save As Save the log entry as a text file txt This file will contain all of the basic information about the log entry and can be viewed independent of the video clip Information about Selected Log Entry The information displayed about a selected log includes information about the clip and no
373. ructured but free from any column or order formatting The tokens listed below specify job criteria By default policy files are exported to and imported from the locations below Camera Policies lt install dir gt Config CameraPolicies cfg Files that contain policies are formatted as follows Each policy is a single block The beginning of each block is indicated by policy_name lt policy name gt policy name lt policy name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt 2015 164 Phoenix RSM policy name lt policy name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Token Value Pairs A token is a job attribute that is given a value to determine how a job runs Depending on your current software version some of the Token Value pairs may not apply Token Value act_log_enabled lt boolean gt act_log_pn lt pathname gt absolute_start lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt active lt boolean gt admin_ pn lt pathname gt any_user_retrieve lt boolean gt backup_ data backup_ stub Description Enable the creation of activity logs Valid values true false Default false Define the path for the activity log Supports token substitution Default path R Logs P act The exact start time and date that the job is to run Multiple absolute start tokens may be entered 2 Define if the policy is activ
374. run using the Hours Minutes and Seconds boxes The clock for the interval begins as soon as you sawe the policy 2 Click OK Click Cancel to close the dialog box without saving new or changed parameters Period of Time window Use to search for files that have been modified within a defined period of time Select period of time Year Month Day Hour Min Sec 0 1 15 0 0 0 E E K ok Cancel 1 Enter a period of time in terms of years months days hours minutes or seconds Enter any combination or up to a maximum period of 10 Years 100 Months 1000 Days 100000 Hours 1000000 Minutes and 1000000 Seconds 2 Click OK and the text box where you started from displays the value entered Click Cancel to close the dialog box without saving new or changed parameters Troubleshooting The following are frequently asked questions and common issues that you may come across during the course of using SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM The categories listed below mention the issues and then discuss the possible causes to lead you towards a resolution See the appropriate heading for details Vault Issues Issue Possible Causes Cannot see my Vaults e Check that the Surveillance Feature is enabled and the NAS is running e Check that NAS has a static and valid IP address 2015 Troubleshooting 4 Issue Possible Causes Check that multicast routing is enabled if using a smart switch Is ther
375. rveillance Video Manager window For more information see Search Surveillance Video and Export Surveillance Video 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 257 Search Surveillance Video The Surveillance Video Manager is designed to support your business with powerful search capabilities and review of surveillance video With Phoenix RSM all of your video assets are fully managed The acts of finding reviewing and selecting video are the first steps to exporting your video You can export entire videos or just clips of interest The following are instructions to give you a better idea on how to search for review and then select video for export using the Surveillance Video Manager tool 1 Launch the Surveillance Video Manager 2 The Surveillance Video Manager opens with the Search tab in focus In the Search Criteria pane begin your search for video by selecting a date range camera type or opt for more search options Work your way through the search criteria by entering values for the search type e More search options include Camera Pool Camera Description Show video stored on Show video captured by this computer Show video stored on this media and Show video stored in this storage pool Search Carry out either broad or specific searches using this search tool Define fewer search parameters for a broader set of results or define more parameters for more relevant search results wie In order to get bet
376. s execute permission Ensure Perl or Python are installed if needed and the path to find them is set up correctly Possible Causes Your SAN or NAS may have become unavailable When this happens the Phoenix RSM media resident on the SAN or NAS are marked as offline They need to be brought back online using Vault Admin Right click on each offline media and select Reload media Check the default location for the media it may have changed Check for correct paths to media Check number of files in throughput Check the size of files in throughput Check if there is congestion on the network Operating system determines the throughput speed Possible Causes You must reboot your desktop computer if it changes networks or addresses Disable sleep mode on your computer Issue Numbers rather than policies are in Host IDs When loading and installing a new version to Apple it does not update correctly Problems with network connectivity and my Apple laptop Live Viewer causes my CPU to respond slowly or get a wait screen When searching it cannot find files that other people see on the same network Can t run on Windows 2000 or older My Data Service Policies do not run to completion files are not moved Cannot find software when making advanced changes to the registry Error Messages 436 Phoenix RSM Possible Causes Check to see if the Locator Service or Services have
377. s Search tab includes three panes to easily fulfill all your search and export needs e Search Criteria Use to select and enter minimal or extensive search parameters to obtain relevant search results Click the Add button to append more search parameters for a more focused search Click the Search button to execute a search on the Information Repository e Search Results Displays found videos based on Search Criteria Right click on a thumbnail to choose an action to perform Double click a thumbnail to view a low resolution proxy video in a Media Viewer The Media Viewer offers the capability to select parts of video clips for export At the bottom of this pane a total number of items found displays and a sort filter Click a sort option to help locate your exact file A To play videos in the Media Viewer you can use the supplied media player VLC or Apple QuickTime version 7 or newer free or Pro needs to be installed on your computer For viewing surveillance video VLC works best e Export Queue Displays videos selected for export Right click on a thumbnail in the Export Queue to choose an action to perform 2015 254 Phoenix RSM s E fe pe Maximize the Search Results pane to allow maximum viewing area by minimizing the Search Criteria and Export Queue panes To minimize either the Search Criteria or Export Queue pane move the mouse pointer over the split line and click when the pointer becomes a hand To maximize the p
378. s are to be deleted from the local system when the command is complete DeleteWhenD lt boolean gt gen SE mie aia Valid values true false Default true The tool tip for the label Description lt character string gt Default The path to where the files are exported DestinationPathname lt pathname gt Default Define how files are named Valid values Original AtSelection FileNaming lt alpha gt eNaming lt alpna FilenameOnly Default Original The label found in the Export Destination box Label lt character string gt Default Export Extension When files are overwritten Overwrite lt alpha gt Valid values Never Always lfNewer Default Never Define if original security settings are restored RestoreSecurity lt boolean gt Valid values true false 2015 352 Phoenix RSM Default true Define times it is used RestoreTimes lt boolean gt Valid values true false Default true Query section of the Export Extensions Block Query block statements describe the controls that appear on the application You may have any number of queries Query lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Query token gt lt value gt token gt lt value gt token gt lt value gt token gt lt value gt token gt lt value gt t
379. s cfg file in lt install directory gt Config Ensure that the MetadataExtensions cfg file is on every computer where it would be modified Look in documentation for instructions on creating the needed files The extension is a piece of user code that is invoked when exporting files It could be a shell script Perl script compiled program built in utility or something similar 1 Develop and debug your script in a standalone environment Run it from a terminal or command prompt before integrating it with SVM 2 The script should send logging to the screen or a file At the least it should log any input parameters to a file so you can see if it is running correctly or at all 3 Try running a simple alternative program from SVM to see if the framework is set up correctly It could do something as simple as echoing text to the screen or touching a file 2015 Troubleshooting 435 Issue Media Issues Issue With SAN or NAS my media goes offline With unloaded media cannot get back to it or find it My data tape drive is slow Network Issues 2015 Issue Nothing works after change my network address Nothing works after my computer wakes from sleep mode Possible Causes 4 Many times problems are path or permission related especially if the extension script is developed on a different machine than the final target Make sure your script is in the Phoenix RSM Bin directory and ha
380. s in use Adding a camera and recording video setup 1 From your suite of product applications open the Camera Policies application CameraPolicies exe From the Camera Policies toolbar click the Wizard button The Welcome window appears Each wizard dialog box includes Back Next Help and Cancel buttons The Back button navigates you back to the previous dialog box except on the Welcome window and the Next button accepts current values and advances you to the next window in the wizard The Help button opens documentation and the Cancel button closes the wizard without saving values The About button appears on the first wizard window to provide information and the Finish button appears on the last wizard window to complete the process iis Welcome to the Add Camera Wizard This wizard helps you add and schedule a new camera You may need to run this wizard with administrative rights To continue click Next 2015 Camera Management 151 2 Click Next for the Camera Information window a Camera Information Find cameras on my network to populate the information below Find Cameras Select the manufacturer and model AJR Technology asrneoos What is the IP Address 255 196 4 100 What credentials are needed to access this camera User Name Password Test Camera Camera NotListed Help Siac emai 3 To add camera information either click the Find Cameras bu
381. s user manual for password setting or for resetting the camera Set the Live Viewer video stream delay value to a larger value to prevent the image from freezing especially on slow frame rate high definitions cameras 1 Open Live Viewer 2 Select camera view frame 3 From the Tools menu select User Preferences 4 From the Video Stream Delay drop down list select a larger value such as 700ms or greater 5 Click Save 2015 Troubleshooting 433 Video Issues Issue Possible Causes I am running out of e Default Data Service Policy purge named NAS storage for video RemoveOldVideo has been disabled or deleted Either enable it or create a new purge policy e Other NAS applications are using up storage Install another NAS to store more surveillance video My search results e Thumbnails are disabled in recording policy thumbnails look like a fake picture e Video from camera is not in a supported format When I export video e Video format is not supported by your video player Try why can t I play it VLC e Video is corrupted from camera Cannot see thumbnail Ensure the Generate low resolution proxy and or low resolution Generate preview image options are selected In companion proxy Camera Policies on the Processing tab video e Ensure the Generate low resolution proxy and Generate preview image options are selected from the Camera Policies window gt Tools menu gt User Prefere
382. showing the Information Repository is waiting for a connection slot Green line pulsing The client is waiting for a unit of media to be moved into a drive This is common with data tape and optical libraries White line stationary A client connection is idle waiting for resources Blue line stationary The client status is unknown Green line moving The Information Repository is transferring data the line direction indicates the way data is moving Blue line moving A media operation is in progress load unload prepare erase etc Mini Vault Stats Mini Vault Stats provides a high level perspective of Vault activity through a graphical display of Vault performance when data is transferred from clients or between Vaults on the network To access Mini Vault Stats Or 1 From Network Activity double click a Vault label or symbol From Network Activity move the mouse pointer over a Vault symbol and right click 2 From the shortcut menu select Mini Vault Stats 2015 Vault Management 139 Vault Performance Files per Second Vault Name Ss s as peene Security Status aa a On the Mini Vault Stats window the Files per Second monitors performance of data transfer between Vaults and the Mbytes per Second displays data transfer from clients The display at the bottom right of the Mini Vault Stats window shows Nominal Media Request or Trouble e Nominal Everything is okay e Media
383. sing Vault Properties After adding a Vault the next step is to prepare media for your Vault and Information Repository i a f i running the wizard in standard mode not all of the wizard windows appear for you because the wizard uses default values for setup The screenshots below have advanced mode selected so you can see all wizard windows Adding a Vault 1 From your suite of product applications open the Add or Remove Vault Wizard application AddRemVItWzrd exe The Welcome window appears Each wizard dialog box includes Back Next Help and Cancel buttons The Back button navigates you back to the previous dialog box except on the Welcome window and the Next button accepts current values and advances you to the next window in the wizard The Help button opens documentation and the Cancel button closes the wizard without saving values The About button appears on the first wizard window to provide information and the Finish button appears on the last wizard window to complete the process 2015 Vault Management 57 Welcome Welcome to the Add or Remove Vault Wizard This wizard helps you add a new vault to or remove an existing vault from your computer You must run this wizard with administrative rights To continue dick Next fie meatal 2 Click Next for the Add or Remove window e Select either Add a new Vault to this computer or Remove an existing Vault from this computer Depending
384. splays a list of drives in the Vault Then select a specific drive from the left pane and the details about that drive display in the Vault Admin right pane Item Value Access Control 1 World Read Write Block Size 4 00 KB Current I O Rate 0 Bytes sec Location 1 Manufacturer Test Media in Drive Empty Total Errors 0 Type HardDisk Access Control 1 The first of sixteen controls that can be assigned to the selected media Block Size The block size employed by the media when it is accepting data Current I O Rate The rate at which data is being written to media Last Cleaning data tape media only The last time the media has been physically cleaned Location The slot number in the drive that the media occupies Manufacturer The name of the company that manufactured the drive Media in Drive The media s assigned name Total Errors The number of errors a unit of media unit has generated Total Loads data tape media only The total number of times a unit of media has been physically loaded into the drive Type The type of drive Network Activity Network Activity graphically represents in real time each client and Vault on the network It works together with the Vault Stats and Mini Vault Stats windows to monitor all data media and Vault operations within the Information Repository 2015 136 Phoenix RSM aye a pe Remember that a Vault is a storage device used to stor
385. stance number List all valid command line arguments for the service Display the current version information Cause the VaultSvc to scan the local computer for SCSI devices and display them in the current window The VaultSvc then terminates The Vault configuration file provides the Vault Service with its run time operation parameters The configuration file is read by the Vault Service at each start The file is normally created by the Add or Remove Vault Wizard when a new Vault is added This file is located at lt install dir gt Config VaultSvc lt serice instance number gt cfg where lt service instance number gt is determined from the invocation line with the instance command line argument above Vault configuration files are formatted as follows policy name lt Vault name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Token Value Pairs A token is a configuration file attribute that gives a value to determines how the service is run Token act_log_enable lt boolean gt Value Enable activity logging When enabled all jobs 2015 Token act_log max size_mb lt number gt act_log pn lt pathname gt act_log recycle lt boolean gt active lt boolean gt admin_req_cmd lt command string gt 2015 Command Line Arguments Value retrievals loads ejections startups and shutdowns are written to the activity log Valid values true false Defaul
386. start time Access this from Vault Properties by clicking the General tab 2015 Phoenix RSM Securi Logs Notifications _ Diagnostics General Device Database License Description Vault Name HOSTNAME Type HardDisk Status Location 192 168 1 41 4744 Software version 6 1 9 Start time 2014 04 29 09 29 04 OK Cancel Help 1 Change the selected Vault s name and type a new name in the Vault Name box 2 Click OK and the new Vault name is listed under Entire Network in the Vault Admin left pane General Tab Elements Element Description Vault Name The name of the Vault You can change the name of the Vault at any time The entered name appears in the Vault Admin left pane under Entire Network 2015 Vault Management 89 Element Description Rather than hard coding a Vault Name use the variables HOSTNAME and TYPE HOSTNAME is replaced by the computer name and TYPE is replaced by the type of Vault Type Read only box displaying the type of device Location Read only box displaying the IP address of the device Software version Read only box displaying the software version of Phoenix RSM Start time Read only box displaying the time when the Vault was first started Vault Properties Device Tab Use the Device tab to change the selected Vault s storage connection resource settings The values displayed on this tab change depe
387. stopped Reboot your computer Manually restart the service Be sure that files have not been moved since the original installation If files are moved the Apple Installer updates those moved files where they currently exist instead of the Phoenix RSM installation folder in Applications Try uninstalling the software and installing new copy Ensure connection to an active network If laptop is not connected to a LAN the applications may not function properly Check the current system requirements Be aware of CPU speed and disk read write capacity Check network congestion and connectivity Check permissions on data Check the current system requirements Ensure storage resources are active Ensure there is enough storage space available Check registry for the company name then the product name For example CompanyXYZ ProductXyYZ 2015 Troubleshooting Issue Possible Causes With recorded video e Verify the Vault is online check if powered down check the error Unable to network connectivity and check connectivity of the retrieve resource Vaults displays e Keep in mind that original video data from a single source may be stored on various Vaults and if those Vaults are not online then the video may generate this error As my job runs the e Check network connectivity errors Unable to allocate resources or Check space availability on media Pia nod Vaults e Ensure the Locato
388. stration of location with service modules responding to client queries about resource availability negotiating connections with client components receiving data from clients and storing it properly receiving metadata from clients and updating the Vault receiving CRC data from clients and using it for media write validation informing clients of success and failure during processing informing client components of matches and mismatches of the CRC on media data formatting receiving data lookup requests from clients locating restore data within the Vault responding to client requests for data retrieval and supplying data to clients as required During installation the Server version refers to the full suite of Phoenix RSM applications including Vaults In contrast the Client version does not include Vaults Service A process that runs in the background and performs a specific operation at predefined times or in response to certain events Source Refers to the location where data is captured ingested or extracted Static IP A network address which does not change Normally used to refer to the process of manually setting the IP address of network devices Storage Pool One or more pieces of media grouped for a common use Additional media can be added to storage pools at any time and searches can be limited to single storage pools with countless units of media regardless of which Vaults the media resides on stx A file that
389. supports collecting that the information then camera settings are set to preserve motion metadata along with captured video Once videos have been captured into the Information Repository Data Service Policies can manage your data assets from the Vault s within the Information Repository This provides for an efficient and powerful multi tiered Information Repository Find out other benefits to your solution by reading about Load Balancing or Complete and Accurate Stored Files in Data Management See also Live Viewer Workflow Basic Camera Steps 1 From your suite of product applications open the Camera Policies application CameraPolicies exe For further explanation of how to launch applications using different operating systems see Getting Started 2 Add a camera and a camera policy to your solution The easiest and quickest way to do this is through the Add Camera Wizard When adding a camera through the Add Camera Wizard a recording policy is automatically created for the camera From the Camera Policies main menu select Tools gt Add Camera Wizard e Instead of using the Add Camera Wizard you could add a camera manually through Camera Configurations and then create a recording policy separately See Create a Policy e You can always modify or delete a Camera Policy once it has been created See Modify a Policy and Delete a Policy e The Add Camera Wizard provides only Standard mode options 3 Define when to record videos
390. t false The maximum size in bytes of the activity log Default 50 bytes The location of the activity log Default lt usr local Phoenix gt Logs VaultSvcActivity 1 log Write new events at the beginning of the activity log file when the maximum size is reached Valid values true false Default false Specify if the Vault should be started Valid values true false Default true If not blank this command is executed any time offline media needs to be mounted It may be used to execute a shell script or executable that performs an activity any time a Vault requires manual intervention The command is executed with arguments as follows lt command string gt lt host_name gt lt media_name gt lt media_storage_location gt e host_name the name of the client machine needing access to the media e media_name the name of the media e media_storage_location the location specified when the media was originally taken offline Default empty 407 408 Phoenix RSM Token background lt boolean gt block_size_b lt number gt cache_size_mb lt number gt cgr_ id_ string lt SCSI device ID string gt console_pn lt pathname gt db_max files open lt number gt db_max mem mb lt number gt db_opt_tod lt mm hh gt Value For diagnostic purposes to debug the process Valid values true false Default true The block size in bytes used when w
391. t VLM A video aware subset of Information Lifecycle Management providing a comprehensive approach to managing captured video and its associated metadata Virtual Media Space set aside for use by a Vault on a storage device also used for other purposes A hard disk is an example of virtual media Media units on a hard disk are actually file system directories set up by the Vault Mapping a Vault to an entire hard disk Virtual hard disk media units enable you to remove removable disks from Vaults just as you would physical media such as tapes Virtual media units can span multiple disk drives or be set so that several virtual media units reside on a single disk drive Ww Watermark Marking video with embedded information to serve as visible identification X Y 2015 6 5 2015 448 Phoenix RSM Index A Add a Camera 149 209 Add a Vault 56 Architecture 16 We Camera 148 Add Camera 149 218 Motion Detection 226 Wizard 149 Camera Configurations 198 200 Camera Policies 158 Create a Policy 159 Delete a Policy 159 161 162 Modify a Policy 159 161 Window 177 Camera Pools 239 Camera Ports 235 Command Line Arguments 399 401 413 424 Companion Video File 251 Content Searching 338 Customize 331 HP Data Service Policies 297 Create a Policy 297 Delete a Policy 297 298 300 Modify a Policy 297 298 Window 311 Data Services Service 423 Directory Filters 343 a Export 162 203 300 Export Extensions 34
392. t lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt or dtu_type L lt evel gt error_log lt pathname gt exclude_dir_ spec lt pathname gt 2015 Camera Management Internal use only Internal use only Internal use only Ingest files based on time and date or job level Valid values AO Absolute Old Select files with a dtu date_time_use equal to or before the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number AN Absolute New Select files with a dtu equal to or after the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number RO Relative Old Select files with a dtu equal to or before the relative specified date RN Relative New Select files with a dtu equal to or after the relative specified date LO Ingest all files L1 Ingest all data changed since the last LO job e L2 Ingest all data changed since the last L1 job e L3 Ingest all data changed since the last L2 job e L4 Ingest all data changed since the last L3 job Default LO The path for the error log file If you specify devtty error messages display on the default output device Supports token substitution Default path for the configuration file R Logs P err Omit directories Accept multiple instances 168 Phoenix RSM exclude_file spec lt pathname gt ext_ metadata lt command gt ext_metadata_plugin lt character string gt
393. t n woman or women The query carbon fib searches names containing carbon fib lt two characters gt carbon fiber or carbon fibre Substitutes zero or more characters or can be used to Zero or more truncate multiple characters Use for alternative spellings characters and an unlimited number of characters within a word If used in a path it cannot replace a forward slash Examples The query behavi r searches names containing behavi lt any character or number of characters gt r behaviour behavior or behavi123 zr 2015 33 Phoenix RSM Wildcard One or more characters Zero or more characters in a pathname including slashes Description The query patent searches names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters patents patentable patented patent123 The query patent jpg searches names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt jpg patents jpg patentable jpg patented jpg patent123 jpg etc jpg substitutes for only all names containing lt any character or set of characters gt jpg Substitutes a minimum number or more characters The minimum number of characters matched is equal to the number of that follow the substitutes for at least two characters substitutes for at least three characters and so on If used in a path it cannot replace a forward slash Use within or at the end of a word
394. t Description i Every camera has a RTSP URL Validate the RTSP URL using Video LAN If you do not have a VLC media player download it for free at http www videolan org Once installed go to Start gt All Programs gt VideoLAN gt VLC media player In the VLC media player Media menu select Open Network Stream Type the RTSP URL and click Play Verify a connection If there is no connection here check the camera Ping the IP address to verify connectivity Go to Start gt All Programs gt Run In the Run window type cmd In the command prompt window type ping lt camera IP address gt and wait for a response If no connection the camera may be off If the camera is not listed and you are unsure of your camera s RTSP URL check with the camera s manufacturer Video Capture LRP Advanced mode only URL Check the checkbox to enable the Video Capture LRP URL From the drop down list choose rtsp The RTSP URL allows for capturing low resolution video feeds e In the first text box type the IP address or host name for the selected camera The second text box populates automatically when a camera manufacturer and model are selected You can also enter the entire URL manually Click the Test button to test the RTSP URL If the test is successful a Live View window appears A successful connection should take no more than 10 seconds If the test fails see the Video Capture URL element above for troubleshooting ideas
395. t Properties opens to the General tab by default From the following tabs select one to bring its properties into focus for modification e General Rename the Vault and view the Vault type and status information including location software version and start time e Device View SCSI information for Vaults as well as maximum files kept in a directory and maximum number of data streams Also change the amount of virtual memory used for each data stream cache for Vaults e Database View the database path Also change the time when the database is optimized set the number of maximum open files and set the amount maximum virtual memory used e License Access your Host Id and view installed licenses and license summary Activate a product key and change delete or import a license file e Security Define Vault access for users groups and domains e Logs Activate activity logging define an activity log path set maximum log size set what action to take when logs reach their maximum size and define where error logs go Notifications Set where events and e mail notifications are sent e Diagnostics Define where output messages are sent the type of messages sent and the level of message detail Vault Properties General Tab Use the Vault Properties General tab to change the overall settings of a Vault Here you can modify the Vault name and view the Vault type location software version of Phoenix RSM and Vault
396. t during a job Default 1 Include files tagged for deletion Valid values true false 2015 Data Management 303 Token Value Description Default false A description of the policy description lt character string gt Default Print diagnostic information to the path indicated in the list_pn option diag lt boolean gt Valid values true false Default false Directories to include Multiple dir_spec options can be specified The dir_spec check is made for every directory found This includes the directories dir_spec lt pathname gt contained in the path name list that the job traverses Default any Search for target files without processing them List the files that would have been processed displ ly lt boolean gt ae manent Valid values true false Default false The destination media name If not specified the dst_media_name lt character first available unit of media is used string gt Default any The destination media to be used according to media speed Valid values dst_media_speed lt character string gt e S0 S10 e Unspecified Default Unspecified The destination media type to be used dst_media_type lt character Valid Values oange e Hdisk hard disk e 8mm Eight millimeter tape 2015 304 Phoenix RSM Token Value dst_storage_pool lt character string gt dst_vault_name lt character
397. t installs 6 When the installation is complete restart your computer After installation is complete the next step is to add Vaults See Add or Remove Vault Wizard For more information about what s next see Getting Started Uninstall from Mac If you need to uninstall Phoenix RSM this can be easily done by following the steps below 2015 36 Phoenix RSM A The uninstall process will remove configuration files and data that were not in the original installation and created while using Phoenix RSM This may include databases and media storage Be sure to move any files or folders in the Applications gt Phoenix folder to a safe location before uninstalling the product e Administrator rights are needed to uninstall Phoenix RSM 1 Go to Applications gt Utilities and open a Terminal 2 In the Terminal type sudo Applications Phoenix Bin Uninstall sh and press Return 3 Enter the Admin password when prompted and press Return When you type the password will not be shown e This will uninstall Phoenix RSM from your Mac computer 4 Reboot your computer For more information see Installation Linux Perform the following steps to install on the Linux operating system Server Bundle for Linux 1 Open Setup html from your installation disc or installation folder Follow the directions to open the Phoenix RSM Server Bundle The following appears Phoenix RSM Install Wizard version x x x Welcome to the Instal
398. t media whenever possible When media is erased an erased flag is added that can easily be overwritten Erase media e When physical media with sequential write capabilities like data tape is used as the storage media it must be erased as part of the purge process If it is part of a multi level storage hierarchy where files are migrated and replicated viable data on the media must be moved to other media and the original media erased in order to purge old expired data e When media is used in a cycled Information Repository At the end of a cycle the old media being reintroduced needs to be erased by the Information Repository before it can be reused To erase media 1 From the Vault Admin left pane click the expand indicator plus sign in front of the Vault to erase media from 2 Click on the expand indicator for Media to hawe a tree of the media names displayed and also to have a list of the media names displayed in the right pane 3 Select desired media individual or multiple then click on the Erase Media button in the toolbar Or right click on the selected media and choose Erase Media from the shortcut menu The Erase Media window opens 3 Y pe You can erase multiple media by holding the Shift key or Control key and clicking on the desired media in the right pane 4 From the toolbar click the Erase Media button Or right click on the selected Media Name or the multiple selected names and choose Eras
399. ter and Description appear in the Camera Policies 5 Modify policy parameters as needed for each Camera Policies tab 6 Click the bd Save button to save all policy settings and implement the policy A If another user on the network makes changes to a policy while you have the Camera Policies application open there will be a popup message asking if you would like to refresh your view in order to see the most recent changes Clicking Yes to refresh your view will cause you to lose any of your unsaved work or changes Click No to continue modifying a policy without refreshing your view This may cause you to accidentally overwrite the changes the other user made 2015 162 Phoenix RSM E pe If you modify a recording policy while a job is running that is based on that policy the job stops as soon as it is finished processing the current file The job restarts as scheduled For example a job runs every day at 11 00 AM for 30 minutes While the job is running the policy is modified and the job stops If the scheduled start time was not changed the job starts at 11 00 AM the next day Delete a Policy You can delete a policy that no longer meets your needs or you can de activate a policy and then re activate it at a later time if needed To delete a policy 1 From the Camera Policies window left pane Recording Policy Name column click the policy to delete 2 Click the Delete button x 3 After deletion of a policy
400. ter search results for clips that have log entries associated with them turn on Search for preview images Search for low resolution proxies and Search for related files in User Preferences 3 Search for video To search for video captured on a particular date or between particular dates and times select Search using date range this activates calendar control bt a f When activated the calendar control is interactive for you to select a start date end date and times to search The top of the calendar control displays the months and dates while the bottom features start and end times 2015 25 Phoenix RSM Search Criteria Search using date range K October 2012 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 2 2 F g Start 2012 10 29 00 00 00 End 2012 10 31 23 59 59 Camera lt any gt More search options e Click on the calendar to select a search date range Click the start date and from the shortcut menu that appears select Start Date click the end date and select End Date Start and end date can be the same e Use the calendar to select a search time range within selected search dates Click the start date and from the shortcut menu that appears select Start Time ch Start Time kd Cancel e In the Start Time window select a time and click OK e Click the end date and from the shortcut menu that appears select End Time 2015 Surveillance V
401. tes about the content 2015 274 Phoenix RSM Time In Time Out User Date Time Color Title Description 2013 03 07 00 04 13 2013 03 07 00 05 14 Name 2013 04 07 12 31 01 Magenta Delivery man arrives The delivery man arrives and drops off a large package Logging Panel Elements Element Description Time In Time Out User Date Time Color The beginning time of the clip This value has both the calendar date and wall clock time for that clip This value can be changed by using the left scissors button in the Media Viewer The end time of the clip This value has both the calendar date and wall clock time for that clip This value can be changed by using the right scissors button in the Media Viewer The user who created the log entry Year Month Day and time that the log entry was created or last edited The date and time will be updated when the log entry is edited and then saved The color of the bullets associated with the clip and log entry 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 275 Element Description Each log entry has a corresponding bullet color that can be used to visually associate related clips Choose from White Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta or Black Title The title of the clip and log entry A user can change this value by typing a new title in the text box The title will be displayed in the list of log entries at the top of the Logging
402. the longest and 10 is never unload lt arguments gt Unload media for the selected Vault Valid arguments e media name e media tracking lt yes no gt e if keeping track enter storage location e update the media if needed lt yes no gt vaults Display a list of registered Vaults vexer lt arguments gt Run the canned Vault exercises Valid arguments e storage pool scale factor minimum file size maximum file size e maximum sleep time check file lt yes no gt stop test on error lt yes no gt e time to run lt hh mm ss gt Vault Service The Vault Service VaultSvc manages the Vault s on the network and runs as a background service As Vault Service runs its behavior can be modified with the command line options listed below You can enter a single argument a single argument and usage or version or a combination of several arguments and usage or version The command line is formed as follows 2015 s Phoenix RSM VaultSve lt option gt lt option gt Argument instance lt number gt service_install lt number gt or service_remove lt number gt usage version Scan Configuration File Structure Description Define the instance number of the Vault service to be started Windows only Install is for manually installing the service Remove is for manually removing the service You can use only one argument at a time Valid value service in
403. the Media Viewer to view videos at different speeds search metadata content navigate to a particular point in a file clip parts of the video for export and send clips to the Export Queue It is comprised of the basic controls of any popular video viewer such as volume play stop skip forward skip back beginning and end and the following additional controls y on da pe Remember that low resolution companion files also called proxy files are playable videos a fraction of the size of stored originals and are created when data is captured or ingested They allow for quick retrieval and viewing of stored video The low resolution companions remain online even if their originals are offline They are entirely managed and fully searchable 2015 268 Phoenix RSM 2013 02 12 10 05 29 Fee el eae 10 07 56 a l M MM P2 10 07 56 ws 10 07 56 IMAA gt 1 0 The Media Viewer is comprised of the controls in any popular video viewer such as volume play stop skip forward skip back beginning and end and the following additional controls 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 269 A few things to note about the SVM Media Viewer e The histogram in the Media Viewer is different from the one on the Surveillance Video Manager Search Results pane in that it represents all of the found videos for the one particular camera selected from the Search Results pane When a video clip is selected from
404. the Search Results pane the Media Viewer allows playback and review of the entire timeline that was specified from the Search Criteria pane not just the recorded clip generated which by default is five minutes long For example with a date range of July 20 to July 26 you may have a large number of thumbnail Search Results to choose from Once you click a thumbnail item a Media Viewer displays all video from July 20 to July 26 for the camera associated to the thumbnail selected The Media Viewer offers great flexibility to search back and forth within the video timeline and to view the histogram associated to the timeline of a selected camera The pointer on the timeline is located where the video clip selected appears along the timeline Multiple Media Viewer can be opened at once each depicting the entire timeline associated to the Search Criteria date and time requested If the Media Viewer is left open and another thumbnail is selected from the same camera the pointer on the timeline shifts to the new time If a thumbnail is selected from a different camera then a new Media Viewer opens Histogram The histogram in the Media Viewer spans video recorded from one camera not just one video segment from the camera This is useful for you to quickly view portions of the video with the most interest The histogram appears as a sunken horizontal bar and if a supported motion detection enabled camera has captured motion detection information t
405. the Shift key or Control key and clicking on the desired tape media in the right pane 5 From the toolbar click the Load Media button Or right click on Media and choose Load Media from the shortcut menu Or right click on the selected Media Name or the multiple selected names and choose Load Media from the shortcut menu Media Location Load unknown media x Choose Media zj Force Re Index Only re ndex ifneeded x cancel eo _ 5 From the Media Location drop down list select Load unknown media to load a media that is already physically loaded into the Vault s storage device Select Load from storage slot to load a media from a known storage slot within the Vault s storage library 6 From the Choose media drop down list select media It displays all of the media in the storage device 7 From the Force Re Index drop down list use the default setting Only re index if needed Phoenix RSM indexes the media if necessary but you can force re indexing to ensure that your media is re indexed by selecting Force a re Index of media 8 Click OK to complete the process and new media appears in the media list Reload Media As long as you are tracking media your Vault displays media even if the media has been unloaded from the storage device Reloading media means to add it to the storage device after it has been taken offline If you are using tapes or glass media insert the media into its
406. the policy The limitations to adding a new name for a Vault Media Name or Storage Pool are e Typing a new name for the Vault Media Name and Storage Pool options are limited to lt any gt and lt new entry gt e New entries in Media Name or Storage Pool do not limit options in the remaining fields e Wildcard additions for example Ac appear beneath lt any gt See Wildcards Camera Policies Destination Tab Elements Element Description Vault From the drop down list select a Vault or select lt new entry gt to add a new Vault name The Enter New Vault Name window opens for you to type a Vault name If a Vault is selected the Media Name drop down list is automatically populated with the media on the given Vault If a new entry is given then the Media Name and Storage Pool options are limited to lt any gt or lt unnamed gt and lt new entry gt Media Name Media Name refers to the names of individual units of media in the Vaults within the Information Repository 2015 Camera Management 191 Element Description From the drop down list select the media or select lt new entry gt to add a new media name The Enter New Media Name window opens for you to type a media name The system automatically looks for any storage pools comprised of the selected media If it cannot find any then the Storage Pool drop down list displays lt any gt Storage Pool Storage pools are groupings of media on a single
407. the targeted computer e From the When to overwrite existing files field in the Export Job Configuration pane select Always e Click Start Export to retry exporting video For more information see Search Surveillance Video and Surveillance Video Manager SVM User Preferences Use the Sureillance Video Manager User Preferences to define default settings for the Search and Export tabs of the Surveillance Video Manager Access the Surveillance Video Manager User Preferences from the Surveillance Video Manager Tools menu select User Preferences 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 289 Window Appearance Enable too Enable advanced user mode Load images immediately when scrolling Preferred format for embedded time display Wall Clock 7 then QuickTime Enable hardware overlay Enable multiple threads for decode Enable storyboard Video Cache nCac Browse Cache size 5 GB Y Clear cache when exiting Export Destinations Enable Rimage Configure Enable FTP Site Cancel Surveillance Video Manager User Preference Elements Group Element Enable tool tips Enable advanced user mode Window Appearance Load images immediately when scrolling 2015 Description A check mark by this element indicates that tool tips for the Surveillance Video Manager will display De select to turn tool tips off Select to view advanced information such as run time size and frame size i
408. throughout the Information Repository Phoenix RSM queries each Vault regarding the best match for processing requirements storage resources free space and then establishes a connection to the Vault and copies files to the Vault The network remains load balanced Locator Service The Locator Service makes dynamic resource allocation possible which delivers unlimited storage resource accessibility within the network It works as a virtual middle tier to provide information that enables clients and Vaults to work like a traditional client server system but without the need for hard coded static links between clients and servers In contrast the Locator architecture is flexible to allow dynamic client access to any storage resource on your network The Locator maintains a list of currently available product services by using a multicast and beacon technology and it provides this list to clients on the network as needed To accomplish this the Locator constantly listens for active registered vaults The Locator list notes Vault status and location changes Every Locator is self propagating and shares information with other Locators within the Information Repository Log file Error logs are created only when the program encounters a problem Set the pathname in Vault Admin gt Vault Properties gt logs to define where error logs are written and stored An activity log provides logistical information about jobs Log file rotation When a new l
409. tiple users to use the same clip selections even though they are working on different machines Save the Export Queue Selections 1 Click File gt Export Queue gt Save as This will open the Save Export Decision List window Description Surveillance Video from Rear Lot Destination File C Surveillancevideo Export RearLot xdl Cancel 2 Type a description of the clips in the Description text box 3 Type a pathname in the Destination File text box or click Browse to open the Choose a File window e If you clicked Browse navigate to a preferred folder and enter the file name to be saved as in the File name text box Click Open 4 Click Save in the Save Export Decision List window to complete the save process 2015 Surveillance Video Manager 265 Save Export Decision List window Elements Element Description Description The description of the export decision list The description is used to provide a quick reference to what is contained in the export decision list This is optional Destination File The file to which the export decision list will be saved Manually enter the pathname of the file or click Browse to navigate to a preferred folder and type the file name Load the Export Queue Selections from a File 1 Select File gt Export Queue gt Load from This will open the Load Export Decision List window Source File C Surveillancevideo Export RearLot xdl Browse Load Cancel He
410. to expand for details when Help is being viewed online Other blue text can be clicked to follow a link to another page in Help or to a website Symbols This guide uses icon symbols to easily identify information vite Indicates a useful tip aS Indicates a warning statement Path names The sample paths in this guide are for a Windows operating system Depending on the operating system you are running use the appropriate naming convention Paths for hard disk media log files and miscellaneous directories are case sensitive on non Windows computers Unless otherwise noted when searching for a file or when creating a Vault values typed are not case sensitive but are case preserving the application ignores the case When entering paths only use the forward slash as a path name delimiter You may get unexpected results if a backslash is used Privileged Users Privileged users have rights to override security in the application as it relates to Phoenix RSM resources media stored data vault operations but do not have rights to override local computer security The following are privileged users e Windows Administrators group e Windows Backup Operators group e Windows Domain Administrator user e Windows Domain Admins group e POSIX root user UID 0 e POSIX root group GID 0 Unsupported naming conventions in Windows Some Windows applications create filenames with characters that are
411. to you via e mail 5 After receiving the license file from lt Vault Name gt Properties gt License tab click the Add button Import license or product key file v Select License or Product Key File 2015 98 Phoenix RSM 6 From the Add License window select Import license or product key file from the drop down menu 7 Type or click the Browse button to navigate to the received license file lic or a product key file pk 8 Click Ok to complete manual activation A If you are having problems activating your license visit the SoleraTec website for manual activation Licensing options on website Download Select a product and download it with an evaluation license which is good for seven days Purchase If connected to the internet buy a product This provides you with a product key Once the product key is entered into the product key information it pulls a license file to your machine and activates it automatically Activate Use if you already have a product key and your computer is not connected to the internet Find a computer with internet access and submit your Host Id A license file will be sent to you to import it into the product 2015 Vault Management 99 Vault Properties Security Tab Use the Security tab to add change and delete user group and domain rights for the selected Vault Vault rights override media rights see Prepare Media Access this from Vault Propert
412. tore data want to move data around on my network want to bring data back from storage to review or use want to record and capture video wile This is not a disjointed system of data collection and then backup storage It is a digital asset management solution which seamlessly integrates your data from video capture to storage and then immediate data retrieval regardless of when or where stored The following diagram provides an overview of Phoenix RSM s architecture illustrating how the different components of your solution work together You can see how your digital data assets are captured or ingested into your Information Repository and are under complete management and never out of reach Your assets can be searched on moved around to different Vaults on the network and retrieved in original quality for you to use 2015 Introduction Target amp Process Service Capture video Locator Service Listen for Vaults TAP cameras Original video LRP THM Sa Database Vault Service Data Services Store video Service implement search Manage video and permissions move copy delete Other Vaults on network Other Vaults on network Vault Administrator Manage Vaults Surveillance Video Manager Search play and export video E P Data Service Policies Locator Service Manage data service policies Listen for Vaults Live Viewer TAP
413. tored ernorm hostname abiaySuLWrels Ge ie IL ais job_type aise jom mim Eile eize max RLE Size src_vault_name src_media_name Unspecified Unspecified Wan i als wR LOGS se ern false Nikee aY SR Logs P log 0 18446744073709551615 Wau Wau In other words you 2015 Data Management 311 sre storage poo Hyi etue izations src_media_speed Unspecified SeOe_Mechia ityioe Unspecified src_volume_ format Unspecified src_volume_name S src_volume_ pack volume_use Unspecified out_of band true post_proc_cmd uu pre _proc_cmd wu repect _iimeowyell 00 00 20 src_high water mark 80 src_low_water mark 80 stop time RO000 00 00 00 00 00 summary true throttle 100 ves F500 Data Service Policies Window The Data Service Policies window is divided into two main panes The left pane provides an overview of all of the Data Service Policies in the Information Repository noting the policy name type and description The right pane consists of the Source Criteria Destination Scheduling and Advanced tabs to populate when creating a policy Use the Data Service Policies toolbar to create a new policy by clicking the Add button The toolbar consists of the following buttons bd Save all policy settings Add a new policy x Delete the selected policy S Refresh the view for the latest version of each policy to display Since Data Service Policies are impl
414. try Name type User x Entry name x cane _ Hep 2 From the Name Type drop down list select a type of right Rights are granted to the entity selected The type of right can be User Group Domain or Everyone 3 In the Entry Name box type a name for the new entry This name appears in the Name column The name entered must be valid for the computer where the Vault is running 4 From the Rights drop down list select the actual rights granted to the given user group domain or everyone The following are the selections Full Control Allows the user group domain or everyone to have full control over a selected Vault Store Retrieve Allows the user group domain or everyone to store and retrieve data from the Vault Retrieve Allows user group domain or everyone to retrieve but not store data from the Vault None Blocks the user group domain or everyone from doing anything with the Vault 5 Click OK 6 Use the up and down arrows to move the new entry up or down in the list to change the priority the new entry is given in relation to other users groups and domains ae whe amp Phoenix RSM reads rights from top to bottom checking for access in the following order User Group Domain World If a match is found at the User level the other types Group Domain World are not checked if a match is not found at the User level the Group entries will be checked starting with the
415. tting advanced lt boolean gt Valid values on off Default off Register a test entry by broadcast in all global maps t Brontyas Available only in advanced mode Find all Locator Services on network and determine how long to wait for responses from other Locator find lt seconds gt Services on the network Valid Values 1 format lt alpha gt Set or view address format 2015 so Phoenix RSM Argument Description Valid values e dot e host e full help Print usage information for all commands host lt hostname gt Set or view default host setting his Shores List entries in locator at lt hostname lt In advanced mode displays extended output quit Exit the application register lt hostname gt Register a test entry in global map at lt hostname gt Appears only in advanced mode Shuts down the Locator Service at lt hostname gt shut lt hostname gt i Available only in advanced mode status Print current settings Set or view communications timeout value timeout lt number gt Valid values 0 9 For more information see Vault Management Command Line Arguments and Locator Service Locator Service The Locator Service makes dynamic resource allocation possible in Phoenix RSM which delivers unlimited storage resource accessibility within the network It is the tool which locates and provides communication between clients and Vaults enabling them to work like a traditional cli
416. tton or select the camera from the Select the manufacturer and model drop down lists If you click the Find Cameras button a Search Results window appears showing a list of cameras found on the network If your camera is not on the list select the Show all devices checkbox for any additional cameras on the network and other devices to display If your camera still does not display use the Select the Manufacturer and model drop down lists option and type the IP address or you can add it manually in Camera Configurations In the Search Results window cameras in use appear grayed out and available cameras for configuration have an asterisk in the first column Select a camera and click OK or double click the camera item for the camera information to configure IP Address Manufacturer Model m 192 168 001 144 IQinVision 1Q732N 192 168 001 242 TRENDnet TV IP312 lt Total devices 6 Show all devices Refresh OK cane o Help 2015 152 Phoenix RSM vits pe If the camera manufacturer or model is not listed use the Camera Configuration window to add the camera rather than this wizard 4 In the What is the IP Address text box type the host name or IP address in dot notation 5 Type the User Name and Password for the camera if they are required to access it 6 Click the Test Camera button to start a viewer to test whether the supplied information is correct What if my camera is not is not listed i
417. tware on the computer where Phoenix RSM is installed may interfere with Phoenix RSM operations If you are running a local firewall make sure all Phoenix RSM components have pass through rights to at least the locally connected network or networks Refer to your operating system documentation regarding how to unblock Phoenix RSM from communicating Date and Time Properties on Computers with Vaults All computers in the Information Repository that contain Vaults and any VMS system that video is captured from must be synchronized to the same time source for the Information Repository to function correctly Multicast Phoenix RSM uses multicast and beacon technology to communicate between clients Vaults and available Phoenix RSM services The default Phoenix RSM multicast address is 224 0 23 160 Server Bundle and Client Bundle Contents When you install the DVD or launch the installation executable you are given the option of installing a Server Bundle or a Client Bundle If you select to install the Client Bundle only a subset of the applications in the Server Bundle are installed vite py Applications listed below that end with Cl and Svc are run from a command line The Server Bundle and Client Bundle include the following Module Contents Server Client Help Browser based HTML help Yes Yes Documentation PDF based documentation Yes Yes Administration Applications for administration and Yes Yes Information Repository monitoring i
418. ty The path for the error log file error_log lt pathname gt The default path is lt install dir gt Phoenix Logs DataSvcsSvc log foreground For diagnostic purposes to debug the process This option is for UNIX only background Default background Specify a path for verbose output See verbose list_pn A lt pathname gt below Default dev tty service_install lt number gt Windows only e Install is for manually installing the service service_remove lt number gt e Remove is for manually removing the service 2015 s Phoenix RSM Argument update_int lt seconds gt usage verbose noverbose version Description Default the service instance number Specify the configuration update interval If the config file is modified during the job session the Information Repository re reads it To disable this option set the interval to 0 Default 60 List all valid parameters Control whether progress information is printed to the path indicated in the list_pn command e Verbose causes progress information to be printed e Noverbose causes progress information not to be written Default noverbose Display the current version information Live Viewer Command Line Start the Live Viewer from a command line and set options on how to view it The command line is formed as follows LiveViewer lt option gt lt option gt 2015 Co
419. u a dynamic server less solution with a no single point of failure where you can get to your data quickly and easily at any time Scalable solution Rather than having one giant expensive storage unit you can easily add storage space incrementally as your business grows and your data requirements increase This promotes significant cost savings as you can add less expensive storage units Multi tiered storage Different types of storage units can be integrated into the solution at different times This supports long term retention needs and unlimited retention possibilities Online near line and offline communication Low resolution companion or proxy files are created and completely managed by Phoenix RSM These proxy files are stored locally but always teamed with high resolution originals making it possible for thorough worthwhile searches throughout your entire Information Repository Phoenix RSM provides fast retrieval of original video or files even if the media is stored offline Phoenix RSM A Video Surveillance Solution Phoenix RSM is a live viewing and forensics based software that provides complete surveillance video management The Phoenix RSM video management system VMS seamlessly integrates all components from the camera to any number of storage devices Phoenix RSM includes extensive camera compatibility as it can connect and configure to any RTSP enabled IP camera and it has an unlimited live video matrix with t
420. u would like to view From the Patrols folder you can create and manage patrols There are also controls to access camera controls and the pan tilt Zoom and focus of cameras Camera ports or view frames On the left side of the window display are the live feeds from the cameras selected By default the Live Viewer is set to display feeds from four cameras arranged in two rows of two across Change that default layout by using the View drop down list at the top of the right hand control panel The screenshot below shows a layout with feeds from five cameras displayed If you create a new layout remember to save it so you can use it as your default layout Axis 211 Rear Deck Axis M1011 Patrol Volume Digital Mechanical Pan Tilt TRENDnet IP312 Panasonic_sp306 Camera Control 2015 Live Viewer 237 In the Live Viewer each camera view frame includes a Title bar Right click on the camera Title bar to display a shortcut menu with the following menu items the Enable advanced user mode user preference must be selected to see the shortcut menu Shortcut Menu Items Description Highlight the camera view frame Panel options are available select if applicable Close the camera view or click the Close button on the close Title bar vite pe Double click the Title bar of the view frame for the camera to quickly change the default layout to a port full screen taking the camera into and out of a 1x1 view
421. ues e pathname New path name to the license file load lt argument gt Load the media for the selected Vault Arguments for a tape Vault with a mailslot e load from mailslot lt yes no gt e if loading from mailslot mailslot loc e if not loading from mailslot storage loc e force reindex of media lt yes no gt Arguments for a tape Vault with no mailslot e storage loc e force reindex of media lt yes no gt Arguments for a hard disk Vault e media name e media in default location lt yes no gt e if not in a default location pathname e force reindex of media lt yes no gt media List the media for the selected Vault 2015 Command Line Arguments 403 Argument Description mstat lt name gt Display media status e name Name of the media to display name lt name gt Set the name for the selected Vault Valid values e name New name for the Vault prepare lt arguments gt Prepare media for the selected Vault Arguments for a tape Vault with a mailslot media name Barcode ID description storage pool content searching lt yes no gt file de duplication lt yes no gt load from mailslot lt yes no gt e if loading from mailslot mailslot loc e if not loading from mailslot storage loc e prepare media now lt yes no gt Arguments for a tape Vault with no mailslot media name Barcode ID description storage pool content searching file de duplicati
422. umber gt fs_num_virt_drives lt number gt license_string lt character string gt type vaultsvc vault_instance lt number gt so Phoenix RSM Value Default empty The path to the error log file Default lt usr local Phoenix gt Logs VaultSvc1 log For diagnostic use only Enable Vault to use on media database partitions to increase the speed that unknown media is loaded A When false every load of an unknown media results in a sequential re indexing of the entire media Valid values true false Default true The default location for a hard disk Vault to store media Default lt usr local Phoenix gt Media The maximum number of files stored in a single directory contained on a unit of hard disk media This option is valid only for hard disk Vaults Default 100 The number of concurrent data connections to use at one time This option is valid only for hard disk Vaults Default 10 The 80 character ASCII text string that is contained within a license file An empty license string causes the service to run in evaluation mode Default empty The type of configuration file Only valid value vaultsvc Define the instance number of the Vault service to start 2015 Command Line Arguments 411 Token Value Default 1 The name of the Vault service that runs HOSTNAME and TYPE variables can be used instead of a hard coded name
423. umber of the currently installed command line application Only the current version number is valid This number changes with new releases Currently not supported Note Timing tokens are mutually exclusive Only one timing token may be set Set either absolute_start or repeat_interval or start_days and start_time 2015 Command Line Arguments 423 Data Services Service The Data Services Service DataSvcsSvc runs automated migrate replicate and purge jobs in the Information Repository using Data Service Policies For the Data Services Service to execute Phoenix RSM must have a policy that specifies everything needed to process targeted files A targeted file is any file that meets all the criteria defined in the policy As DataSvesSvec runs its behavior can be modified with the command line options listed below You can enter a single argument a single argument and usage or version or a combination of several arguments and usage or version The command line is formed as follows DataSvecsSve lt argument gt lt argument gt Argument Description Specify the file that contains all job criteria config ispatnn mes Default lt install dir gt Phoenix Config DataSvcsSvc cfg diag Run the service in diagnostic mode All internal activity displays on the local terminal podne Default nodiag The path where all diagnostic information is written diag_pn lt pathname gt The default path is dewt
424. undle The following appears You chose to install the Server package to usr local Phoenix Is this correc HA y es n o b ack q uit gt y 5 Type y The following appears As services are started you may safely ignore any warning messages 2015 3 Phoenix RSM which specify WARNING or No active vaults found Installing Phoenix RSM Server package After installation is complete the next step is to add Vaults See Add or Remove Vault Wizard For more information about what s next see Getting Started Uninstall from Linux If you need to uninstall your Phoenix RSM from Linux this can be easily done by following the steps below ite pe The uninstall process does not remove modified configuration files or files that were not in the installation bundle such as log files or files that could have been added e Administrator rights are needed to uninstall Phoenix RSM e Before uninstalling Phoenix RSM create a backup copy of any data that you do not want to lose 1 Enter the following command at root where Phoenix RSM was originally installed Phoenix Bin uninstall 2 Reboot your computer For more information see Installation Getting Started Getting started with SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM is easy This section provides instructions on how to launch the Phoenix RSM applications and then how to quickly get started with a basic Phoenix RSM workflow The Quick Start will get you up and running but
425. up button 2015 no Phoenix RSM Type of Checkup Quick M Check basic functions Takes the least amount of time Normally will complete in less than one minute ox Cancel Hep 3 From the Vault Checkup dialog box select from the drop down list a level of check to run Each level examines the Vault function speed and load bearing capacity to some degree Quick Check basic functions and takes the least amount of time Normally completes in less than one minute Normal Check commonly used functions Best tradeoff of time and complexity Normally completes in five minutes Extensive Exercise the Vault for functionality and speed Normally completes in ten minutes 4 Click OK to complete the process Upon completion a Vault Checkup output window appears containing the results of the checkup Prepare Media Use the Prepare Media window to add and load media to your Information Repository All the parameters can be set to prepare a unit of media to use with a Vault Some of these parameters cannot be changed unless you reformat the media see Prepare Existing Media Depending on the type of media the Prepare Media window appears with slight differences Before you can prepare media Vaults should already be added to your Information Repository Remember that the Vault to add media to must be unsecured before you can prepare any media To add Vaults see Add Vaults Prepare New or Unknown Media Fo
426. ur Information Repository The Vaults themselves have unique licensing and media attributes associated with them The tools for managing Vaults on your network are e Add or Remove Vault Wizard An application to use for adding or removing a hard disk Vault standalone data tape Vault or a data tape library Vault e Vault Admin The Vault Admin application allows you to view Vaults on your network This can be run from the server or from the desktop client component e Vault Services Vault Services is the engine that runs a Vault If there are multiple Vaults then a Vault Service runs for each Vault This service must be run on the server component There are several facets to Vault management most having to do with preparing and managing media The Vault Admin is designed to support the day to day tasks associated with managing Vaults For more information see Vault Admin Basic Media Concepts Phoenix RSM Vaults use media to store video and data all of which is protected and managed by the Information Repository By using the Vault Admin application you can manage media in your Information Repository Managed media can be in a physical form such as a digital computer data tape or it can be in a virtual form such as a portion of hard disk assigned for use by the Information Repository The list of media utilized is constantly being expanded and every type of media has features that make it suitable for a certain purpose For exa
427. ur camera s video feed appears with the date time and Preset ID listed at the top of the image Ensure that Preset ID is set to SOLERATEC TM 2015 232 Phoenix RSM Network Camera WV NS202A WV NS202A JPEG MPEG 4 Cam Function Image Position Way 2572010 11 Live Setup menu Basic setup Multi screen setup Alarm setup Authentication setup Server setup Network setup Schedule setup Maintenance Help Image Adjust Preset Position 5 If the Preset ID is not set to SOLERATEC TM you need to set it Beneath the video feed find Preset Position and then click Setup The Position No page appears 2015 Camera Management 233 Preset No Position No Preset ID Preset ID 0 9 A Z Any changes are updated immediately Auto focus AUTO OFF ON OFF Super Dynamic 3 6 In the Preset No drop down list select SOLERATEC TM and then click the Set button In Position No 1 the Preset ID item should be set to On and the Preset ID 0 9 A Z item should be populated with SOLERATEC TM i via pe If SOLERATEC TM is not an option for Preset No ensure that you have added your camera to the Information Repository correctly 7 Select Close to exit the window and return to the Camera setup page Image Position tab The Preset ID beneath the date and time should be SOLERATEC TM 8 Select Alarm setup for the Alarm setup page 2015 234 Phoenix RSM N
428. ured text file At the end of this section there is a sample Site cfg You will need to modify the file to meet your own criteria before implementing it Site cfg is comprised of at least one or more policy_name blocks each is for a remote site e The policy_name field is for information use It can be set to anything but it must exist e The version and type fields must be set as shown in the table below e You can place as many remote site blocks into the file as you need a Everything is case sensitive including the filename Site cfg Block name Valid Token Values Description The value for version must be set to version 1 0 1 0 Required The value for type must be set to type sitecfg sitecfg Required policy_name lt policy name gt The IP address for the remote site ip_address lt P that you are trying to access address gt Required The label for the control as it will appear in the application description lt character string gt Valid values a string Required Create a Site cfg Example 1 Open a text editor such as WordPad or Notepad and start a new document If using WordPad be sure to create a Text Document txt and not Rich Text Format rtf 2 Copy and paste the following Site cfg sample file into the new document POLLC meine ADSM NURK version EO type Sitecfg ipiladdress TNE O AS REN description DSM NVR 2015 370 Phoenix RSM POlLcy me
429. using the options from the drop down list 4 Click Set to save and activate your settings Supported Cameras Your Phoenix RSM supports all RTSP enabled Panasonic 202 series cameras Live Viewer Use SoleraTec s Phoenix RSM Live Viewer application to view live video feeds directly from RTSP enabled IP cameras View action as it is happening with the Live Viewer Before seeing live feeds cameras must be configured in the Camera Policies application as part of your Information Repository To view live feeds in the Live Viewer the Live View URL checkbox must be selected and the IP address must be entered in the first field of the Video Capture or Live View URL when adding the camera configuration If this is done and you want to get started quickly see View Camera Feeds 2015 236 Phoenix RSM A To be able to view and record live video feeds you must ensure that RTSP is enabled on your IP camera See your camera s documentation for details on enabling RTSP Most cameras can manage a single live feed while video streams are being captured More than a single live feed on any given camera affects performance The Live Viewer window is divided into two main areas e Control panel The right side of the Live Viewer includes several items of interest From the View drop down list select a display layout for the Live Viewer window the arrangement of camera ports From the Cameras folder select cameras which have the feeds yo
430. vault_name lt character string gt HOSTNAME is replaced by the computer name TYPE is replaced by the Vault s type Default HOSTNAME _ TYPE The type of Vault service that runs Valid values e HardDisk vault_type lt alpha gt e SingleTape e TapeLibrary Default HardDisk The version of the configuration file version lt number gt Valid value 1 0 Define the Vault s working cache directory The working cache directory is the place where the Vault can store temporary items during its working_cache_pn lt pathname gt normal activities This working cache is especially important when clipping video files Default lt usr local Phoenix gt WorkingCache The amount of disk space the Vault s working cache may use to store temporary files On tape Vaults the working cache should be large working_cache_size_gb lt number gt l enough to hold multiple large video files Default 100GB For diagnostic use only When set to true enables the read after write check of most tape drives Setting this to false is unadvisable as write_with_verify lt boolean gt doing so can cause unreported data corruption Valid values true false Default true 2015 n Phoenix RSM Sample Vault Configuration File policy nane WY Wenrouliesweil type version activa vault_name Welle wigisiccuaierS Welle EIS db_opt_tod db_max_mem_mb db_max_files_ open db pn fs d
431. ve been deleted or purged from the Information Repository Because it writes sequentially a file marked for deletion may lie on the media between two viable files The files eligible for removal are marked as deleted even though they remain on the media Erase media when all oe files are deleted or no Media will be erased when all the files stored on that media longer referenced have been marked for deletion 2015 33 Phoenix RSM Element Description e Select this option to erase the media when all files are deleted or no longer referenced For media which do not support random file deletion i e tape this will make the media fully available and usable again A This option is only enabled when a policy is a purge or migrate policy 2015 Data Management 331 Offline Media During a data service job offline media is used only if Include offline files is selected from the Advanced tab If Include offline files is not selected attempting to use media that is offline may result in a No resources available error if media cannot be found File Name Field Variables The file path can include a literal file name or a combination of variables to generate file names for reports Use variables to distinguish between reports and to find specific reports If a path with a literal file name is typed like C Program Files Logs Job_Report log the system generates the report destination folder Logs if it does not al
432. ve view the camera cannot test view the camera All of my camera configurations and recording policies are missing My camera is not recording Possible Causes according to manufacturer s recommendations Check that the camera has a valid static IP address configured Check that the camera is not blocked by a local or remote firewall Validate that the camera IP address manufacturer model user name and password settings are correct in the Camera Configurations Validate the RTSP URL using VLC Media Player 1 Once installed go to Start gt All Programs gt VideoLAN gt VLC media player 2 In the VLC media player Media menu select Open Network Stream 3 Type the RTSP URL and click Play Verify a connection If there is no connection here check the camera Ping the IP address to verify connectivity 1 Go to Start gt All Programs gt Run 2 In the Run window type cmd 3 In the command prompt window type ping lt camera IP address gt and wait for a response If no connection the camera may be off If remotely connected to a computer video may not play correctly Check that the NAS is running correctly Has the NAS been factory reset or storage re initialized Must recreate configurations Were they manually deleted Camera does not exist in Camera Configurations Camera is not enabled in Camera Configurations Recording policy is not enabled in Camera Policies Record
433. video the low resolution video is the primary video footage received but it is always paired with the original source video The original stored either online near line or offline is totally accessible when needed and under full Phoenix RSM management 2015 188 Phoenix RSM Elements Description 2 Select a resolution quality setting for the proxy companion video A lower setting produces a smaller file e High Same frame size as original high video quality audio is compressed to QDesign 44kHz e Medium 320x240 frame size medium video quality audio is compressed to QDesign 44kHz e Low 320x240 frame size low video quality audio is compressed to QDesign 14kHz 3 Select a frame rate for the low resolution companion video AN Phoenix RSM will not generate thumbnails or low resolution proxies for files Generate preview 1 Select to generate a preview image if not selected a image preview image is not created 2 Use the Preview image quality drop down list to select a resolution setting A lower setting produces a smaller file e High Original size e Medium 320x240 e Low 100x75 2015 Camera Management 189 Camera Policies Destination Tab Use the Camera Policies Destination tab to determine the Vaults media storage pools and other options where your video files are recorded or captured Read this section before you set Vault Media Name Storage Pool Media Type and Media Sp
434. vigate to the file location where you have saved your camera configurations file select it and then click Open The camera configurations from the file are added to the Camera Configurations window 4 Click the Save button to save the modified camera configurations to your Information Repository vite Before you can import a camera configuration file you must create one The following sections contain reference information for doing so 2015 204 Phoenix RSM Camera Configuration File Structure Camera configuration files are block structured but free from any column or order formatting The tokens listed below specify camera parameters Each policy_name block is a single camera policy name lt camera name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt policy name lt camera name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Tokens Value Pairs Tokens define camera attributes and functionality Following are the tokens and their definitions Token Value ace data active lt boolean gt description lt character string gt frame_height lt integer gt frame_width lt integer gt Description The access control list entry No default Determine if the camera is active or inactive For the live view and camera management to work this option must be set to true Valid values true false Default true A description of the camera
435. w File Edit View Tools Help Save Wizard Add Delete CY Refresh 7 Cameras C n iin sia sii i Recording Policy Name Camera Camera Metadata Scheduling ibe AxisVC_098 Axis VC_098 Camera Information ile AxisvC_099 AxisVC_099 Camera Canon_M700F Active X Ee Axisvc_100 AxisVC_100 Sa Basler 1300DN Basler_1300DN m Canon_M40 Canon_M40 Ea Cohu_3930HD Cohu_3930HD rtsp 192 168 1 227 profile1 le Cricket_SFC6 Cricket_SFC6 EZ Grandstream 3601LL policy Grandstream 3601LL 7 ile 1QEye_765N IQEye765N PE ie QEye_D31S 1QD31S 1Qinvision_M32N TQinvision M32N hg 4 w r policy is not active 2015 wis pe A triangular caution symbol on the policy icon in the left pane of the window indicates that the 178 Phoenix RSM From the left pane you can edit the Active setting of a policy Setting a policy to Active allows the policy to run You can edit the active setting of policies by right clicking on an individual policy or multiple selected policies select multiple policies by holding theShift key or the Control key and clicking on the desired policies choosing Change Active Setting from the shortcut menu either selecting or de selecting the Active option in the dialog box and then clicking OK Click the Save button in the toolbar to implement any changes immediately A When multiple policies are selected with different current active settings the checkbox will be shad
436. w Description Specifies the picture thumbnail image quality for the low quality setting Default 2 Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings 2015 304 Phoenix RSM Key Key Type DWORD value Value 1 worst 10 best Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value 1 worst 10 best Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPictQualLow Int32 4 3 Name VideoComponentsGenPictWidthMed Description Specifies the picture thumbnail target width in pixels for the medium quality setting Default 320 Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Minimum of 1 Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Minimum of 1 Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPictWidthMed Int32 4 400 Name VideoComponentsGenPictHeightMed Description Specifies the picture thumbnail target height in pixels for the medium quality setting Default 240 Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value Minimum of 1 Keys conf Format 2015 Customization 395 Key Type Int32 Length 4 Value Minimum of 1 Sample Usage VideoComponentsGenPictHeightMed Int32 4 400 Name VideoComponentsGenPictQualMed Description Specifies the picture thumbnail image quality for the medium quality setting Default 5 Used by Target and Process Service Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value 1 worst
437. w often the database is optimized to ensure that the database is optimized Information Repository continues to function at its full potential It is recommended to optimize the database for every Vault daily Maximum open files Limit how many files can be open simultaneously Having more files open allows for faster searches but requires more Information Repository resources Range 10 500 Maximum virtual Limit how much virtual memory the database uses For best memory used Information Repository performance select a value that does not exceed 75 of the physical memory on the computer Range 256 MB 2 GB Vault Properties License Tab Get a licensed product from SoleraTec You can purchase a licensed product online or download a trial version from SoleraTec s website By default this product comes with a seven day evaluation license At the end of the evaluation period you can request an extended evaluation product key or purchase a product license through the same sales channels For more information see Product Licensing a If you run the software longer than seven days with an evaluation license your Vaults will shut down or your cameras will no longer be tied to the software Until a license is purchased and added the Vaults run in increments of only two hours From Vault Properties use the License tab to manage Vault licenses e The Summary group displays your license totals for the selected Vault e The Host Id group dis
438. window displays Installing The program features you selected are being installed Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs This may take several minutes Status Copying new files InstallShield Back Next gt Cancel 10 When the installation is complete the InstallShield Wizard Completed window presents you with the options to see the readme file and log InstallShield Wizard Completed Click Finish to exit the wizard 7 Show the readme file E Show the Windows Installer log Finish 11 Click the Finish button to complete the process After installation is complete the next step is to add Vaults See Add or Remove Vault Wizard For more information about what s next see Getting Started wit e py When updating a previous Phoenix RSM installation all Phoenix RSM Services settings will be reset to installation defaults If you made any changes to these settings in the prior installation you may need to reapply your changes after the update completes Uninstall from Windows 2015 32 Phoenix RSM If you need to uninstall your Phoenix RSM from Windows this can be easily done by following the steps below i pe The uninstall process does not remove modified configuration files or files that were not in the installation such as files that could have been added e Administrator rights are needed to uninstall Phoenix RSM e Before uninstalling Phoenix R
439. window will open 3 Scroll down to find the desired Service For example SoleraTec Locator Service 2015 o Phoenix RSM File Action View Help e9 AA as BA gt gt au bp amp Computer Management Local a System Tools Task Scheduler Select an item to view its description Name Description Status Startup Type Event Viewer Gh ActiveX Installer Provides Us Manual Shared Folders G Adaptive Brightness Monitors a Manual g Local Users and Groups Gh Adobe Acrobat U Adobe Acro Started Automatic Performance Adobe Flash Playe This service Manual ay Device Manager Gh Adobe SwitchBoard Adobe Swit Manual a 5 Storage Gh Application Experi Processes a Started Manual E Disk Management Sh Application Identity Determines Manual a B Services and Applications Gh Application Infor Facilitates t Manual E Services Application Layer Provides su Manual jj WMI Control C Application Mana Processes in Manual Gh ASP NET State Ser Provides su Manual Gh Background Intelli Transfers fil Started Manual Ch Base Filtering Engi The Base Fil Started Automatic 4 BitLocker Drive En BDESVC hos Manual lt i m a r 4 Right click the desired Service and then select Start or Stop If the actions are disabled check your Windows administrator rights a Services will automatically restart
440. workflow For more information see Technical Overview Technical Overview To use Phoenix RSM effectively it is useful to understand its different components and how they interoperate to create a federated Information Repository Phoenix RSM s balanced extended client server design provides advantages over technologies that rely on a client server client or server component to drive and manage operations In a typical client server model clients are hard coded to specific servers and cannot be changed without some manual interaction Our extended client server architecture includes a Locator Service which dynamically locates and uses any storage resource available on the network as needed This design proves advantageous over a traditional client server model as it includes e Automatic fail over If there is more than one Vault available clients can divide their use of the available Vaults Clients fail over from the current Vault in use to another Vault should the current Vault fail Dynamic resource allocation Any network computer with Phoenix RSM installed can access storage resources on the network An Information Repository can be comprised of many storage devices based on whatever storage media and drive technology you want Flexible parameters are configurable to send stored data to different storage devices based on the storage performance and longevity requirements For more information see Locator Service e Load balancin
441. working cache is located The default temporary files can be location is lt install dir gt WorkingCache stored When processing files Phoenix RSM may create temporary files which enable fast efficient work and are important for clipping video files Temporary files are kept in the working cache A Any changes will override the values entered when you first added the Vault using the Add or Remove Vault Wizard Amount of disk space Define the amount of disk space permitted to use for the that can be used working cache Range 10 900 GB Vault Properties Database Tab Use the Database tab to allocate resources for a Vault database Select when a Vault is optimized the maximum number of files to open at a single time and the amount of virtual memory the Vault uses Access this from Vault Properties by clicking the Database tab 2015 o Phoenix RSM General Device Database Storage Database pathname Database Resources Time daily when database is optimized 2 Jf Maximum open files Maximum virtual memory used 1 00 GB Z cme Hp 1 Select preferred Vault values 2 Click OK to save new settings Database Tab Elements Element Description Database pathname Defined when installing a Vault It indicates the location where the database is stored on the host computer s hard disk 2015 Vault Management 95 Element Description Time daily when Set ho
442. x is de selected if the camera associated with it is not marked as active or if there is no recording computer selected to run the policy Camera Polices are visible to all computers in the Information Repository that are running Camera Polices and have appropriate permissions e Because recording policies are implemented across the entire Information Repository other users can change policies while you are working in Camera Policies To ensure that you are viewing the most current list of policies click the Refresh button from the toolbar e Duplicate policy names are permitted A If multiple people in your organization create or modify camera configurations or recording policies do not attempt to make changes at the same time Doing so may cause someone s work to be unintentionally overwritten Recording Policies The terms Camera Policy and Recording Policy may seem synonymous but there is a slight distinction Camera Policies encompasses all the features and functions found in the Camera Policy application A Recording Policy refers directly to the name of the policy associated to a camera and all the parameters to make it run In the Camera Policies window the left pane specifically lists all the existing recording policy names and is saved as part of the active configuration Recording policies run on an assigned computer They define when video is recorded or captured and where it goes in the Information Repository whe
443. xePathname Char 14 C MyFfmbc exe Name FimpegExePathname Description Pathname to ffmpeg executable Default lt install dir gt Bin ffmpeg exe Used by VideoComponentsGen Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname of executable Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname of executable Sample Usage FimpegExePathname Char 15 C MyFfmpeg exe 2015 2015 Customization Key Name FimpegJoinExePathname Description Pathname to joining version of ffmpeg executable Default lt install dir gt Bin ffmpeg_v112 exe Used by VideoComponentsGen Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname of executable Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname of executable Sample Usage FimpegJoinExePathname Char 15 C MyJoiner exe Name InstallRoot Description The location of Phoenix directory Default usr local Phoenix Used by All Phoenix RSM applications Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname of the root directory Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname of the root directory Sample Usage InstallRoot Char 18 usr local Phoenix Name IpAddressList Description Restricts TCP addresses that are used when the computer has multiple network connections Default Addresses of all network connections 377 378 Phoenix RSM
444. ximate spelling To execute use the tilde symbol at the end of a single term Example To query for a term similar in spelling to report use report This search find terms like deport reports and reporting You can specify the level of similarity Using a value between 0 and 1 only terms with a higher similarity are matched with values closer to 1 For example roam 0 8 The default is 0 5 if a value is not defined Use range searches to match documents where field values are between the lower and upper limits specified by the search and the searches can be inclusive or exclusive of the limits Inclusive range searches are marked by brackets Exclusive range searches are marked by curly braces Example 2015 Customization sat Wildcard Description To query a date mod_date 20020101 TO 20030101 finds files whose mod_date fields have values between 20020101 and 20030101 inclusive To query a non date title accounting TO sarbanes finds files whose titles are between accounting and sarbanes but excluding accounting and sarbanes A Control the relevance of a document by boosting the value of a specific term to search for Boosting a term To boost a term use the caret symbol with a boost factor a number at the end of the search term The higher the boost factor the more relevant the returned term will be By default the boost factor is 1 Although the boost factor must be positive it can be
445. xt size text color and the actual text to be used as the watermark If Bitmap then a box displays where the pathname of a watermark file can be entered or click the Browse button to browse for the watermark file wile When using QuickTime as the backend to watermark a video the preferred format for a watermark file is Portable Network Graphics png extension If you use a bitmap bmp file the watermark image will not be transparent and it will be surrounded by a white box covering up part of the video Generate metadata xml files for output along with video If selected a drop down list appears for you to select Create multiple files or Create a single file e Create multiple files The metadata file has the same name as its associated video file but with the xml extension One metadata file per video is created and they stick together e Create a single file A single file containing the metadata for all files being exported is generated A Metadata output file box appears requiring a name for the metadata file Click the Browse button to select At a minimum the data included contain pathname file id size and the date and time modified Export data back to its original location or to any other location on the network Original location Export data to its original location Different location Export data to another location Use the Browse For Folder window to select the location and click OK
446. y files that contain compliance and may contain corporate you would use corporate compliance NOT NOT excludes documents that contain the term after NOT exclamation point or minus symbol can be used in place of NOT NOT cannot be used with just one term Example To query documents that contain corporate but not compliance use corporate NOT compliance Grouping To control the boolean logic for a query use parentheses to group clauses to form sub queries Example To query for either corporate or compliance and Second Quarter 2007 you would use corporate OR compliance AND Second Quarter 2007 This ensures the phrase after AND must exist and either term within the parentheses may exist Field Grouping Use parentheses to group multiple clauses to a single field 2015 Customization 343 Wildcard Description Example To query a file containing both return and the phrase overdue accounts you would use title return overdue accounts Escaping special characters can be a part of the query syntax Special characters are Escaping special characters amp amp J To execute a search using these characters literally to escape any of these character use before the character Example To query for 1 1 2 use 1 1 2 In this case if you do no use the escape character for 1 1 2 the query would search for OR 1 OR AND 1 OR OR OR 2 vite pe It
447. zero will disable all sync operations Default 10000 Used by VaultSvc Windows Registry Settings 2015 2015 Customization Key Key Type DWORD value Value Number of operations Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value Number of operations Sample Usage DbSyncintOps Int32 4 10246 Name DoBroadcast Description Enable broadcast of events and messages such as location of Vaults and Vault startup shutdown Default 1 true Used by VaultSvc TgtProcSvc LocSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value 0 false or 1 true Keys conf Format Type Int32 Length 4 Value 0 false or 1 true Sample Usage DoBroadcast Int32 4 1 Name DoMulticast Description Enable multicast of events and messages such as location of Vaults and Vault startup shutdown Default 1 true Used by VaultSvc TgtProcSvc LocSvc Windows Registry Settings Key Type DWORD value Value 0 false or 1 true Keys conf Format 375 376 Phoenix RSM Key Type Int32 Length 4 Value 0 false or 1 true Sample Usage DoMulticast Int32 4 1 Name FimbcExePathname Description Pathname to ffmbc executable Default lt install dir gt Bin fimbc exe Used by VideoComponentsGen Windows Registry Settings Key Type String value Value Pathname of executable Keys conf Format Type Char Length Number of characters in Value Value Pathname of the executable Sample Usage FimbcE

Phoenix RSM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents